PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class History Book Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 History Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Give a brief account of the contribution of Guru Nanak to Sikhism.
Answer:
When Guru Nanak Dev Ji was born in the 15th century, the political, social and religious condition of India was pitiable. The Muslims belonged to the ruling class. They hated the Hindus and perpetrated cruelty on them. Religion had been reduced to the level of mere outward show. People were groping in the darkness of ignorance. The condition of women-folk in society was very deplorable. Guru Nanak Dev Ji undertook travels in the various parts of the country and abroad to dispel superstitions prevalent among people and to bring awareness in ’ them.

Guru Ji preached to worship only one God, to lead pious and truthful life, to give equal rights to women and to shun superstitions. Wherever he went, ‘ he deeply impressed people through his teachings. Guru Ji raised a voice against the tyranny of the ruling class and officials and injustice. He founded two institutions namely Sangat and Pangat. A new religious brotherhood had come into being in the lifetime of Guru Nanak. Before he immersed with Immortal in 1539 A.D. Guru Nanak appointed Lehna (Guru Angad) his successor. The appointment of Guru Angad proved very significant for the development of Sikh Panth.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 2.
What do you n$ean by Udasis? What were the aims of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’ Udasis?
Or
What were the aims of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji mean the travels undertaken by him. The main objective of Guru Nanak’s Udasis was to dispel the ignorance and superstitions of the people. He wanted to convey the message of the universal brotherhood of mankind and worship of the only one God to the people. Both the religions — Hinduism and Islam had gone astray and forgotten their true principles. The priestly class whose duty was to guide people had themselves turned corrupt and characterless.

When the religious leaders themselves grope in the dark, it is not difficult to ascertain the condition of the common people. The people had started worshipping a number of gods, goddesses, graves, trees, snakes, stones etc. In this way, the true spirit of religion had disappeared. Society was divided into many castes and sub-castes. People of one caste hated the people of the other castes. The condition of women-folk in society was pitiable. They were not treated as equal to men. Guru Nanak started his Udasis to show a new path to the people who were groping in darkness.

Question 3.
Write a brief note on any five important Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
1. Saidpur: Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his first Udasi from Sultanpur and reached Saidpur (Eminabad). When he reached there, Malik Bhago, a landlord of the village, invited Guru Ji to a feast, but Guru Ji stayed in the house of a poor carpenter Bhai Lalo. Malik Bhago compelled Guru Nanak Dev Ji to explain his conduct. Guru Nanak Dev Ji took the food of Malik Bhago in one hand and the rough and dry bread of Bhai Lalo in the other hand and pressed them. Blood dripped from Malik Bhago’s food, whereas milk dripped from Bhai Lalo’s bread. In this way, Guru Nanak Dev Ji proved that we should earn our livelihood by honest means and hard labour.

2. Talumba : Guru Nanak’Dev Ji met Sajjan at this place. He had built a temple and a mosque within his Haveli. During the day, he served these travellers nicely but at night he used to rob them and sometimes killed them and threw their bodies into a secret well. He was planning to play the same trick with Guru Nanak Dev Ji and Bhai Mardana. However, when at night Guru Nanak Dev Ji recited his melodious Bani, Sajjan thug was moved and he fell at the feet of the great Guru and sought his pardon for his bad deeds. Guru Nanak Dev Ji forgave him. After this incident, Sajjan gave up cheating and killing, became a true Sajjan and spent his remaining life propagating Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings.

3. Gorakhmata: After Haridwar, Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Gorakhmata. Here, Guru Ji told Sidh Jogis that one cannot get salvation by wearing earrings in the ears, by applying ash (vibhuti) to the body or by blowing horns, by holding sticks or by shaving of heads. These Jogis were so impressed with his teachings that they became his disciples. Since then, Gorakhmata is called Nanakmata.

4. Hasan Abdal: On his return journey to Punjab, Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped at Hasan Abdal. Here an arrogant Faqir, Wali Kandhari in a fit of rage, rolled a very heavy stone rock downward from the hilltop to kill Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped it with his palm. This place is known as ‘Punja Sahib’ these days and there stands a splendid Gurdwara.

5. Mecca: Mecca is the birthplace of the Prophet Mohammad. According to Sikh tradition, when Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Mecca, he slept with his feet towards the Kaaba. When Qazi Rukun-ud-Din noticed it, he flew into a rage. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained to him that Allah is present everywhere.

Question 4.
Give a brief account of the First Udasi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
1. Saidpur: Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his first Udasi from Sultanpur and reached Saidpur (Eminabad). When he reached there, Malik Bhago, a landlord of the village, invited Guru Ji to a feast, but Guru Ji stayed in the house of a poor carpenter Bhai Lalo. Malik Bhago compelled Guru Nanak Dev Ji to explain his conduct. Guru Nanak Dev Ji took the food of Malik Bhago in one hand and the rough and dry bread of Bhai Lalo in the other hand and pressed them. Blood dripped from Malik Bhago’s food, whereas milk dripped from Bhai Lalo’s bread. In this way, Guru Nanak Dev Ji proved that we should earn our livelihood by honest means and hard labour.

2. Kurukshetra: Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kurukshetra on the occasion of a solar eclipse. Here, Guru Nanak Dev Ji told the gathered people that one should lead a simple and precious life. His words worked like magic and many people became his disciples. The majority of historians don’t agree with this incident.

3. Gorakhmata: After Haridwar, Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Gorakhmata. Here, Guru Ji told Sidh Jogis that one cannot get salvation by wearing earrings in the ears, by applying ash (vibhuti) to the body or by blowing of horns, by holding sticks or by shaving of heads. These Jogis„were so impressed with his teachings that they became his disciples. Since then, Gorakhmata is called Nanakmata.

4. Kamrup : When Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kamrup in Assam, a famous witch Nur Shahi along with some other beautiful women, tried to cast a spell on Guru Nanak Dev Ji by her alluring gestures and extraordinary display of tempting charms but she failed. Guru Nanak Dev Ji showed them the right path.

5. Jagannath Puri : After a visit to Assam, Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Jagannath Puri in Orissa. The priest of Jagannath Puri temple asked Guru Nanak Dev Ji to pay homage to their Lord Jagannath. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told them he did not believe in formal worship of aarti. Nature, all the time, is busy with the worship of that Almighty God. So, there is no need of offering artificial worship to Him.

Question 5.
What do you know about the Second Udasi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
1. Kailash Parbat: Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kailash Parbat (Sumer) via Tibet. The Siddhas were greatly surprised at Guru’s arrival there. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told them that the truth had disappeared from the world and falsehood and corruption prevailed everywhere. Guru Nanak Dev Ji advised them to serve humanity.

2. Ladakh: Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Ladakh from Kailash Parbat. Impressed by the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, many people became his disciples.

3. Kashmir : Guru Nanak Dev Ji held a very lengthy religious debate with Pandit Brahm Das at Mattan in Kashmir. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained to him that mere reading or reciting of the Vedas and the Ramayana could not bring salvation. Salvation can be attained only by one’s actions in accordance with the teachings of these holy scriptures.

4. Hasan Abdal : On his return journey to the Punjab Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped at Hasan Abdal. Here an arrogant Faqir, Wali Kandhari in a fit of rage, rolled a very heavy stone rock downward from the hill top to kill Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped it with his palm. This place is known as ‘Puuja Sahib’ these days and there stands a splendid Gurdwara.

5. Sialkot: Guru Nanak Dev Ji met a Muslim saint named Hamza Ghaus at Sialkot. He was angry with the people of this town over some issue and he was determined to destroy the whole, city with his power. But, when he met Guru Ji he was so impressed that all his anger disappeared. This incident impressed the people.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 6.
Give a brief account of the Third Udasi of Guru Nanak Dev Ji
Answer:
1. Multan : Mhny Sufi saints lived in Multan. Here Guru Nanak Dev Ji met a famous Sufi saint Shaikh Bahauddin. He was greatly impressed with Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings and became his disciple.

2. Mecca : Mecca is the birth place of the Prophet Mohammad. According to Sikh tradition, when Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Mecca, he slept with his feet towards the Kaaba. When Qazi Rukun-ud-Din noticed it, he flew into a rage.When the Qazi turned Guru Ji’s feet to the other directions, the Kaaba also began to turn towards those directions. At this, the Qazi and other Muslims present were deeply impressed. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained to them that Allah is present everywhere.

3. Medina : From Mecca Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Medina. Guru Nanak Dev Ji gave here his message of love. He had a religious debate with Imam Azim here.

4. Baghdad : Guru Nanak Dev Ji met Shaikh Behlol in Baghdad. He was so much impressed with the Bani of the great Guru Nanak Dev Ji that he became his disciple.

5. Saidpur: When Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Saidpur at the end of 1520 A.D., Babar attacked this town with a view to occupy it. The Mughal army put to death thousands of innocent people during this attack. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was also arrested along with them. But when Babar came to know that Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a great saint, he set free not only Guru Nanak Dev Ji but many other prisoners also.

Question 7.
Briefly describe the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Give a brief account of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
The Nature of God : Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in one God only. He laid stress on the oneness of God in his Bani again and again. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). He is the absolute Lord. He is the greatest of all.

2. Maya : According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Maya is the biggest obstacle in man’s way of attaining salvation (mukti). An unregenerate (manmukh) man always indulges in the vicious circle of worldly things like wealth, status, power, luxury, beautiful woman, son etc. It is Maya. Thus, one who yields to Maya is caught in the cycle of transmigration and his chains are not cut.

3. Denunciation of the Caste System: The Hindu society of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s time was divided not only into four main castes but into many sub-castes also. The members of the upper castes hated the people of the lower castes and treated them very badly. The practice of untouchability was very common. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned the caste system in unequivocal words. Guru Nanak Dev Ji preached the principle of universal brotherhood of mankind.

4. Denounced Ill-treatment of Women : During the time of Guru Nanak Dev Ji the condition of women in Indian society was extremely pitiable. Many evil practices had crept in. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned emphatically all such evils as were prevalent among women of that time. Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid emphasis on the equal rights of men and women.

5. Importance of Guru : Guru Nanak Dev Ji regarded the blessings of the Guru as most important in order to reach God. According to him the Guru is the ladder by means of which one reaches God. It is the Guru who leads a man from darkness (ignorance) to light (enlightenment). But it is not an easy affair to find out a real Guru. Man cannot find the real Guru without the blessings of God Himself.

Question 8.
What was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of God?
Or
What were the views of Guru Nanak Dev Ji about God?
Answer:
1. The Unity of God : Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in one God only. He laid stress on the oneness of God in his Bani again and again. According to the Sikh tradition the letter ‘IK ONKAR’ (afi) which appears in the beginning of the Mool Mantra stands for oneness of God. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world and His direct exercise of these functions reduces all other deities to meaningless shadows. They are just a tiny star before God.

2. Nirguna and Saguna: God has two forms. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). In the beginning, God created the earth and the space and He existed in Himself. It was His Nirguna form. Then, He created this world and through it He revealed Himself in His creation. This is His Saguna aspect.

3. Creator, Sustainerand Destroyer : God alone is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. By His order (Hukam) men, animals, birds, rivers, mountains, forests etc. Came into existence. God does not merely create.He is also the Destroyer and Recreator of the world.

4. Immortal: The universe created by God is unstable and impermanent but God is immortal. He is beyond the cycle of birth, death and rebirth. Thousands of Mohammads,
Brahmas, Vishnus, and Ramas stand in obedience before Him. All of them are mortal, whereas God is immortal.

5. Greatness of God : According to Guru Nanak Sahib, God is the greatest of all. His greatness is beyond description. Thousands of Saints and Bhagatas have sung songs in praise of His greatness, yet not a fragment of His greatness could they express. His praise, His mercy, His knowledge, His gifts cannot be described.

Question 9.
What was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of Maya?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji regarded Maya as the biggest hurdle in the way of man’s salvation. The.multicoloured Maya allures man to itself. An unregenerate man remains engrossed in worldly things such as wealth, status, beautiful women, sons etc. It is called Maya. In fact, the entire creation is God’s Maya. It is a snare. An unregenerate man does not know the difference between the Creator and His creation. He does not realize that all other than5 God is subject to annihilation. Maya whom he loves so much does not accompany him after his death. It separates man from God by keeping him absorbed in worldly things. One who yields to Maya also remains caught in the cycle of transmigration. By accumulating riches-gold, silver etc.-a man considers himself to be a great person of the world. But actually, he is collecting poison for himself. Thus, he ruins his life by being caught in ‘dubidha’ (misery arising from affiliation to anything other than God).

Question 10.
What is the importance of ‘Guru’ in Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings?
Or
What was the concept of “Guru” according to Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
In his teachings Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid much emphasis oil Guru. The Guru is a ladder by means of which one attains salvation. Without the Guru’s guidance no one can attain salvation. An unregenerate man remains engrossed in worldly enjoyments. It is the Guru who purifies his mind. He can become one with the God if he follows the instructions of the Guru. A meeting with the Guru results in killing the ego. The misery born of vices ends and the good fortune is awakened. The Guru gives knowledge about Truth, Nam and Shabad. The Guru dispels the darkness of ignorance. Only the Guru leads a man from darkness (ignorance) to light (realisation). It is not easy to get a true Guru. One cannot get Guru without the Nadar (grace) of God. It is worthy to note that when Guru Nanak Dev Ji talks of Guru, he does not refer to any human Guru. The human Gurus are blind. A true Guru is God Himself who is revealed through the Word (Shabad).

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 11.
Throw light on the importance of Kirat Karo, Nam Japo and Wand Chhako.
Answer:
Nam Japna, Kirat Kama and Wand Chhakna are the three basic principles of Sikhism. Remembering Divine Name : Remembering the Divine Name or Simran is considered to be the highest form of worship of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji said that on one hand remembering the Divine Name eradicates all sins of the heart, on . the other hand it becomes placid. For this reason, man’s sorrows come to an end. All his fears are dispelled. By remembering the Divine Name, a man’s works are accomplished easily because God Himself helps him in all his works. Without Name, man’s life on this earth is futile.

Honest Labour : Kirat means honest labour* Honest labour is extremely important. It is the ordain of the Absolute (Hukam). We observe everyday that every creature earns his livelihood through Kirat. Hence the need for honest labour is extremely essential for man because he is the head of all creatures. A person who does not perform honest labour cannot keep his body fit. Such a person actually performs a sin against the Absolute.

Sharing with the Needy: Sikhism hasgreatlyemphasised on Wand Chhakna. Wand Chhakna means to share with the needy. Sikhism does not advocate sharing after eating but sharing before eating. It also inspires to treat others as brothers and sisters and to share with them. Sikhism believes in donating Daswandh. It means that one should spend one tenth of one’s income towards the cause of social welfare.

Question 12.
Write the views of Guru Nanak Dev Ji about the women.
Answer:
The condition of women-folk during Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s time was very miserable. They were considered not equal in status to men in society. Many evils existed among them like-child marriage, polygamy, purdah system, sati system and divorce etc. For these reasons, birth of a female child was considered an ill- omen. Guru Nanak Dev Ji strongly criticised the prevalent evils relating to women. He launched a forceful campaign to enhance the respect of women in society. He opposed child-marriage, polygamy, purdah system and sati system etc. He was in favour of according women equal rights with men. In this regard Guru Nanak Dev Ji allowed Women to join Sangat and Pangat. Guru Nanak Dev Ji said that woman who gave birth to great emperors, should not be called inferior. He was in favour of giving education to women also.

Question 13.
What was the social meaning and significance of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s message?
Or
What was the impact of teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
The social meaning of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s message is very important. His message was for everyone. Any man or woman could take the path shown by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. The path of salvation was open for all. Guru Nanak preached social equality. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned the caste-system in strong words. In order to put his message of social equality into practice, he founded two institutions-Sangat and Pangat. No discrimination of caste was observed while preparing the Langar. Guru Nanak Dev Ji strongly criticised unjust policies of the rulers and corruption existing in his time. Besides the ruling class, Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned in unequivocal terms the corrupt officials of the government. In this way, Guru Nanak Dev Ji identified himself with the masses.

Question 14.
How far were the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji different from the Bhakti reformers?
Answer:
The teachings of Gum Nanak Dev Ji were different from the teachings of other religious preachers in many ways. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is formless. He never acquires the human form. The Bhakti preachers regard Krishna and Rama as the incarnations of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was deadly against idol- worship while the other religious preachers had full faith in it. Guru Nanak Dev Ji nominated Guru Angad Dev Ji his successor for preaching Sikhism and continuing the Gurgaddi. On the other hand very few Bhakti preachers continued the tradition of establishing Gurgaddi. As a result they couM not maintain their identity for long. Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in leading a married life. The Bhakti preachers thought it to be a big hurdle in the way of salvation. Gum Nanak Dev Ji founded two institutions of Sangat and Pangat. Anybody could join these without any discrimination of caste and creed. The Bhakti preachers .did not set up any such institution. Guru Nanak Dev Ji did not consider Sanskrit a holy language. He preached his teachings in Punjabi, the language of the masses. Most of the Bhakti preachers gave Sanskrit the status of a holy language.

Question 15.
How and where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji spend last 18 years of his life?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji established Kartarpur (Abode of God) on the banks of the Ravi in 1521 A.D. He spent the last 18 years of his life with his family at this place. During this period he set up the institutions of Sangat and Pangat. Sangat meant the congregation which gathered to hear the Bani of the Gum everyday. Every man or woman could join the Sangat without any discrimination. Only the name of God was recited and chanted in the Sangat. Pangat means to sit in a line and take food together. In this Langar (the community kitchen), no discrimination of caste, creed or religion was observed. Both these institutions proved helpful in the spread of Sikhism. Besides Guru Ji composed here 976Shabads. This work of the. Guru proved extremely useful for the development of Sikhism. Main Bani of Guru Nanak Dev Ji includes Japji Sahib, Var Majh, Sidh Gosht, Var Malhar, Barah Maha and Patti etc.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Essay Type Questions:

Question 1.
Give a brief account of the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
The life time of Guru Nanak Dev Ji can be divided into three periods. Accordingly, the first period, 1469 to 1499 A.D. is related from his birth to enlightenment. The second period, 1499 to 1521 A.D. is related to the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. The third period, 1521 to 1539 A.D. is related to his stay at Kartarpur wdth his family and his work for the spread, growth and development of Sikhism.

First Period : 1469 to 1499 A.D.:

1. Birth and Parentage : Guru Nanak Dev Ji was born on 15 April, 1469 – AD., on Purnima (the day of full moon) at Rai Bhoi Ki Talwandi, a place-now situated in Sheikhupura district of Pakistan. This holy place is now known as Nankana Sahib. His father Mehta Kalu Ji, a Patwari of the village, belonged to Bedi Kshatriya family. His mother, Tripta Ji, was a pious and religious minded lady. According to Sikh traditions, many miracles were witnessed at the time of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s birth.

2. Childhood and Education : Guru Nanak Dev Ji was quite serious and thoughtful by nature since his childhood. He was not much inclined to games and was interested in the worship of God. When he was seven years old, he was sent to the Pathshala of Pandit Gopal for elementary learning of Hindi and Mathematics. He surprised Pandit Gopal by his spiritual knowledge. Later on he learnt Sanskrit from Pandit Brij Nath and Arabic and Persian from Maulvi Qutub-ud-Din. When he was nine, Purohit Hardyal was called to perform the ceremony of the sacred thread (Janeu). Guru Nanak Dev Ji categorically refused to wear the sacred thread and remarked that he would wear the thread of kindness, satisfaction, truthfulness and restraint which would never break, burn or get besmeared.

3. In various occupations: Having noticed the over indulgence of Guru Nanak Dev Ji in his thoughts, his father was alarmed. So, he tried to keep his son busy with one work or other. First of all, he was asked to graze buffaloes, but Guru Ji did not show any interest. Consequently, his father decided to set him in trade. He gave Guru Ji a sum of twenty rupees and sent him to the market to strike a profitable bargain. On way to the market, Guru Ji met a group of sadhus, who were hungry for many days. Guru Ji spent the whole amount on feeding those sadhus, and returned home empty handed. This event is known as ‘Sacha Sauda’ (true bargain) in history.

4. Marriage : Mehta Kalu Ji married him to Sulakhni Ji, daughter of Mool Chand of Batala. He was 14 years old then. In due course of time, he was blessed with two sons named Sri Chand and Lakhmi Das.

5. Service at Sultanpur Lodhi: At the age of 20 years, Guru Nanak Dev Ji was sent to Sultanpur Lodhi by his father Mehta Kalu to his son-in-law Jai Ram (Guru Ji’s brother-in-law). On his recommendation, Guru Nanak Dev Ji got a job in Modikhana (the store). Guru Nanak Dev Ji did this job honestly for ten years.

6. Enlightenment: While at Sultanpur Lodhi, Guru Nanak Dev Ji used to go to the rivulet Kali Beip daily in the morning to take a bath. One day, he went as usual for taking bath and remained untraceable for three days. During these three days Guru Nanak Dev Ji gained true knowledge. At that time, he was 30 years old. After enlightenment, Guruji uttered, “Na Ko Hindu, Na Ko Musalman”.

7. Udasis: After attaining enlightenment in 1499 A.D. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his travels in India and abroad. These travels were called the Udasis. These Udasis were conducted with the objective to dispel the ignorance of the people and to preach the unity of God and brotherhood of mankind. In India Guru Nanak Dev Ji travelled from Kailash mountain in north to Rameshvaram in south and from Pakpattan in west to Assam in east. Outside India Guru Nanak Dev Ji travelled to Mecca, Madina, Baghdad and Sri Lanka. We get important information from his Bani about the travels of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. He spent about 21 years in these Udasis. Guru Nanak Dev Ji succeeded in his aim to a great extent during these Udasis.

8. Settled at Kartarpur: Guru Nanak Dev Ji founded a town named Kartarpur (the abode of God) at the banks of the Ravi river in 1521 A.D. and spent the last 18 years of his life at this place. He started the institutions of ‘Sangat’ and ‘Pangat’ during this period. Besides, he composed 976 Sabads, which also proved extremely helpful for the spread and development of Sikhism. The prominent Banis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are Japji Sahib, Var Majh, Asa di Var, Sidh Goshti, Var Malhar, Bara Maha and Patti.

9. Nomination of the Successor: Guru Nanak Dev Ji nominated Bhai Lehna Ji, his famous disciple as his successor, before he immersed in Eternal Light. Guru Nanak Dev Ji placed one coconut and five paise before Bhai Lehna Ji and bowed his head. In this way, Bhai Lehna Ji came to be known as Guru Angad Dev Ji. Thus, Guru Nanak Dev Ji planted a sapling, which became a dense tree at the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. According to Dr. Hari Ram Gupta,

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings Img 1

” The appointment of Angad was a step of far-reaching significance.”

10. Immersed in Eternal Light : Guru Nanak Dev Ji Immersed in Eternal Light on 22 September, 1539 A.D.

Question 2.
Write a note on the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. What was the aim of these Udasis?
Or
What is meant by Udasis? Give a brief account of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Briefly discuss the travels of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. What was their aim?
Or
Give an account of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Describe briefly the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. What was their impact on society?
Answer:
After attaining enlightenment in 1499 A.D., Guru Nanak Dev Ji set out on long travels in India and in foreign countries. He spent about 21 years in these travels. These travels of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are known as Udasis because he wandered like an Udasi (unconcerned, unattached) during these years and renounced his home and family. The historians also disagree on the total number of the Udasis undertaken by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. However, the latest researches have proved that Guru Nanak Dev Ji undertook three Udasis.

Objectives of the Udasis:

The main objective of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, was to remove the ignorance of the people and to give the message of the unity of the God and universal brotherhood of mankind. The Hindu, Brahmans and Jogis, whose main function was to show the right path to the misled people, were themselves corrupt and characterless. The people worshipped countless gods and goddesses, graves, trees, snakes, stones etc. The Muslim religious leaders had also degenerated. Although the Quran forbids sensual merry-making, music and dance, yet many Muslims led a life of sensual pleasure. The society was divided into many castes and sub-castes. The members of high caste hated those belonging to the low castes. The condition of women in the society was the most deplorable. Guru Nanak Dev Ji undertook his Udasis to show the new path of enlightenment and salvation to those, who were wandering in the darkness of ignorance. In the words of a famous historian, Dr. S. S. Kohli, “The Great Master did not confine his mission to this country, he travelled far and wide, to far off lands and countries, in order to enlighten humanity as a whole.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

First Udasi:

Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his first Udasi at the end of 1499 A.D. Bhai Mardana, who was a famous follower of Guru Ji, also accompanied him during these travels. Guru Nanak Dev Ji completed this Udasi in 12 years. He travelled from the east to the south. He visited the following important places during this Udasi:

1. Saidpur : Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his first Udasi from Sultanpur and reached Saidpur (Eminabad). When he reached there, Malik Bhago, a landlord of the village, invited Guru Ji to a feast, but Guru Ji stayed in the house of a poor carpenter Bhai Lalo. Malik Bhago compelled Guru Nanak Dev Ji to explain his conduct. Guru Nanak Dev Ji took the food of Malik Bhago in one hand and the rough and dry bread of Bhai Lalo in the other hand and pressed them. Blood dripped from Malik Bhago’s food, whereas milk dripped from Bhai Lalo’s bread. In this way Guru Nanak Dev Ji proved that we should earn our livelihood by honest means and hard labour.

2. Talumba : Guru Nanak Dev Ji met Sajjan at this place. He had built a temple and a mosque within his Haveli. During the day, he served these travellers nicely but at night he used to rob them and sometimes killed them and threw their bodies into a secret well. He was planning to play the same trick with Guru Nanak Dev Ji and Bhai Mardana. However, when at night Guru Nanak Dev Ji recited his melodious Bani, Sajjan thug was moved and he fell at. the feet of the great Guru and sought his pardon for his bad deeds. Guru Nanak Dev Ji forgave him. After this incident, Sajjan gave up cheating and killing, became a true Sajjan and spent his remaining life in propagating Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings. According to K.S. Duggal, “Sajjan’s den of an assassin was transformed into a dharamsala.”

3. Kurukshetra : Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kurukshetra on the occasion of a solar eclipse. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told them we should lead a simple and picess life. His words worked like magic and many people became his disciples.

4. Delhi : Guru Nanak Dev Ji stayed at ‘Majnu Ka Tila’ in Delhi. It is said, while living in Delhi, Guru Nanak Dev Ji brought back a dead elephant of Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi to life, but Sikh tradition doesn’t agree with this incident.

5. Haridwar: When Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Haridwar he saw many Hindus had gathered there to wash away their sins by a dip in the sacred water of the Ganges. While taking a bath, they were offering water to their forefathers (Pitras) facing the Sun. On seeing this, Guru Ji started throwing water towards the west. Astonished at this, many people gathered around him and asked what he was doing. He answered that he was offering water to his fields in Punjab. People laughed at his answer and asked how this water could reach his fields situated at a distance of 300 miles. Guru Nanak Dev Ji remarked that if their water could reach the Sun, which is situated millions of miles away, why his water could not reach his fields. Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s answer impressed them deeply.

6. Gorakhmata : After Haridwar, Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Gorakhmata. Here, Guru Ji told Sidh Jogis that one cannot get salvation by wearing earrings in the ears, by applying ash (vibhuti) to the body or by blowing of horns, by holding sticks or by shaving of heads. These Jogis were so impressed with his teachings that they became his disciples. Since then, Gorakhmata is called Nanakmata.

7. Banaras : Banaras was also a famous place of pilgrimage of the Hindus. Here Guru Nanak Dev Ji held a long discussion with Pt. Chatur Das about idol worship. Guru Nanak Dev Ji convinced him by saying that idol worship is as futile as watering the barren land. Highly impressed by his teachings, Chatur Das became a Sikh along with his Brahman friends.

8. Kamrup : When Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kamrup in Assam, a famous witch Nur Shahi along with some other beautiful women, tried to cast a spell on Guru Nanak Dev Ji by’her alluring gestures and extraordinary display of tempting charms but she failed. Guru Nanak Dev Ji showed them the right path.

9. Jagannath Puri : After a visit to Assam, Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Jagannath Puri in Orissa. The priest of Jagannath Puri temple asked Guru Nanak Dev Ji to pay homage to their Lord Jagannath. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told them he did not believe in formal worship of aarti. Nature, all the time, is busy with the worship of that Almighty God. So, there is no need of offering artificial worship to Him.

10.Ceylon : After visiting South India Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Ceylon (Sri Lanka). At that time Shivnath was the ruler of Ceylon. He was greatly impressed by the personality and hymns of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. As a result he became the follower of Guru Nanak Dev Ji along with many other people.

11. Pakpattan : During his return to the Punjab from Ceylon, Guru Nanak Dev Ji stayed at Pakpattan. Here, he met Sheikh Brahm the follower of Sheikh Farid. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was greatly pleased to meet this famous Sufi saint. Sheikh Brahm was also very much impressed by Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Second Udasi:

Guru Nanak Dev Ji began his second Udasi towards the East at the end of 1513 A.D. Guru Nanak Dev Ji spent three years in this Udasi. He visited the following important places during this Udasi:

1. Hilly States : Guru Nanak Dev Ji passed through the Punjab and visited the hilly states of Mandi, Rawalsar, Jawalamukhi, Kangra, Baijnath, Kullu etc. Many people of these hilly states were impressed by the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and thus became his followers.

2. Kailash Parbat: Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Kailash Parbat (Sumer) via Tibet. The Siddhas were greatly surprised at Guru’s arrival there. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told them that the truth had disappeared from the world and falsehood and corruption prevailed everywhere. Guru Nanak Dev Ji advised them to serve humanity.

3. Ladakh: Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Ladakh from Kailash Parbat. Impressed by the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, many people became his disciples.

4. Kashmir : Guru Nanak Dev Ji held a very lengthy religious debate with Pandit Brahm Das at Mattan in Kashmir. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained to him that mere reading or reciting of the Vedas and the Ramayana could not bring salvation. Salvation can be attained only by one’s actions in accordance with the teachings of these holy scriptures.

5. Hasan Abdal : On his return journey to the Punjab Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped at Hasan Abdal. Here an arrogant Faqir, Wali Kandhari in a fit of rage, rolled a very heavy stone rock downward from the hill top to kill Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Guru Nanak Dev Ji stopped it with his palm. This place is known as ‘Punja Sahib’ these days and there stands a splendid Gurdwara.

6. Sialkot: Guru Nanak Dev Ji met a Muslim saint named Hamza Ghaus at Sialkot. He was angry with the people of this town over some issue and he was determined to destroy the’ whole city with his power. But, when he met Guru Ji he was so impressed that all his anger disappeared. This incident impressed the people.

Third Udasi:

Guru Nanak Dev Ji began his third Udasi at the epd of 1517 A.D. This Udasi also took four years. Guru Nanak Dev Ji visited many countries of Western Asia during this Udasi. Bhai Mardana also accompanied him. Guru Nanak Dev Ji visited the following important places during this Udasi:

1. Multan : Many Sufi saints lived in Multan. Here Guru Nanak Dev Ji met a famous Sufi saint Shaikh Bahauddin. He was greatly impressed with Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings and became his disciple.

2. Mecca: Mecca is the birthplace of the Prophet Mohammad. According to Sikh tradition, when Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Mecca, he slept with his feet towards the Kaaba. When Qazi Rukun-ud-Din noticed it, he flew into a rage. When the Qazi turned Guru Ji’s feet to the other directions, the Kaaba also began to turn towards those directions. At this, the Qazi and other Muslims present were deeply impressed. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained to them that Allah is present everywhere.

3. Madina: From Mecca Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Madina. Guru Nanak Dev Ji gave here his message of love. He had a religious debate with Imam Azim here.

4. Baghdad: Guru Nanak Dev Ji met Shaikh Behlol in Baghdad. He was so much impressed with the Bani of the great Guru Nanak Dev Ji that he became his disciple.

5. Saidpur: When Guru Nanak Dev Ji reached Saidpur at the end of 1520 A.D., Babar attacked this town with a view to occupy it. The Mughal army put to death thousands of innocent people during this attack. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was also arrested along with them. But when Babar came to know that Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a great saint, he set free not only Guru Nanak Dev Ji but many other prisoners also. After it, Guru Ji reached Talwandi. Thus, his Udasis came to an end in 1521 A. D.

Impact of the Udasis:

The Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji had a profound impact on society. He succeeded to a great extent in removing the superstitions prevalent among people and brought in them a new awakening. He won over great scholars, Jogis, Siddhas, Brahmans, thieves, thugs and criminals by his sweet hymns. Guru Nanak Dev Ji completely changed the minds of such persons. Thousands of people became his followers after being greatly impressed by his personality and his teachings. To conclude, we fully agree with these words of Dr S.S. Kohli, “He had a holy mission to perform and his performance was no less than a miracle.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 3.
Describe in detail the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
What were the main teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji? What was their social importance?
Or
Study the main teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. what was their influence on society?
Or
Describe the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Study the main teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Briefly describe the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
The teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji were simple but impressive. His teachings had a miraculous effect on the minds of the people. His teachings were not meant for any particular class, caste or province. They were concerned with the whole humanity. His main teachings are as given ahead :

1. The Nature of God : Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in one God only. He laid stress on the oneness of God in his Bani again and again. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. There are hundreds and thousands of deities but only one God. God is known by countless names, like Hari, Ram, Gopal, Wahe Guru, Sahib, Allah, Khuda etc. His manifestations may be many, but He is One and there is no other. Guru Nanak says, “Remember the one God who is contained in sea and land.”

God has two forms. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). He is the absolute Lord. Every thing happens in accordance with His will. He alone is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. He is immortal. He is the greatest of all. His greatness is beyond description.

2. Maya : According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Maya is the biggest obstacle in man’s way of attaining salvation (mukti). An unregenerate (manmukh) man always indulges in the vicious circle of worldly things like wealth, status, power, luxury, beautiful woman, son etc. It is Maya. Thus, one who yields to Maya is caught in the cycle of transmigration and his chains are not cut.

3. Haumai : An unregenerate (manmukh) man has a very strong feeling of Haumai (ego). As a consequence of his haumai, he remains trapped in the worldly evils. The results are disastrous, for instead of leading a man to salvation, his haumai binds him more firmly to the wheel of transmigration.

4. Evil impulses : An unregenerate (manmukh) man is always surrounded by evil impulses. Kam (lust), krodh (anger), lobh (greed), moh (attachment) and hankar (pride) are five enemies of man. He commits sins and deceives others under their influence. Consequently, he is caught in stronger chains of transmigration and therefore he is destined to suffer the pains of hell.

5. Denunciation of the Caste System: The Hindu society of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s time was divided not only into four main castes—Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras but into many sub-castes also. The members of the upper castes hated the people of the lower castes and treated them very badly. The practice of untouchability was very common. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned the caste system and untouchability in unequivocal words. Guru Nanak Dev Ji preached the principle of universal brotherhood of mankind.

6. Condemnation of Idol Worship: Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned idol worship in unequivocal terms. He preached that idols are lifeless stones. If they are thrown into the water, they themselves would sink. How can those idols, which cannot save themselves help men to cross the ocean of the world? So, idol worship is useless and the worship of only one God is desirable.

7. Condemnation of Empty Rituals : Guru Nanak Dev Ji denounced empty rituals and blind faith which were in vogue in the society, in strong words. He told the people that they could not attain salvation (mukti) by putting a tilak on the forehead, applying ash on the body, by wearing earringsfby blowing of horns (shells), by keeping fasts, by undergoing penance in the forest, by offering water to the Sun, and by worshipping graves, khankahas, snakes, trees etc. Guru Nanak Dev Ji called all such acts as vain ceremonies. According to him, the religion of only such a man is true, who is true and pure at heart.

8. Denounced Ill-treatment of Women : During .the time of Guru Nanak Dev Ji the condition of women in Indian society was extremely pitiable. Many evil practices had crept in. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned emphatically all such evils as were prevalent among women of that time. In order to raise the status of women Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid emphasis on the equal rights of men and women. He says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?”

9. Recitation of Nam and Sabad : Guru Nanak Dev Ji considered the recitation of Nam and Sabad as the highest form of God-worship. Man can get deliverance through Nam and Sabad from the world which is full of diseases and sufferings. Man’s arrival in this world (his birth) is futile, if he does not recite Nam and Sabad. Man remains entrapped in all sort of sins and in the vicious circle of transmigration without Nam. The Nam should be recited with a true heart and inner devotion (faith)* Dr. Dewan Singh aptly says, “Nam is the only and most efficacious source and agent for the redemption and salvation of the sinful and self-engrossed mankind.”

10. Importance of Guru : Guru Nanak Dev Ji regarded the blessings of the Guru as most important in order to reach God. According to him the Guru is the ladder by means of which one reaches God. It is the Guru who leads a man from darkness (ignorance) to light (enlightenment). But it is not an easy affair to find out a real Guru. Man cannot find the real Guru without the blessings of God Himself.

11. Hukam : The doctrine of Hukam (order) or the will of God occupies a crucial position in the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Happiness or misery is in accordance with his Hukam. God’s Hukam cannot be evaded. Man should always obey the Hukam of God. He, who does so, is blessed by God and gets salvation. On the contrary, he who does not bow before the will of God, is bound to wander from pillar to post.

12. Sach Khand : According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, to reach the Sach Khand was the ultimate goal of human life. A man has to travel through Dharam Khand, Gian Khand, Saram Khand and Karam Khand in his journey to Sach Khand which is the final stage. Here, the soul merges with the Super Soul and all worries and sufferings disappear.

Importance of Teachings:

The teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji had a tremendous impact not only on religious and social fields, but on political fields also. His teachings went a long way in eliminating blind faiths and superstitions from the society, as the darkness of the horizon disappears before the sunrise. Consequently, a new awakening took place among people. They discarded useless rituals and started worship of one God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid the foundation of a new social order by condemning caste system, by propagating brotherhood of mankind, providing equal status to women in society, and by establishing institutions of ‘Sangat’ and ‘Pangat’. His teachings gave a rude jolt, even to the rulers of the time. According to famous historian Dr. I.B. Banerjee,
“The age of Guru Nanak Dev Ji was an age of ignorance and an age of strife, and we may say at once the message of Nanak was a message of truth and a message of peace.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Give a brief account of the contribution of Guru Nanak Dev Ji to Sikhism.
Answer:
When Guru Nanak Dev Ji was born in the 15th century, the people were groping in the darkness of ignorance. Condition of wom’en folk in society was very deplorable. Guru Nanak Dev Ji undertook travels in the various parts of the country and abroad to bring awareness in them. He founded two institutions namely Sangat and Pangat. Before he breathed his last in 1539 A.D. Guru Nanak Dev Ji nominated Bhai Lehna Ji (Guru Angad Dev Ji) as his successor. The nomination of Guru Angad Dev Ji proved very significant for the development of Sikh Panth.

Question 2.
What do you mean by Udasis? What were the aims of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasis?
Or
What were the aims and importance of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji mean the travels undertaken by him. Main objective of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasis was to dispel ignorance and superstitions of the people. He wanted to convey the message of universal brotherhood of mankind and worship of the only one God to the people. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his Udasis to show a new path to the people, who were groping in darkness.

Question 3.
Give a brief account of the important Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Write a brief note on any three important Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his Udasis from Saidpur. On being asked by Malik Bhago, he told that we should earn our bread by honest and not by foul means.
(b) At Gorakhmata, Guru Nanak Dev Ji told the Sidh Jogis that man cannot attain salvation by wearing earrings or by rubbing ashes on the body but through purity of soul.
(c) Guru Ji proved at Mecca that God is Omnipresent and not confined to any particular place.

Question 4.
Write an essence of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Give a brief account of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Write any three teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:

  • According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is one. He is formless and omnipresent,
  • He is immortal. He is omnipotent and kind,
  • He is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. So, we should not worship any other god or goddess except Him.
  • The Guru accepted Maya as the biggest hurdle in the way of salvation,
  • The Guru told that lust, anger, greed, attachment and pride are the five enemies of man.

Question 5.
What was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of God?
Or
What were the views of Guru Nanak Dev Ji about God?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in one God only. God has two forms. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). By His order (Hukam) the universe came into existence. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Sovereign Lord. Everything happens in accordance with His will. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says that the universe created by God is unstable and impermanent but God is immortal. He is beyond the cycle of birth, death and rebirth.

Question 6.
What type of religious beliefs and rituals were condemned by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned all the blind faiths of religion prevalent in society. He opposed idol-worship, Vedic rituals, going on pilgrimages, and other rituals connected with important occasions of life. The Brahmins were the main supporters of these rituals. He did not approve of the ideology of the Jogis for two reasons-

  • The Jogis lacked faith in God.
  • They remained away from society and shirked social responsibilities.

Question 7.
What was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of Maya? Explain in brief.
Or
Describe Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of Maya.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji regarded Maya as the biggest hurdle in the way of man’s salvation. The multicoloured Maya allures man to itself. Maya to whom he loves so much does not accompany him after his death. It separates man from God, by keeping him absorbed in worldly things. One who yields to Maya also remains caught in the cycle of transmigration. Thus, he ruins his life.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 8.
What is the importance of guru in Guru Nanak Dev’s teachings?
Or
What was the concept of “Guru” according to Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid much emphasis on Guru. The Guru is a ladder by means of which one attains salvation. Without the Guru’s guidance, no one can attain salvation. An unregenerate (manmukh) man remains engrossed in worldly enjoyments. It is the Guru who purifies his mind. The Guru gives knowledge about Truth, Nam and Sabad. The Guru dispels the darkness of ignorance. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, a true Guru is God Himself, who is revealed through the Word (Sabad). ,

Question 9.
What is the importance of ‘Nam’ in Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji considered the recitation of Nam as the highest form of God-Worship. Man can get deliverance through Nam from the world which is full of diseases and sufferings. Those who recite Nam are free from all illusions and all their sorrows come to an end. Such a person’s soul blooms like a lotus. A man remains entrapped in all sorts of sins and in the vicious circle of transmigration without Nam.

Question 10.
What is the importance of Hukam in Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings?
Answer:
The doctrine of Hukam (order) or the will of God occupies a crucial position in the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. The world moves in accordance with the will of God. Birth and death of a creature, appreciation or dishonour, happiness or misery is in accordance with His Hukam. His Hukam cannot be evaded. He who obeys the Hukam of God is blessed by God and attains salvation.

Question 11.
Write the views of Guru Nanak Dev Ji about women.
Answer:
The condition of women during Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s time was very- miserable. They were not considered equal to man’s in society. They were regarded as a commodity of sensual pleasure. Many evils existed among them like child marriage, polygamy, purdah system, sati system and divorce etc. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was in favour of women’s equal rights with men. He was in favour of giving education to women also.

Question 12.
What are Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s views on Caste?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji criticised the prevalent caste system in unequivocal terms. His main aim was to remove the social discrimination from the society. In his view no one could be rich or poor on the basis of the caste. In the court of God karma and not the caste decide the fate of a man. Guru Nanak Dev Ji opened the door of Sikhism for downtrodden classes.

Question 13.
What was the social meaning and significance of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s message?
Or
What was the impact of teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
The social meaning of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s message is very important. His message was for everyone. Any man or woman could take the path shown by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. The path of salvation was open for all. Guru Nanak Dev Ji preached social equality. Guru Nanak Dev Ji condemned the caste system in strong words. In order to put his message of social equality into practice, he founded two institutions i.e. Sangat and Pangat. No discrimination of caste was observed while preparing the Langar.

Question 14.
How far were the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji different from the Bhakti reformers? ,
Answer:
According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is formless. He never acquires the human form. The Bhakti preachers regard Krishna and Rama as the incarnations of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was against idol-worship, while the other religious preachers had full faith in it. Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in leading a married life. The Bhakti preachers thought it to be a big hurdle, in the way of salvation. Guru Nanak Dev Ji founded two institutions of Sangat and Pangat. The Bhakti preachers did not set up any such institution.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 15.
Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a great poet and musician. Explain.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji was not only a great religious saint but also a great poet and musician. There are 976 Sabads (hymns) in Guru Granth Sahib which are composed by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It shows that Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a great poet. The poems of Guru Nanak Dev Ji touch the concept of God and Humanity and the relationship between both. He took the help of music to spread his message. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was well versed with many types of Ragas. His music had deep influence on the minds of the listeners.

Question 16.
How and where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji spend last 18 years of his life?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji spent the last 18 years of his life with his family at Kartarpur. During this period, he set up the institutions of Sangat and Pangat. Sangat meant the congregation, which gathered to hear the Bani of the Guru everyday. Pangat means to sit in a queue and take food together. In this Langar (the community kitchen), no discrimination of caste, creed or religion was observed. Guru Nanak Dev Ji composed 976 Shabads.

Objective Type Questions:

Question 1.
Who was the founder of Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev. Ji.

Question 2.
When was Guru Nanak Dev Ji born?
Answer:
1469 A.D.

Question 3.
Where was Guru Nanak Dev Ji born?
Answer:
Talwandi.

Question 4.
With what name the birthplace of Guru Nanak Dev Ji is now called?
Answer:
Nankana Sahib.

Question 5.
Who said it, “Satgur Nanak Pargatiya Miti Dhund Jag Chanan Hoa”?
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji.

Question 6.
What was the name of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s father?
Answer:
Mehta Kalu Ji.

Question 7.
To which caste did Mehta Kalu belong?
Answer:
Bedi.

Question 8.
Who was Mehta Kalu?
Answer:
He was the father of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 9.
What was the name of the Mother of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Tripta Ji.

Question 10.
Who was Tripta Ji?
Answer:
She was the Mother of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 11.
What was the name of the sister of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Bebe Nanaki.

Question 12.
What was the name of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Wife?
Answer:
Bibi Sulakhni Ji.

Question 13.
With how many rupees did Guru Nanak do Sacha Sauda?
Answer:
20 rupees.

Question 14.
Why was Guru Nanak Dev Ji sent to Sultanpur Lodhi?
Answer:
To do a job.

Question 15.
When was Guru Nanak Dev Ji enlightened?
Answer:
1499 A.D.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 16.
What was the first utterance of Guru Nanak Dev Ji after enlightenment?
Or
With which words did Guru Nanak Dev Ji start his preaching work?
Answer:
“Na Ko Hindu Na Ko Musalman”.

Question 17.
What is meant by the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
His travels.

Question 18.
What was the purpose of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasis?
Answer:
To dispel the ignorance prevalent among people and to preach Holy Name.

Question 19.
When did Guru Nanak start his first Udasi?
Answer:
1499 A.D.

Question 20.
From wh§re did Guru Nanak Dev Ji start his first Udasi?
Answer:
Saidpur (Eminabad).

Question 21.
Name any two places visited by Guru Nanak during his first Udasi.
Answer:
(a) Delhi and
(b) Kurukshetra.

Question 22.
Who was the constant companion of Guru Nanak Sahib Ji?
Or
Who was the companion of Guru Nank Dev Ji during Udasis?’
Or
Who was the companion of Guru Nanak Dev Ji at the time of Udasis?
Answer:
Bhai Mardana.

Question 23.
Which instrument did Bhai Mardana play while performing kirtan?
Answer:
Rabab.

Question 24.
Who was the first disciple of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Bhai Lalo.

Question 25.
Why did Guru Nanak Dev Ji refuse the food of Malik Bhago?
Answer:
Because it was not earned by honest means.

Question 26.
Where did Sri Guru Nanak Dev Ji met with Sajjan?
Answer:
At Talumba.

Question 27.
Where had Guru Nanak Dev Ji watered the fields facing towards West?
Answer:
Haridwar.

Question 28.
Which Sufi Saint did Guru Nanak Dev Ji meet at Panipat?
Answer:
Shaikh Tahir.

Question 29.
What was Gorakhmata named as after Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasi?
Answer:
Nanak Mata.

Question 30.
Who was Nurshai?
Answer:
Nurshai was the famous witch of Kamrup.

Question 31.
In which temple Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained the meaning of true Aarti to the people in Orissa?
Answer:
Jagan Nath Puri.

Question 32.
What did Guru Nanak Dev Ji preach the Sidhs of Kailash Parbat?
Answer:
To do social service.

Question 33.
Which ruler of Ceylon met Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Shivnath.

Question 34.
At which place did Guru Nanak Dev Ji move Kaba during his Udasis?
Answer:
Mecca.

Question 35.
With which Qazi Guru Nanak Dev Ji had confrontation?
Answer:
Rukun-ud-Din.

Question 36.
With what name is Hasan Abdal now known?
Answer:
Panja Sahib.

Question 37.
Sri Guru Nanak Dev Ji met with which Shaikh at Baghdad?
Answer:
Shaikh Behlol.

Question 38.
When was Guru Nanak Dev Ji arrested for some time?
Answer: 1520 A.D.

Question 39.
Who was the Mughal ruler at the time of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Babar.

Question 40.
Name any one prominent teaching of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
God is one.

Question 41.
What was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s concept of Maya?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji considered this world as Maya.

Question 42.
How many enemies of man have been identified by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Five.

Question 43.
What is the concept of Guru in Sikh religion, according to Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru is the ladder by which one reaches God.

Question 44.
What is the importance of meditation of God according to Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Without the meditation of God the coming of man into this world is fruitless.

Question 45.
Name any two traits of Manmukh (Unregenerate Man).
Answer:
A Manmukh is always surrounded by sensual lust.

Question 46.
What is self-surrender?
Answer:
To give up ego.

Question 47.
What do you mean by the word ‘Nadar5?
Or
What is meant by ‘Nadar5?
Answer:
Grace of God.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Question 48.
What do you mean by Hukam?
Answer:
The decree of God.

Question 49.
What is the concept of Kirat?
Answer:
Earning by one’s honest labour.

Question 50.
What is meant by ‘Anjan Mahe Niranjan5?
Answer:
Leading a simple and pious life amidst the impurities of the world.

Question 51.
Which three things did Guru Nanak Dev Ji ask his disciples to follow?
Or
Write the essence of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s teachings in three words.
Answer:
Do honest labour, utter Nam and eat after distributing.

Question 52.
Who started the tradition of Kirtan?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 53.
Write the name of the town established by Guru Nanak on the bank of Ravi.
Answer:
Kartarpur.

Question 54.
What is meant by word Kartarpur?
Answer:
The abode of God.

Question 55.
Which two institutions were established at Kartarpur by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Sangat and Pangat.

Question 56.
What is the meaning of Sangat?
Answer:
Sangat means the congregation which listens to the hymns of Guru.

Question 57.
What is the meaning of Pangat?
Answer:
Pangat means a group of people sitting in a queue to eat langar.

Question 58.
Which Guru Sahib started the system of Langar?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 59.
What do you know about ‘Guru Ka Langar’?
Or
Which Guru Sahib started the Langar system?
Answer:
(a) Guru Ka Langar was started by Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
(b) All men and women in the congregation take their meals together without any discrimination.

Question 60.
Give a difference between the teachings of Guru Nanak and other Bhagats.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Ji was against idol worship but other Bhagats were not.

Question 61.
Where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji spend his last years?
Answer:
Kartarpur (Pakistan).

Question 62.
How many Shabads were composed by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
976.

Question 63.
Name the main two compositions of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Name only two compositions of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Which two ‘Banis’ were composed by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
(a) Japji Sahib,
(b) Asa Di Var.

Question 64.
Which Guru Sahib pronounced Babar Bani?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Sahib.

Question 65.
Where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji immerse in Eternal Light?
Answer:
1539 A.D. at Kartarpur (Pakistan).

Question 66.
Whom did Guru Nanak Dev Ji appoint his successor?
Answer:
Guru Angad Dev Ji.

Question 67.
Why did Guru Nanak Dev Ji give the name of Guru Angad Dev to Bhai Lehna Ji?
Answer:
Because he considered him as the part of his body.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Fill in the blanks:

1. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was born in ……………….
Answer:
1469 A.D.

2. The name of the father of Guru Nanak Dev Ji was ………………
Answer:
Metha Kalu

3. ……………… was the name of the sister of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
Bebe Nanaki

4. The name of mother of Guru Nanak Dev Ji was ………………..
Answer:
Tripta Ji

5. Guru Nanak Dev Ji did Sacha Sauda with ………………. rupees.
Answer:
20

6. Guru Nanak Dev Ji worked in Modikhana of ………………..
Answer:
Sultanpur Lodhi

7. Guru Nanak Dev Ji got the enlightenment at the age of ……………..
Answer:
30

8. After enlightenment, Guru Nanak Dev Ji uttered the first words, ………………
Answer:
“Na Ko Hindu, Na Ko Muslman”

9. Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasis were his …………..
Answer:
travels

10. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started, first Udasis in ……………….. A.D.
Answer:
1499

11. ……………….. was the companion of Guru Nanak Dev Ji at the time of Udasis.
Answer:
Bhai Mardana

12. Guru Nanak Dev Ji visited ………………. first during his first Udasi.
Answer:
Saidpur

13. Guru Nanak Dev Ji met Sajjan thug at …………………
Answer:
Talumba

14. Guru Nanak Dev Ji watered his farms at …………………..
Answer:
Haridwar

15. Guru Nanak Dev Ji told the importance of actual worship (aarti) at …………………
Answer:
Jagannath Puri

16. Guru Nanak Dev Ji met the Siddhas at ……………….
Answer:
Kailash Parbat

17. At the time of Udasi of Mecca, ……………… was the Qazi there.
Answer:
Rukun-ud-Din

18. Guru Nanak Dev Ji spent his last years in …………..
Answer:
Kartarpur

19. Guru Nanak Dev Ji established the two institutions of ………………… and ………………..
Answer:
Sangat, Pangat

20. Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in …………….. God.
Answer:
one

21. Guru Nanak Dev Ji ……………….. the caste system and Idol worship.
Answer:
condemned

22. There are ……………….. enemies of man as told by .Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
five

23. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, the ultimate aim of human life is to reach ……………
Answer:
Sach Khand

24. Guru Nanak Dev Ji immersed in Eternal Light in ………………….
Answer:
1539 A.D.

25. Guru Nanak Dev Ji appointed ……………… as his successor.
Answer:
Bhai Lehna Ji

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

True or False:

1. Guru Nanak Dey Ji was born on 15th April 1469 A.D.
Answer:
True

2. The birth place of Guru Nanak Dey Ji is called ‘Punja Sahib’.
Answer:
False

3. The name of the father of Guru Nanak Dey Ji was Mehta Kalu.
Answer:
True

4. The name of the mother of Guru Nanak Dey Ji was Sabrai Devi.
Answer:
False

5. The name of the sister of Guru Nanak Dey Ji was Bebe Nanaki.
Answer:
True

6. Guru Nanak Dey Ji was related to Beth family.
Answer:
True

7. Guru Nanak Dey Ji did the Sacha Sauda with Rs. 40 only.
Answer:
False

8. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was married to inhabitant of Amritsar, Sulakhni.
Answer:
False

9. Sri Chand and Lakhmi Das were the sons of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
True

10. Guru Nanak Dev Ji got a job in Modikhanna of Goindwal Sahib.
Answer:
False

11. After enlightment, Guru Nanak Dev Ji uttered, “Na Ko Hindu, Na Ko Musalman.”
Answer:
True

12. At the time of enlightment, Guru Nanak Dev Ji was 35 year old.
Answer:
False

13. The travels of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called Udasis.
Answer:
True

14. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his first Udasi from Saidpur.
Answer:
True

15. Guru Nanak Dev Ji stayed at the house of Malik Bhago.
Answer:
False

16. Guru Nanak Dev Ji met Sajjan Thug at Kurukshetra.
Answer:
False

17. Guru Nanak Dev Ji offered water to his fields at Haridwar.
Answer:
True

18. Guru Nanak Dev Ji explained about the real worship of God Almighty to the priests of Jagannath Puri.
Answer:
True

19. At Mecca, Guru Nanak Dev Ji slept with his feet towards the Kaaba.
Answer:
True

20. Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in one God only.
Answer:
True

21. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started two institutions of ‘Sangat and Pangat’.
Answer:
True

22. Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in caste system and idol worship.
Answer:
False

23. Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid emphasis on the equal rights of men and women.
Answer:
True

24. Guru Nanak Dev Ji immersed in Eternal Light in 1539 A.D.
Answer:
True

25. Guru Nanak Dev Ji nominated Bhai Lehna Ji as his successor.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 4 Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Life and His Teachings

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Who was the foundier of Sikhism?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Angad Dev Ji
(c) Guru Hargobind Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji

2. When was Guru Nanak Dev Ji born?
(a) In 1459 A.D.
(b) In 1469 A.D.
(c) In 1479 A.D.
(d) In 1489 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1469 A.D.

3. Which was the birth place of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) Kirtpur Sahib
(b) Kartarpur
(c) Talwandi
(d) Lahore.
Answer:
(c) Talwandi

4. What was the name of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s father?
(a) Mehta Kalu Ji
(b) Jai Ram Ji
(c) Sri Chand Ji
(d) Pherumal Ji.
Answer:
(a) Mehta Kalu Ji

5. What was the name of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s mother? .
(a) Khivi Ji
(b) Tripta Ji
(c) Nanaki Ji
(d) Gujari Ji.
Answer:
(b) Tripta Ji

6. Who was Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s sister?
(a) Nanaki Ji
(b) Bhani Ji
(c) Dani Ji
(d) Khivi Ji.
Answer:
(a) Nanaki Ji

7. With how many rupees Guru Nanak Dev Ji did Sacha Sauda?
(a) 10
(b) 20
(c) 30
(d) 50
Answer:
(b) 20

8. Name the wife of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
(a) Ganga Devi Ji
(b) Sulakhni Ji
(c) Bibi Veero Ji
(d) Bibi Bhani Ji.
Answer:
(b) Sulakhni Ji

9. Where did Mehta Kalu send Nanak to do a job?
(a) Multan
(b) Lahore
(c) Sultanpur Lodhi
(d) Kiratpur Sahib.
Answer:
(c) Sultanpur Lodhi

10. At what age did Guru Nanak Dev Ji get the enlightenment?
(a) 20 years
(b) 22 years
(c) 26 years
(d) 30 years
Answer:
(d) 30 years

11. What was the purpose of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s Udasis?
(a) To dispel the prevalent superstitions among people
(b) To preach Holy Name
(c) To spread the message of universal brotherhood of mankind
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

12. From where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji start his first Udasi?
(a) Gorakhmata
(b) Haridwar
(c) Saidpur
(d) Kurukshetra
Answer:
(c) Saidpur

13. Where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji meet Sajjan Thug (Cheat)?
(a) At Talumba
(b) At Saidpur
(c) At Delhi
(d) At Dhubri.
Answer:
(a) At Talumba

14. Where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji meet with witch Nurshahi?
(a) Gaya
(b) Kamrup
(c) Dhubri
(d) Banaras.
Answer:
(b) Kamrup

15. At which place Guru Nanak Dev Ji told that Nature all the time, is busy with the worship of God.
(a) Haridwar
(b) Kurukshetra
(c) Banaras
(d) Jagan Nath Puri
Answer:
(d) Jagan Nath Puri

16. Which ruler of Ceylon met Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) Krishandev Rai
(b) Bholenath
(c) Shivnath
(d) Shanker Dev.
Answer:
(c) Shivnath

17. Which of the following place is now called Punja Sahib?
(a) Pakpattan
(b) Sialkot
(c) Hasan Abdal
(d) Gorakhmata.
Answer:
(c) Hasan Abdal

18. Which Qazi stopped Guru Nanak Dev Ji to sleep with his feet towards Kabha at Mecca?
(a) Bah-ud-Din
(b) Qutub-ud-Din
(c) Rukun-ud-Din
(d) Bahlol.
Answer:
(c) Rukun-ud-Din

19. When did Guru Nanak Dev Ji settle at Kartarpur?
(a) In 1519 A.D.
(b) In 1520 A.D.
(c) In 1521. A.D.
(d) In 1522 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1521. A.D.

20. What is the nature of God according to Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Or
What was the concept of God of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) He is all powerful.
(b) He is immortal.
(c) He is Nirguna and Saguna.
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

21. Which of the following is not the nature of Unregenerate man?
(a) He always indulges in vicious circle of Maya.
(b) He always worships God.
(c) He has a strong feeling of ego (Haumai).
(d) He is always surrounded by evil impulses.
Answer:
(b) He always worships God.

22. Which of the following was not denounced by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) Priestly class
(b) Caste system
(c) Idol worship
(d) Equality of men and women.
Answer:
(d) Equality of men and women.

23. What were the means of achieving the Ultimate object of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) Recitation of Nam
(b) Self surrender
(c) To obey the Hukam of God
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

24. How many enemies of man have been identified by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
(a) Two
(b) Three
(c) Four
(d) Five
Answer:
(d) Five

25. Which things did Guru Nanak Dev Ji ask every man to follow?
(a) To do honest labour (Kirat Kama)
(b) To utter Nam (Nam Japna).
(c) To eat after distributing (Wand Chakna).
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

26. Who started the tradition of Kirtan?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Amar Das Ji
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji

27. Which of the following fact proves that Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a Revolutionary?
(a) Establishment of new institutions
(b) Opposed the caste system
(c) Condemned the Idol worship
(d) All of the above.
Answer:
(d) All of the above.

28. Whom did Guru Nanak Dev Ji appoint his successor?
(a) Bhai Jetha Ji
(b) Bhai Durga Ji
(c) Bhai Lehna Ji
(d) Sri Chand Ji
Answer:
(c) Bhai Lehna Ji

29. In which year Guru Nanak Dev Ji immersed in Eternal Light?
(a) In 1519 A.D.
(b) In 1529 A.D.
(c) In 1539 A.D.
(d) In 1549 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1539 A.D.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class History Book Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 History Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Explain the political condition of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What was the general political condition of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, the political condition of Punjab was very unstable. As a result of the wrong policies of Lodhi Sultans lawlessness prevailed all around. The ruling class remained engrossed in pleasure-seeking. Feasts were held every day in the courts. The female dancers took part in these celebrations in a big number and drinking sessions were freely held. As a result, nobody had time to attend to the problems of the people. The govt, officials had become corrupt to the core and bribery was rampant; so much so that Qazis and Ulemas delivered justice only when their palm was greased. The Muslims perpetrated. tyranny on the Hindus and converted them to Islam at the point of the sword.

The state administration had collapsed. Taking advantage of such conditions, Daulat Khan Lodhi, the Governor of Punjab declared himself independent. In this regard, he invited Babar to invade India. Babar defeated Daulat Khan Lodhi towards the end of 1525 A.D. and took control of Punjab. He defeated Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi in the first battle of Panipat on 21 April 1526 A.D. and founded the Mughal rule in India.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 2.
“At the beginning of the 16th century, Punjab was a cockpit of triangular struggle”. Explain.
Or
Explain the triangular struggle of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, Punjab was a cockpit of triangular struggle. This triangular struggle began between Babar, the ruler of Kabul, Ibrahim Lodhi, the ruler of Delhi and Daulat Khan Lodhi, the Governor of Punjab. Daulat Khan Lodhi wanted to become an independent ruler of Punjab. When Ibrahim Lodhi came to know about it, he ordered Daulat Khan Lodhi to present himself in the royal court. In order to escape the wrath of the Sultan, Daulat Khan Lodhi sent his younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. When he reached Delhi, he was arrested and thrown into prison.

Somehow, Dilawar Khan managed to escape from the prison. On reaching Punjab, he narrated to Daulat Khan Lodhi, his father, the treatment meted out to him in Delhi. In order to take revenge for this insult, he invited Babar to invade India, which was already looking for such a golden opportunity. In this triangular struggle, Babar Came out victorious. In 1525¬26 A.D. he not only took control of Punjab but also occupied Delhi. Thus, the foundation of Mughal rule in India was laid.

Question 3.
Who was Daulat Khan Lodhi? What were the causes of the struggle between Daulat Khan Lodhi and Ibrahim Lodhi?
Or
Write a short note on Daulat Khan Lodhi.
Answer:
Daulat Khan Lodhi was the Governor of Punjab. He was appointed to this post in 1500 A.D. The main cause of the struggle between Daulat Khan Lodhi and Ibrahim Lodhi was that the former wanted to be an independent ruler of Punjab. For this purpose, he hatched a conspiracy with Alam Khan, the foster brother of Ibrahim Lodhi, who wanted to acquire the throne of Delhi. When Ibrahim Lodhi came to know about it, he issued an order to Daulat Khan Lodhi to present himself in the royal court of Delhi. In order to escape the wrath of the Sultan, Daulat Khan sent his younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. When Dilawar Khan reached there, he was arrested and put into prison. He was ill-treated in jail. But soon he succeeded in escaping from jail. On reaching Punjab, he appraised his father Daulat Khan of the ill-treatment meted out to him in Delhi. Daulat Khan invited Babar to invade India, in order to take revenge for the insult. Later on Daulat Khan Lodhi turned against Babar. Babar defeated him in 1525 A.D and occupied Punjab.

Question 4.
Who was Babar? When and how many times did he invade Punjab? Write briefly about these invasions.
Or
Give a brief account of Babar’s five invasions over Punjab.
Answer:
Babar was the ruler of Kabul. He invaded Punjab five times from 1519 A.D. to 1526 A.D. He invaded Punjab for the first time in 1519 A.D. Babar captured Bhera and Bajaur regions during this invasion. As soon as Babar returned, the people took back their control. In the same year, Babar invaded Punjab for the second time. This time Babar occupied Peshawar. During his third invasion over Punjab in 1520 A.D. Babar brought Bajaur, Bhera and Sialkot under his control. After this, he attacked Saidpur. Babar thoroughly plundered Saidpur during this invasion. The Mughal army arrested Guru Nanak also along with other people. Later on, with the intervention of Babar, Guru Nanak was released. In 1524 A.D. on the invitation of Daulat Khan Lodhi, Babar invaded Punjab for the fourth time and seized it without much difficulty. Later on, Daulat Khan Lodhi turned against Babar. In order to teach Daulat Khan Lodhi a lesson, Babar invaded Punjab for the 5th time in November 1525 A.D. He defeated Daulat Khan Lodhi and occupied Punjab. After this, Babar defeated Ibrahim Lodhi on April 21, 1526 A.D. in the first battle of Panipat. Thus, Babar established the Mughal dynasty in India. ‘

Question 5.
When did Babar invade Saidpur? What is its importance in Sikh History?
Answer:
Babar invaded Saidpur in 1520 A.D. The people of this place stoutly resisted Babar. Consequently, Babar got angry. His forces massacred people in a large number, set the houses and palaces on fire after plundering them. Thousands of women were taken into custody and they were maltreated. Guru Nanak was in Saidpur at that time and he wrote in his ‘Babar Bani’ about the tyranny of the Mughal army on people. The army of Babar had arrested Guru Ji also. Later on, when Babar came to know about the piety of Guru Nanak, he at once ordered his release. Babar wrote in his autobiography Tuzak-i-Babri that if he had known that such a great saint was living in that city, he would never have attacked and ransacked it. On the intervention of Guru Nanak, several innocent people were let off.

Question 6.
Why and where did the battle take place between Babar and Ibrahim Lodhi?
Or
Give a brief account of the First Battle of Panipat.
Or
Explain the First Battle of Panipat and its significance.
Answer:
Babar invaded India for the fifth time in November 1525 A.D. to teach Daulat Khan a lesson. Hearing the news of Babar’s invasion, Daulat Khan got frightened, that he took refuge in the fort of Malout in Hoshiarpur district. Babar besieged the fort. Daulat Khan surrendered after some resistance. Babar pardoned him. Now, Babar once again captured the whole of Punjab. Encouraged by this victory, he decided to attack Delhi, which was being ruled by Ibrahim Lodhi. So, he ordered his army to march towards Delhi. When Ibrahim got the news, he marched towards Punjab to face Babar with an army of one lakh. Babar had 20 thousand soldiers in his army. Both the armies fought a fierce battle near Panipat on 21 April 1526 A.D. This battle is known as the first battle of Panipat. In this battle, Ibrahim Lodhi was defeated and killed. In this way, the reign of the Lodhi dynasty in India came to an end and Babar founded the Mughal empire in India.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 7.
What led to the victory of Babar in the first battle of Panipat?
Or
Give a brief account of the causes of the victory of Babar and the defeat of the Afghans in India.
Answer:
Many factors were responsible for Babar’s victory in the battle of Panipat. Ibrahim Lodhi, the Sultan of Delhi was notorious for his ill-treatment and the tyranny caused to his nobles and his subjects. They wanted to get rid of such a ruler. The army of Ibrahim Lodhi was also very weak. Most of the soldiers had joined him with the purpose of looting. Their methods of fighting were also outdated and they lacked proper training. Ibrahim committed a political blunder in not attacking Babar’s army for 8 days in Panipat. Had he not allowed Babar to strengthen his security, the results of the battle might have been different. Babar was an able commander. He had a vast experience of fighting battles. The artillery of Babar created havoc. The soldiers of Ibrahim could not face them with their swords, bows and arrows. With all these factors, the Afghans were defeated and Babar came out victorious.

Question 8.
Explain the social condition of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What do you know about the social condition of Punjab at the time of the birth of Guru Nanak Dev?
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, the society of Punjab was divided into two main classes-the Hindus and Muslims. The Muslims being related to the ruling class, enjoyed some special privileges. They were appointed to high offices of the State. On the other hand, the Hindus were deprived of all their rights. The Muslims called them Kafirs (non-believers). The Muslims perpetrated so much tyranny on the Hindus that several Hindus embraced Islam under duress. At that time, the condition of women was not good. The dresses of upper-class Muslims used to be costly and were made of silk or velvet. The garments worn by the people of the lower class and the Hindus were simple. Hunting, horse racing, chess-playing, dancing, music, animal-fighting and playing cards were the main sources of entertainment of the people.

Question 9.
What was the condition of women in the society of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century? Explain briefly.
Answer:
The condition of the women-folk in the society of Punjab, at the beginning of the 16th century, was highly deplorable. The women were considered not equal in status to men. They were confined within the four walls of the house. At that time many girls were killed as soon as they were born. They were married off in their childhood. As a result, no attention was given to girls’ education. Sati System was also at its climax. A widow was not allowed to re-marry. She was forced to lead a hellish life. The condition of Muslim women was also not good. Many prescriptions in society existed for them. They were treated as objects of sensual pleasure. Their condition had become deplorable due to prostitution, the divorce system and the purdah system. Women of high-class Muslims enjoyed some special privileges but they were few in number.

Question 10.
Into which classes were the Muslim society of Punjab divided and what type of life did they lead, at the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, the Muslim society was divided into three classes:

  • Upper Class: The Upper Class of Muslim society comprised the nobles, Khans, Sheikhs, Qazis and Ulemas. People of this class led a life of pleasure, luxury and comfort. They lived in palatial buildings. Most of their time was spent on celebrations. Although Qazis and Ulemas were religious leaders, most of them had gone astray from their path.
  • Middle Class: The Middle Class included traders, soldiers, peasants and petty officials of the state government. There was a big gap between their life and that of upper-class people, But their standard of living was much better than that of the upper-class Hindus.
  • Lower Class: This class consisted of mostly slaves and servants. Their life was not good. They had to bear the tyranny of their masters.

Question 11.
What was the social condition of Muslims of Punjab, at the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Give an account of the Muslim classes of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
The Muslim society of Punjab at the beginning of the sixteenth century had the following main features :

1. Three Classes: The Muslim society in Punjab at the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into three groups—upper class, middle class and lower class.

  • Upper Class: The upper class of the Muslim society consisted of Amirs, Khans, Sheikhs, Maliks, Iqtadars, Ulemas, Qazis etc. They led a life of luxury and extravagance. They lived in grand palaces.
  • Middle Class: It consisted of the soldiers, traders, farmers and subordinate officials of the government. There was a considerable difference between the standard of living of this class and that of the upper class. However, their social status was much better than that of the Hindus.
  • Lower Class: It consisted of slaves, servants and labourers. They were in a very large number. They had to work hard to earn their livelihood! Their life was not satisfactory. They were often subjected to the tyranny of their masters.

2. Position of Women: The condition of women in Muslim society was not satisfactory in any way. They were the least educated. The Purdah system was in vogue. Polygamy and divorce had made the lives of Muslim women more pitiable.

3. Diet: The Muslims belonging to the upper class enjoyed delicious food of many kinds. It included meat, halwa, puri, butter, fruits and vegetables. The lower class ate very simple food.

4. Dress: The Muslims of the upper class used to wear very costly dresses. Such dresses were made of silk and velvet. These dresses were studded with many kinds of precious stones and jewels. People of the lower class used to wear cotton clothes. Men wore kurta and pyjamas and women wore long burqas.

5. Education: No remarkable progress was made in the field of education at the beginning of the sixteenth century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, mastabas and madrasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and mastabas whereas higher education was provided in the madrassas. Madrasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and Multan were well-known centres. education for -the Muslims in Punjab.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 12.
What was the social condition of the Hindus in the society of Punjab, at the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Make a mention of the social condition of Hindus in Punjab in the opening of the 16th Century.
Answer:
1. Caste System: The Hindu society was mainly divided into four castes and many sub-castes. The Brahmans occupied the topmost position in society. The main occupation of the Kshatriyas was to fight and rule. But under the changed circumstances, they had adopted new occupations like trade, agriculture etc. The Vaishyas, however, continued to follow their old occupations of trade and agriculture. The Shudras were treated badly in those days.

2. Position of Women: The position of women in Hindu society was also not satisfactory. She was deprived of those rights which were given to men. No attention was paid to girls’ education. The women were compelled to remain confined within the four walls of their houses for their whole lives. Purdah had become very popular among Hindu women. The custom of Sati was also on the rise.

3. Diet: The diet of the Hindus was very simple. Most of them were vegetarian. Their meals consisted of wheat, rice, vegetables, ghee and milk. They avoided meat, garlic and onion. The diet of the poor included coarse bread and lassi.

4. Dress: The dress of the Hindus was simple. They usually wore cotton clothes. Men used to wear dhoti and kurta and turban on their heads. The Brahmans wore only dhoti. Women wore a sari, choli (a blouse-like dress) and lehnga (a skirt-like dress). The poor clad their bodies with a single cotton cloth (chadar). The Hindu men and women were also fond of wearing ornaments.

5. Means of Entertainment: The Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

Question 13.
Give a brief account of prevalent education in Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
No special progress was made in the field of education at the beginning of the 16th century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, mastabas and madrasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and mastabas whereas higher education was provided in madrasas. Madrasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and – Multan were the well-known centres of education for the Muslims in Punjab. Besides these, Jalandhar, Sultanpur, Samana, Narnaul, Bathinda, Sirhind, Sialkot and Kangra were other important centres of education in Punjab. The Hindus received education from the Brahmins in the temples and pathshalas. They received elementary education at these’ places. There was no centre of higher education for the Hindus in Punjab. The Hindus belonging to the rich class sent their wards to the madrassas of the Muslims for higher education. However, their number used to be very negligible as the Muslims hated them.

Question 14.
What were the main means of entertainment of the people of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, the Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting and polo. They were fond of horse riding and witnessing animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and cheaper. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-e-Barat etc. with great pomp and show. At the beginning of the 16th century, the Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

Question 15.
Give a brief account of the economic condition of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
Explain the economic condition of Punjab during the 16th century.
Or
Briefly mention the economic condition of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
1. Agriculture: At the beginning of the sixteenth century, agriculture was the main occupation of the people of Punjab. The soil of Punjab was very fertile. The land was large and more and more land could be brought under cultivation. The people of Punjab were hard working. Agriculture was mainly dependent upon rain. Wheat, barley, maize, rice and sugarcane were major crops. Due to the rich harvests, Punjab was called the Granary of India.

2. Industries: Next to agriculture, industry was the main occupation of the people of Punjab. There were industries run both by the state and the individuals. The textile industry was the most famous industry in Punjab. Besides the textile industry, there were other industries that manufactured leather goods, arms, utensils, toys and articles of ivory.

3. Animal Rearing: Some people of Punjab were engaged in animal rearing also. This included animals like cows, oxen, buffaloes, horses, ponies, camels, sheep and goats. Milk and wool were obtained from these animals. Horses, ponies, camels and oxen were used for carrying goods.

4. Trade: The trade of Punjab was much developed. Trade was carried on by certain categories of people. In those days the foreign trade of Punjab was carried on mainly with Afghanistan, Egypt, the Arab countries, Syria, Tibet, Bhutan and China. Foodgrains, textile, silk, cottonseed and sugar were exported to these countries and in turn, Punjab imported horses, arms, fur, dry fruit and musk from these countries.

5. Standard of Living: In those days, the standard of living of all the people of Punjab was not the same. The upper class of Muslims rolled in wealth and thus led a luxurious life. The upper class of Hindus also had much wealth, but the class of Muslims enjoyed a better standard of living whereas the Hindus of the middle class were not having a good standard of living. The poor and the farmers in the society had a very low standard of living.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 16.
Give a brief account of agriculture in Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, agriculture was the main occupation of people in Punjab. Land in Punjab was very fertile. There was no dearth of land to bring it under cultivation. People here were very hard-working. Canals, ponds and wells were used for irrigation. Due to these reasons, there used to be bumper harvests despite the fact that old methods were used for farming. The main crops of Punjab were wheat, barley, maize, rice and sugarcane. Besides, cotton, mustard, jawar, bajra and pulses were also cultivated. As there used to be bumper harvests, Punjab was called Granary of India.

Question 17.
What do you know about the Punjab industries at the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
Next to agriculture, industry was the main occupation of the people of Punjab. There were industries run both by the state and the individuals. The state-owned industries were situated in big cities, whereas the industries run by individuals were situated in villages. The textile industry was the most famous industry in Punjab. As silk cloth was in great demand among the people of upper classes, so it was produced in a big quantity. Samana, Sunam, Sirhind, Dipalpur, Jalandhar, Lahore and Multan were famous centres of silk textile. Chicken (embroidered fine muslin) was produced in Gujarat and Sialkot. Multan and Sultanpur were famous for calico (chintz). Sialkot was known for its dhotis, sarees, turbans and embroidered best quality lungis. Amritsar, Kangra and Kashmir were famous centres of woollen textiles. Besides the textile industry, there were other industries that manufactured leather goods, arms, utensils, toys and articles of ivory.

Question 18.
Give a brief account of the trade of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
Give an account of the main industries of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
The trade of Punjab was much developed. Trade was carried on by certain categories of people. The Kshatriyas, Mahajan’s, Banias, Soods and Aroras among the Hindus and Bohras and Khojas among the Muslims carried on trade. Transportation of goods was carried on by Banjaras. The traders travelled in groups for fear of burglars and dacoits. The institution of Hundi was in vogue. The money lenders lent money on interest. Special markets were organised On the occasions of fairs and festivals. Such markets were held at Multan, Lahore, Jalandhar, Dipalpur, Sirhind, Sunam, Samana etc. in Punjab. People came to these markets in a very large number and purchased their necessities. Special markets were held for animals also. In those days the foreign trade of Punjab was carried on mainly with Afghanistan, Egypt, the Arab countries, Syria, Tibet, Bhutan and China. Foodgrains, textile, silk, cottonseed and sugar were exported to these countries and in turn, Punjab imported horses, arms, fur, dry fruit and musk from these countries.

Question 19.
What was the living standard of people at the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
In those days, the standard of living of all the people of Punjab was not the same. The upper-class Muslims rolled in wealth and thus led a luxurious life. They lived in big palaces. They wore costly clothes. They ate a rich diet. Wine and women were part of their life. A large number of servants, slaves and women were always at their disposal. The upper-class Hindus also had much wealth, but the Muslims used to loot them. So, they spent their wealth stealthily. The middle-class Muslims enjoyed a better standard of living whereas the Hindus of the middle class were not having a good standard of living. The Hindus could hardly make both ends meet. The poor and the farmers in the society had a very low standard of living. They could neither taste good food nor wear good clothes. They always remained under the debt of the money-lenders.

Essay Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe the political condition of Punjab at the time (In the beginning of the 16th century) of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s birth.
Or
While describing briefly the invasions of Babar over Punjab, explain the causes of his success.
Or
Describe the political condition of Punjab in the beginning of 16th century.
Answer:
The political condition of Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. In those days the Punjab was under the Sultanate of Delhi. The Sultans of the Lodhi dynasty were ruling at that time. Thus, it becomes essential for us to know briefly about the rule of Lodhi Sultans for proper , understanding of the political condition of the Punjab.

The Punjab Under the Lodhis:

In the beginning of the 16th century, anarchy and conspiracies prevailed everywhere in the Punjab.

1. Tatar Khan Lodhi : Bahlol Lodhi had appointed Tatar Khan Lodhi, one of his near relatives, as Governor of the Punjab in 1469 A.D. He ruled over the Punjab with an iron hand till 1485 A.D. He raised the banner of revolt against Bahlol Lodhi in 1485 A.D. due to some reasons. The Sultan sent his son Prince Nizam Khan, who later succeeded to the throne as Sikandar Lodhi, to crush the revolt of Tatar Khan. Tatar Khan was killed while fighting with Prince Nizam Khan.

2. Daulat Khan Lodhi : Daulat Khan Lodhi was the son of Tatar Khan Lodhi. Sultan Sikandar Lodhi appointed him the Governor of the Punjab in 1500 A.D. He remained fully loyal during the reign of Sikandar Lodhi, but he started thinking of becoming independent with the cooperation of his three sons (Ghazi Khan, Haji Khan and Dilawar Khan) during the reign of Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi. He even started conspiring with Alam Khan Lodhi, a step-brother of Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi, who wanted the throne of Delhi for himself. When the Sultan came to know about these conspiracies, he summoned Daulat Khan to the royal court. Daulat Khan Lodhi, sent his younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. Dilawar Khan was taken prisoner by the Sultan and was treated very badly. However, he managed to escape from the prison and quickly reached Punjab. He narrated the bad treatment meted out to him by the Sultan to his father, Daulat Khan. Daulat Khan Lodhi in order to avenge this insult, invited Babar to invade India.

3. Condition of Subjects : In the beginning of the sixteenth century, the condition of the subjects was also very deplorable. The rulers used to indulge in luxuries and merry-making. Extravagant parties had become a daily routine of the court. None had time to take care of the public. As a consequence of this, the government officials became corrupt. Bribery was common. Not to speak of the Sultan, even Qazis and Ulemas took bribe and delivered justice accordingly. All sorts of atrocities were let loose on the Hindus. They were being converted to Islam by force. Those, who refused were put to death. In short, atrocities, cruelties, corruption and intrigue were prevalent all over. The prevailing political condition of the time has been aptly described by Guru Nanak Dev Ji in Var Majh, “Kal kati raje kasai, Dharam pankhkar udriya, Koor amavas sach chandrama dise nahin keh chariya.” This Kali age is like a sword, the Kings are butchers. Goodness has taken wings and flown away. There is pitch darkness and the moon of truth shines nowhere.

Invasions of Babar:

A triangular contest began for the possession of Punjab in 1519 A.D. It took place between Ibrahim Lodhi, Daulat Khan Lodhi and Babar. Finally Babar won the struggle. He had to invade India five times to- fulfil his aim.’ A brief description of these invasions is given below :

1. First Invasion of Babar 1519 AL.D. : Babar was the ruler of Kabul. In order to expand his empire, Babar concentrated on India, because anarchy and lawlessness prevailed in India at that time. He stormed the border areas of the Punjab in his first invasion of India in 1519 A.D. This time he captured Bhera and Bajaur without facing any resistance. He placed these areas under the charge of Hindu Beg and himself returned to Kabul.

2. Second Invasion of Babar 1519 A.D.: People of Bhera and Bajaur pushed out Hindu Beg from their region soon after Babar had returned to Kabul. So, Babar attacked the Punjab, the second time in September, 1519 A.D. Now, he captured Peshawar. However, he had to return as a revolt had broken out in Badakhshan.

3. Third Invasion of Babar 1520 A.D.: Babar’s third invasion of the Punjab took place in 1520 A.D. During this invasion he easily captured Bhera, Bajaur and Sialkot. Then he attacked Saidpur (Eminabad). The people of Saidpur resisted the attack, so Babar in a fit of fury massacred a large number of people in cold blood.

The whole city was mercilessly plundered. Thousands of women were captured and molested. Guru Nanak Dev Ji, who was present in Saidpur at that time, has mentioned in ‘Babar Vani’ the atrocities let loose on the people by Babar’s army. Guru Nanak Dev writes, ‘‘Khurasan he ruleth and Hindustan he has invaded. No blame to Thee, who ordaineth. The Moghuls hath come for retribution. So much suffering had been inflicted, People cry in agony. Hath Thou not felt?” Babar’s soldiers had arrested Guru Nanak Dev Ji also. Later, when Babar came to know that his soldiers had arrested a great saint, he immediately ordered his release. Babar writes in his autobiography Tuzak-i-Babari that if he had known that such a great saint lived in this town, he would have never attacked it.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

4. Fourth Invasion of Babarl524 A.D. : Babar attacked Punjab the fourth time in 1524 A.D. at the invitation of Daulat Khan Lodhi. He reached Lahore without meeting any stiff resistance. At Lahore, some Afghan Chiefs resisted him against the wishes of Daulat Khan. As a result, Babar flew into a rage and Lahore experienced a reign of terror, destruction and savagery. A large number of people were killed. Houses and streets were set on fire. Then, Babar reached Dipalpur and captured it with the cooperation of Daulat Khan Lodhi. It was also mercilessly sacked. Thereafter, he took control of the Jalandhar Doab. Thus, having conquered the Punjab, Babar placed the territories of Jalandhar Doab and Sultanpur under the charge of Daulat Khan Lodhi. But, as it was much below the expectation of Daulat Khan Lodhi, he along with his son Haji Khan, revolted against Babar. Babar defeated them, but they fled and took refuge in Shivalik hills. Soon after Babar returned to Kabul, Daulat Khan came back to Punjab, defeated the Mughals and recaptured the Punjab.

5. Fifth Invasion of Babar 1525-26 A.D. : Babar invaded India for the fifth time in November 1525 A.D. to teach Daulat Khan a lesson. Hearing the news of Babar’s invasion, Daulat Khan got frightened, that he took refuge in the fort” of Malout in Hoshiarpur district. Babar besieged the fort. Daulat Khan surrendered after some resistance. Babar pardoned him. Now, Babar once again captured the whole of Punjab. Encouraged by this victory, he decided to attack Delhi, which was being ruled by Ibrahim Lodhi. So, he ordered his army to march towards Delhi. When Ibrahim got the news, he marched towards the Punjab to face Babar with an army of one lakh. Babar had 20 thousand soldiers in his army. Both the armies fought a fierce battle near Panipat on 21 April, 1526 A.D. This battle is known as the first battle of Panipat. In this battle Ibrahim Lodhi was defeated and killed. In this way, the reign of the Lodhi dynasty in India came to an end and Babar founded the Mughal empire in India.

Causes of Babar’s Success:

There were many causes (factors) responsible for Babar’s victory in the first battle of Panipat. Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi was quite unpopular among the chiefs a nd the public for his indecent behaviour and cruelties. So, they wanted to get rid of such an incompetent ruler. The army of Ibrahim Lodhi was very weak. Many soldiers in his army had gathered for the purpose of looting only. Their method of warfare was obsolete and they lacked planning. Ibrahim Lodhi committed a grave political and military blunder, when he did not attack Babar’s army for eight days. If, he had not allowed Babar to consolidate his defence system, the result of the battle might have been different. Babar was an able army general. He had a good experience of wars and battles. His use of artillery caused havoc among the Afghan soldiers. The above description makes it clear that there was anarchy and unrest in Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century and it had become an arena of battles and conspiracies.

Question 2.
Discuss the social condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
The social condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. The society was divided into two major classes, namely the Hindus and the Muslims. The Muslims enjoyed many privileges, because they belonged to the ruling class. On the other hand, the Hindus, who formed the majority of population, were deprived of almost all the rights. They were called ‘Kafirs’ and ‘Zimmies.’. Jaziya and the pilgrimage tax were for’cibly charged from the Hindus. The Muslims subjected the Hindus to so much atrocity that a large number of them were compelled to embrace Islam. The condition of women in the society was worse than that of animals. In the words of Dr. Jasbir Singh Ahluwalia, “When Guru Nanak appeared on the horizon, the Indian society had already become static and decadent.”

Features of the Muslim Society:

The Muslim society of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century had the following main features :

1. Three Classes : The Muslim society in the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into three groups—upper class, middle class and lower class.

(a) Upper Class : The upper class of the Muslim society consisted of Amirs, KhAnswer: Sheikhs, Maliks, Iqtadars, Ulemas, Qazis etc. They led a life of luxury and extravagance. They lived in grand palaces. They spent most of their time in merry¬making and feasts. Only during the days of battles were an exception to it. Ulemas and Qazis were religious leaders of the Muslims. Their main duty was to explain Islamic laws and deliver justice to people. But, many of the Ulemas and Qazis of that time had gone astray from their real path.

(b) Middle Class: It consisted of the soldiers, traders, farmers and subordinate officials of the government. There was a considerable difference between the standard of living of this class and that of the upper class. However, their social status was much better than that of the Hindus.

(c) Lower Class : It consisted of slaves, servants and labourers. They were in a very large number. They had to work hard to earn their livelihood. Their life was not satisfactory. They were often subjected to the tyranny of their masters. The condition of the slaves working in the courts was somewhat better than those working in the houses. Sometimes they could reach to high positions in the court.

2. Position of Women: The condition of women in the Muslim society was not satisfactory in any way. They were the least educated. The Purdah system was in vogue. Institutions of polygamy and divorce had made the lives of Muslim women more pitiable. Only women of the upper class Muslim society were granted some facilities, but their number was very small.

3. Diet: The Muslims belonging to the upper class enjoyed delicious food of many kinds. It included meat, halwa, puri, butter, fruits and vegetables. They were very much fond of chewing the betel (pan) and the betel-nut (supari). They drank many kinds of flavoured cold drinks (sharbats) in the summer. The lower class ate very simple food.

4. Dress : The Muslims of the upper class used to wear very costly dresses. Such dresses were made of silk and velvet. These dresses were studded with many kinds of precious stones and jewels. People of lower class used to wear cotton clothes. Men wore kurta and pyjama and women wore long burqas. Both men and women were fond of wearing ornaments. The ornaments of the upper class were made of precious stones, jewels, gold and silver, whereas ornaments of the lower class were very simple and ordinary. The ladies used many kinds of cosmetics.

5. Education : No remarkable progress was made in the field of education in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, maktabs and madarasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and maktabs whereas higher education was provided in the madarasas. Madarasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and Multan were the well known centres of education for the Muslims in the Punjab. Besides these, Jalandhar, Sultanpur, Samana, Narnaul, Bathinda, Sirhind, Sialkot and Kangra were other important centres of education in the Punjab.

6. Means of Entertainment: The Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting and polo. They were fond of horse riding and watching animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these fairs, musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and chaupar. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-e-Barat etc. with great pomp and show.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Features of the Hindu Society:

Following were the main features of the Hindu society in the beginning of sixteenth century :

1. Caste System : The Hindu society was mainly divided into four castes and many sub-castes. The Brahmans occupied the topmost position in the society. Their supreme position had received a great set back with the establishment of Muslim rule in India. Even, then all the rituals of the Hindus were performed by them alone.

The main occupation of the Kshatriyas was to fight and rule. But under the changed circumstances, they had adopted new occupations like trade, agriculture etc. The Vaishyas however, continued to follow their old occupations of trade and agriculture. The Shudras were treated badly in those days. Besides these four main castes, the Hindu society of those days was divided into many other castes and sub-castes. According to Nicoli Conti, an Italian traveller, there were 84 sub¬castes among the Hindus. These castes badly hated one another. The high-caste people contemptuously treated the people of low castes. The caste-system was in fact a blot on the face of the Hindu society. It had weakened the Hindu society to the extent, that its very foundations had been shaken.

2. Position of Women : The position of women in the Hindu society was also not good. She was deprieved of rights given to men. No attention was paid towards girl’s education. So, they remained uneducated. As the Muslims used to take away young Hindu girls forcibly in those days, so, they \vere married at an early age. The women were compelled to remain confined within the four walls of their houses for their whole lives. Purdah had become very popular among the Hindu women. The custom of sati was also on the rise. According to sati system, after the death of her husband, the widow was forcibly burnt alive along with the dead body of her husband on the same pyre. The re-marriage of the widow was not permitted.

3. Diet: The diet of the Hindus was very simple. Most of them were vegetarian. Their meals consisted of wheat, rice, vegetables, ghee and milk. They avoided meat, garlic and onion. The diet of the poor included coarse bread and lassi.

4. Dress: The dress of the Hindus was simple. They usually wore cotton clothes. Men used to wear dhoti and kurta and a turban on their heads. The Brahmans wore only dhoti. Women wore sari, choli (a blouse-like dress) and lehnga (a skirt¬like dress). The poor clad their bodies with a single cotton cloth (chadar). The Hindu men and women were also fond of wearing ornaments.

5. Means of Entertainment : The Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

6. Education: The Hindus received education from the Brahmans in the temples and pathshalas. They received elementary education at these places. There was no centre of higher education for the Hindus in the Punjab. The Hindus belonging to the rich class sent their wards to the madarasas of the Muslims for higher education. However, their number used to be very negligible as the Muslims hated them.

Question 3.
Explain the political and social conditions of Punjab at the birth of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Or
Give a brief account of the political and social conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:

The political condition of Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. In those days the Punjab was under the Sultanate of Delhi. The Sultans of the Lodhi dynasty were ruling at that time. Thus, it becomes essential for us to know briefly about the rule of Lodhi Sultans for proper , understanding of the political condition of the Punjab.

The Punjab Under the Lodhis:

In the beginning of the 16th century, anarchy and conspiracies prevailed everywhere in the Punjab.

1. Tatar Khan Lodhi : Bahlol Lodhi had appointed Tatar Khan Lodhi, one of his near relatives, as Governor of the Punjab in 1469 A.D. He ruled over the Punjab with an iron hand till 1485 A.D. He raised the banner of revolt against Bahlol Lodhi in 1485 A.D. due to some reasons. The Sultan sent his son Prince Nizam Khan, who later succeeded to the throne as Sikandar Lodhi, to crush the revolt of Tatar Khan. Tatar Khan was killed while fighting with Prince Nizam Khan.

2. Daulat Khan Lodhi : Daulat Khan Lodhi was the son of Tatar Khan Lodhi. Sultan Sikandar Lodhi appointed him the Governor of the Punjab in 1500 A.D. He remained fully loyal during the reign of Sikandar Lodhi, but he started thinking of becoming independent with the cooperation of his three sons (Ghazi Khan, Haji Khan and Dilawar Khan) during the reign of Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi. He even started conspiring with Alam Khan Lodhi, a step-brother of Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi, who wanted the throne of Delhi for himself. When the Sultan came to know about these conspiracies, he summoned Daulat Khan to the royal court. Daulat Khan Lodhi, sent his younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. Dilawar Khan was taken prisoner by the Sultan and was treated very badly. However, he managed to escape from the prison and quickly reached Punjab. He narrated the bad treatment meted out to him by the Sultan to his father, Daulat Khan. Daulat Khan Lodhi in order to avenge this insult, invited Babar to invade India.

3. Condition of Subjects : In the beginning of the sixteenth century, the condition of the subjects was also very deplorable. The rulers used to indulge in luxuries and merry-making. Extravagant parties had become a daily routine of the court. None had time to take care of the public. As a consequence of this, the government officials became corrupt. Bribery was common. Not to speak of the Sultan, even Qazis and Ulemas took bribe and delivered justice accordingly. All sorts of atrocities were let loose on the Hindus. They were being converted to Islam by force. Those, who refused were put to death. In short, atrocities, cruelties, corruption and intrigue were prevalent all over. The prevailing political condition of the time has been aptly described by Guru Nanak Dev Ji in Var Majh, “Kal kati raje kasai, Dharam pankhkar udriya, Koor amavas sach chandrama dise nahin keh chariya.” This Kali age is like a sword, the Kings are butchers. Goodness has taken wings and flown away. There is pitch darkness and the moon of truth shines nowhere.

Invasions of Babar:

A triangular contest began for the possession of Punjab in 1519 A.D. It took place between Ibrahim Lodhi, Daulat Khan Lodhi and Babar. Finally Babar won the struggle. He had to invade India five times to- fulfil his aim.’ A brief description of these invasions is given below :

1. First Invasion of Babar 1519 AL.D. : Babar was the ruler of Kabul. In order to expand his empire, Babar concentrated on India, because anarchy and lawlessness prevailed in India at that time. He stormed the border areas of the Punjab in his first invasion of India in 1519 A.D. This time he captured Bhera and Bajaur without facing any resistance. He placed these areas under the charge of Hindu Beg and himself returned to Kabul.

2. Second Invasion of Babar 1519 A.D.: People of Bhera and Bajaur pushed out Hindu Beg from their region soon after Babar had returned to Kabul. So, Babar attacked the Punjab, the second time in September, 1519 A.D. Now, he captured Peshawar. However, he had to return as a revolt had broken out in Badakhshan.

3. Third Invasion of Babar 1520 A.D.: Babar’s third invasion of the Punjab took place in 1520 A.D. During this invasion he easily captured Bhera, Bajaur and Sialkot. Then he attacked Saidpur (Eminabad). The people of Saidpur resisted the attack, so Babar in a fit of fury massacred a large number of people in cold blood.

The whole city was mercilessly plundered. Thousands of women were captured and molested. Guru Nanak Dev Ji, who was present in Saidpur at that time, has mentioned in ‘Babar Vani’ the atrocities let loose on the people by Babar’s army. Guru Nanak Dev writes, ‘‘Khurasan he ruleth and Hindustan he has invaded. No blame to Thee, who ordaineth. The Moghuls hath come for retribution. So much suffering had been inflicted, People cry in agony. Hath Thou not felt?” Babar’s soldiers had arrested Guru Nanak Dev Ji also. Later, when Babar came to know that his soldiers had arrested a great saint, he immediately ordered his release. Babar writes in his autobiography Tuzak-i-Babari that if he had known that such a great saint lived in this town, he would have never attacked it.

4. Fourth Invasion of Babarl524 A.D. : Babar attacked Punjab the fourth time in 1524 A.D. at the invitation of Daulat Khan Lodhi. He reached Lahore without meeting any stiff resistance. At Lahore, some Afghan Chiefs resisted him against the wishes of Daulat Khan. As a result, Babar flew into a rage and Lahore experienced a reign of terror, destruction and savagery. A large number of people were killed. Houses and streets were set on fire. Then, Babar reached Dipalpur and captured it with the cooperation of Daulat Khan Lodhi. It was also mercilessly sacked. Thereafter, he took control of the Jalandhar Doab. Thus, having conquered the Punjab, Babar placed the territories of Jalandhar Doab and Sultanpur under the charge of Daulat Khan Lodhi. But, as it was much below the expectation of Daulat Khan Lodhi, he along with his son Haji Khan, revolted against Babar. Babar defeated them, but they fled and took refuge in Shivalik hills. Soon after Babar returned to Kabul, Daulat Khan came back to Punjab, defeated the Mughals and recaptured the Punjab.

5. Fifth Invasion of Babar 1525-26 A.D. : Babar invaded India for the fifth time in November 1525 A.D. to teach Daulat Khan a lesson. Hearing the news of Babar’s invasion, Daulat Khan got frightened, that he took refuge in the fort” of Malout in Hoshiarpur district. Babar besieged the fort. Daulat Khan surrendered after some resistance. Babar pardoned him. Now, Babar once again captured the whole of Punjab. Encouraged by this victory, he decided to attack Delhi, which was being ruled by Ibrahim Lodhi. So, he ordered his army to march towards Delhi. When Ibrahim got the news, he marched towards the Punjab to face Babar with an army of one lakh. Babar had 20 thousand soldiers in his army. Both the armies fought a fierce battle near Panipat on 21 April, 1526 A.D. This battle is known as the first battle of Panipat. In this battle Ibrahim Lodhi was defeated and killed. In this way, the reign of the Lodhi dynasty in India came to an end and Babar founded the Mughal empire in India.

Causes of Babar’s Success:

There were many causes (factors) responsible for Babar’s victory in the first battle of Panipat. Sultan Ibrahim Lodhi was quite unpopular among the chiefs a nd the public for his indecent behaviour and cruelties. So, they wanted to get rid of such an incompetent ruler. The army of Ibrahim Lodhi was very weak. Many soldiers in his army had gathered for the purpose of looting only. Their method of warfare was obsolete and they lacked planning. Ibrahim Lodhi committed a grave political and military blunder, when he did not attack Babar’s army for eight days. If, he had not allowed Babar to consolidate his defence system, the result of the battle might have been different. Babar was an able army general. He had a good experience of wars and battles. His use of artillery caused havoc among the Afghan soldiers. The above description makes it clear that there was anarchy and unrest in Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century and it had become an arena of battles and conspiracies.

The social condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. The society was divided into two major classes, namely the Hindus and the Muslims. The Muslims enjoyed many privileges, because they belonged to the ruling class. On the other hand, the Hindus, who formed the majority of population, were deprived of almost all the rights. They were called ‘Kafirs’ and ‘Zimmies.’. Jaziya and the pilgrimage tax were for’cibly charged from the Hindus. The Muslims subjected the Hindus to so much atrocity that a large number of them were compelled to embrace Islam. The condition of women in the society was worse than that of animals. In the words of Dr. Jasbir Singh Ahluwalia, “When Guru Nanak appeared on the horizon, the Indian society had already become static and decadent.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Features of the Muslim Society:

The Muslim society of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century had the following main features :

1. Three Classes : The Muslim society in the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into three groups—upper class, middle class and lower class.

(a) Upper Class : The upper class of the Muslim society consisted of Amirs, KhAnswer: Sheikhs, Maliks, Iqtadars, Ulemas, Qazis etc. They led a life of luxury and extravagance. They lived in grand palaces. They spent most of their time in merry¬making and feasts. Only during the days of battles were an exception to it. Ulemas and Qazis were religious leaders of the Muslims. Their main duty was to explain Islamic laws and deliver justice to people. But, many of the Ulemas and Qazis of that time had gone astray from their real path.

(b) Middle Class: It consisted of the soldiers, traders, farmers and subordinate officials of the government. There was a considerable difference between the standard of living of this class and that of the upper class. However, their social status was much better than that of the Hindus.

(c) Lower Class : It consisted of slaves, servants and labourers. They were in a very large number. They had to work hard to earn their livelihood. Their life was not satisfactory. They were often subjected to the tyranny of their masters. The condition of the slaves working in the courts was somewhat better than those working in the houses. Sometimes they could reach to high positions in the court.

2. Position of Women: The condition of women in the Muslim society was not satisfactory in any way. They were the least educated. The Purdah system was in vogue. Institutions of polygamy and divorce had made the lives of Muslim women more pitiable. Only women of the upper class Muslim society were granted some facilities, but their number was very small.

3. Diet: The Muslims belonging to the upper class enjoyed delicious food of many kinds. It included meat, halwa, puri, butter, fruits and vegetables. They were very much fond of chewing the betel (pan) and the betel-nut (supari). They drank many kinds of flavoured cold drinks (sharbats) in the summer. The lower class ate very simple food.

4. Dress : The Muslims of the upper class used to wear very costly dresses. Such dresses were made of silk and velvet. These dresses were studded with many kinds of precious stones and jewels. People of lower class used to wear cotton clothes. Men wore kurta and pyjama and women wore long burqas. Both men and women were fond of wearing ornaments. The ornaments of the upper class were made of precious stones, jewels, gold and silver, whereas ornaments of the lower class were very simple and ordinary. The ladies used many kinds of cosmetics.

5. Education : No remarkable progress was made in the field of education in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, maktabs and madarasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and maktabs whereas higher education was provided in the madarasas. Madarasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and Multan were the well known centres of education for the Muslims in the Punjab. Besides these, Jalandhar, Sultanpur, Samana, Narnaul, Bathinda, Sirhind, Sialkot and Kangra were other important centres of education in the Punjab.

6. Means of Entertainment: The Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting and polo. They were fond of horse riding and watching animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these fairs, musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and chaupar. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-e-Barat etc. with great pomp and show.

Features of the Hindu Society:

Following were the main features of the Hindu society in the beginning of sixteenth century :

1. Caste System : The Hindu society was mainly divided into four castes and many sub-castes. The Brahmans occupied the topmost position in the society. Their supreme position had received a great set back with the establishment of Muslim rule in India. Even, then all the rituals of the Hindus were performed by them alone.

The main occupation of the Kshatriyas was to fight and rule. But under the changed circumstances, they had adopted new occupations like trade, agriculture etc. The Vaishyas however, continued to follow their old occupations of trade and agriculture. The Shudras were treated badly in those days. Besides these four main castes, the Hindu society of those days was divided into many other castes and sub-castes. According to Nicoli Conti, an Italian traveller, there were 84 sub¬castes among the Hindus. These castes badly hated one another. The high-caste people contemptuously treated the people of low castes. The caste-system was in fact a blot on the face of the Hindu society. It had weakened the Hindu society to the extent, that its very foundations had been shaken.

2. Position of Women : The position of women in the Hindu society was also not good. She was deprieved of rights given to men. No attention was paid towards girl’s education. So, they remained uneducated. As the Muslims used to take away young Hindu girls forcibly in those days, so, they \vere married at an early age. The women were compelled to remain confined within the four walls of their houses for their whole lives. Purdah had become very popular among the Hindu women. The custom of sati was also on the rise. According to sati system, after the death of her husband, the widow was forcibly burnt alive along with the dead body of her husband on the same pyre. The re-marriage of the widow was not permitted.

3. Diet: The diet of the Hindus was very simple. Most of them were vegetarian. Their meals consisted of wheat, rice, vegetables, ghee and milk. They avoided meat, garlic and onion. The diet of the poor included coarse bread and lassi.

4. Dress: The dress of the Hindus was simple. They usually wore cotton clothes. Men used to wear dhoti and kurta and a turban on their heads. The Brahmans wore only dhoti. Women wore sari, choli (a blouse-like dress) and lehnga (a skirt¬like dress). The poor clad their bodies with a single cotton cloth (chadar). The Hindu men and women were also fond of wearing ornaments.

5. Means of Entertainment : The Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

6. Education: The Hindus received education from the Brahmans in the temples and pathshalas. They received elementary education at these places. There was no centre of higher education for the Hindus in the Punjab. The Hindus belonging to the rich class sent their wards to the madarasas of the Muslims for higher education. However, their number used to be very negligible as the Muslims hated them.

Economic Condition:

Question 4.
What do you know about agriculture, trade and industries of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteeth century?
Or
Describe the main features of the economic condition of Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century.
Answer:
The economic condition of the people of the Punjab was very good in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Firstly, the soil of the Punjab was very fertile which yielded rich crops with less labour. Secondly, the five great rivers flowed in the Punjab and the land irrigated by them yielded gold (i.e. rich crops). Thirdly, the Punjabis were very hard working. Fourthly, many new towns and cities were founded during the Sultanate period. These were connected with each other through roads. Consequently, they had become very famous trade centres. Fifthly, the entire Indian trade with the countries of Central Asia was carried through the Punjab only.

1. Agriculture : In the beginning of the sixteenth century, agriculture was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab. The soil of the Punjab was very fertile. Land was large and more and more land could be brought under cultivation. The people of the Punjab were hard working. Canals, tanks and wells were used for irrigation. Thus, although the farmers of the Punjab used old methods of farming. They got rich yield of crops on account of the reasons described above. Wheat, barley, maize, rice and sugarcane were major crops. Besides, cotton-seeds, millet, mustard, and many kinds of pulses were grown. Due to the rich harvests the Punjab was called the Granary of India.

2. Industries : Next to agriculture, industry was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab. There were industries run both by the state and the individuals. The state owned industries were situated in big cities, whereas the industries run by individuals were situated in villages. The textile industry was the most famous industry of the Punjab. As silk cloth was in great demand among the people of upper classes, so it was produced in large quantity. Samana, Sunam, Sirhind, Dipalpur, Jalandhar, Lahore and Multan were famous centres of silk textile. Chicken (embroidered fine muslin) was produced in Gujarat and Sialkot. Multan and Sultanpur were famous for calico (chintz). Sialkot was known for its dhotis, sarees, turbans and embroidered best quality lungis. Amritsar, Kangra and Kashmir were famous centres of woollen textiles. Besides textile industry, there were other industries which manufactured leather goods, arms, utensils, toys and articles of ivory.

3. Animal Rearing: Some people of the Punjab were engaged in animal rearing also. This included animals like cows, oxen, buffaloes, horses, ponies, camels, sheep and goats. Milk and wool were obtained from these animals. Horses, ponies, camels and oxen were used for carrying goods.

4. Trade : The trade of the Punjab was much developed. Trade was carried on by certain categories of people. The Kshatriyas, Mahajans, Banias, Soods and Aroras among the Hindus and Bohras and Khojas among the Muslims carried on trade. Transportation of goods was carried on by Banjaras. In those days the foreign trade of the Punjab was carried on mainly with Afghanistan, Egypt, the Arab countries, Syria, Tibet, Bhutan and China. Foodgrains, textile, silk, cotton seed and sugar were exported to these countries and in turn the Punjab imported horses, arms, fur, dry fruit and musk from these countries.

5. Commercial Towns : In the beginning of sixteenth century Lahore and Multan were the two most important commercial towns of the Punjab. Besides, Jalandhar, Ludhiana, Batala, Bathinda, Sunam, Ropar, Ferozepur, Sultanpur, Pathankot, Sialkot, Kjillu, Chamba and Kangra were also famous for trade and commerce.

6. Standard of Living: In those days, the standard of living of all the people of the Punjab was not the same. The upper class of Muslims rolled in wealth and thus led a luxurious life. The upper class of Hindus also had much wealth, but the Muslims used to loot them. So, they spent their wealth stealthily. The middle class of Muslims enjoyed a better standard of living whereas the Hindus of the middle class were not having a good standard of living. The Hindus could hardly make both ends meet. The poor and the farmers in the society had a very low standard of living. They could neither taste good food nor wear good clothes.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 5.
Briefly discuss the social and economic conditions of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What were the social and economic conditions of the people of Punjab in the 16th century?
Or
What were the social and economic conditions of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century? Discuss it.
Answer:

The social condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. The society was divided into two major classes, namely the Hindus and the Muslims. The Muslims enjoyed many privileges, because they belonged to the ruling class. On the other hand, the Hindus, who formed the majority of population, were deprived of almost all the rights. They were called ‘Kafirs’ and ‘Zimmies.’. Jaziya and the pilgrimage tax were for’cibly charged from the Hindus. The Muslims subjected the Hindus to so much atrocity that a large number of them were compelled to embrace Islam. The condition of women in the society was worse than that of animals. In the words of Dr. Jasbir Singh Ahluwalia, “When Guru Nanak appeared on the horizon, the Indian society had already become static and decadent.”

Features of the Muslim Society:

The Muslim society of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century had the following main features :

1. Three Classes : The Muslim society in the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into three groups—upper class, middle class and lower class.

(a) Upper Class : The upper class of the Muslim society consisted of Amirs, KhAnswer: Sheikhs, Maliks, Iqtadars, Ulemas, Qazis etc. They led a life of luxury and extravagance. They lived in grand palaces. They spent most of their time in merry¬making and feasts. Only during the days of battles were an exception to it. Ulemas and Qazis were religious leaders of the Muslims. Their main duty was to explain Islamic laws and deliver justice to people. But, many of the Ulemas and Qazis of that time had gone astray from their real path.

(b) Middle Class: It consisted of the soldiers, traders, farmers and subordinate officials of the government. There was a considerable difference between the standard of living of this class and that of the upper class. However, their social status was much better than that of the Hindus.

(c) Lower Class : It consisted of slaves, servants and labourers. They were in a very large number. They had to work hard to earn their livelihood. Their life was not satisfactory. They were often subjected to the tyranny of their masters. The condition of the slaves working in the courts was somewhat better than those working in the houses. Sometimes they could reach to high positions in the court.

2. Position of Women: The condition of women in the Muslim society was not satisfactory in any way. They were the least educated. The Purdah system was in vogue. Institutions of polygamy and divorce had made the lives of Muslim women more pitiable. Only women of the upper class Muslim society were granted some facilities, but their number was very small.

3. Diet: The Muslims belonging to the upper class enjoyed delicious food of many kinds. It included meat, halwa, puri, butter, fruits and vegetables. They were very much fond of chewing the betel (pan) and the betel-nut (supari). They drank many kinds of flavoured cold drinks (sharbats) in the summer. The lower class ate very simple food.

4. Dress : The Muslims of the upper class used to wear very costly dresses. Such dresses were made of silk and velvet. These dresses were studded with many kinds of precious stones and jewels. People of lower class used to wear cotton clothes. Men wore kurta and pyjama and women wore long burqas. Both men and women were fond of wearing ornaments. The ornaments of the upper class were made of precious stones, jewels, gold and silver, whereas ornaments of the lower class were very simple and ordinary. The ladies used many kinds of cosmetics.

5. Education : No remarkable progress was made in the field of education in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, maktabs and madarasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and maktabs whereas higher education was provided in the madarasas. Madarasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and Multan were the well known centres of education for the Muslims in the Punjab. Besides these, Jalandhar, Sultanpur, Samana, Narnaul, Bathinda, Sirhind, Sialkot and Kangra were other important centres of education in the Punjab.

6. Means of Entertainment: The Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting and polo. They were fond of horse riding and watching animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these fairs, musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and chaupar. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-e-Barat etc. with great pomp and show.

Features of the Hindu Society:

Following were the main features of the Hindu society in the beginning of sixteenth century :

1. Caste System : The Hindu society was mainly divided into four castes and many sub-castes. The Brahmans occupied the topmost position in the society. Their supreme position had received a great set back with the establishment of Muslim rule in India. Even, then all the rituals of the Hindus were performed by them alone.

The main occupation of the Kshatriyas was to fight and rule. But under the changed circumstances, they had adopted new occupations like trade, agriculture etc. The Vaishyas however, continued to follow their old occupations of trade and agriculture. The Shudras were treated badly in those days. Besides these four main castes, the Hindu society of those days was divided into many other castes and sub-castes. According to Nicoli Conti, an Italian traveller, there were 84 sub¬castes among the Hindus. These castes badly hated one another. The high-caste people contemptuously treated the people of low castes. The caste-system was in fact a blot on the face of the Hindu society. It had weakened the Hindu society to the extent, that its very foundations had been shaken.

2. Position of Women : The position of women in the Hindu society was also not good. She was deprieved of rights given to men. No attention was paid towards girl’s education. So, they remained uneducated. As the Muslims used to take away young Hindu girls forcibly in those days, so, they \vere married at an early age. The women were compelled to remain confined within the four walls of their houses for their whole lives. Purdah had become very popular among the Hindu women. The custom of sati was also on the rise. According to sati system, after the death of her husband, the widow was forcibly burnt alive along with the dead body of her husband on the same pyre. The re-marriage of the widow was not permitted.

3. Diet: The diet of the Hindus was very simple. Most of them were vegetarian. Their meals consisted of wheat, rice, vegetables, ghee and milk. They avoided meat, garlic and onion. The diet of the poor included coarse bread and lassi.

4. Dress: The dress of the Hindus was simple. They usually wore cotton clothes. Men used to wear dhoti and kurta and a turban on their heads. The Brahmans wore only dhoti. Women wore sari, choli (a blouse-like dress) and lehnga (a skirt¬like dress). The poor clad their bodies with a single cotton cloth (chadar). The Hindu men and women were also fond of wearing ornaments.

5. Means of Entertainment : The Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

6. Education: The Hindus received education from the Brahmans in the temples and pathshalas. They received elementary education at these places. There was no centre of higher education for the Hindus in the Punjab. The Hindus belonging to the rich class sent their wards to the madarasas of the Muslims for higher education. However, their number used to be very negligible as the Muslims hated them.

The economic condition of the people of the Punjab was very good in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Firstly, the soil of the Punjab was very fertile which yielded rich crops with less labour. Secondly, the five great rivers flowed in the Punjab and the land irrigated by them yielded gold (i.e. rich crops). Thirdly, the Punjabis were very hard working. Fourthly, many new towns and cities were founded during the Sultanate period. These were connected with each other through roads. Consequently, they had become very famous trade centres. Fifthly, the entire Indian trade with the countries of Central Asia was carried through the Punjab only.

1. Agriculture : In the beginning of the sixteenth century, agriculture was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab. The soil of the Punjab was very fertile. Land was large and more and more land could be brought under cultivation. The people of the Punjab were hard working. Canals, tanks and wells were used for irrigation. Thus, although the farmers of the Punjab used old methods of farming. They got rich yield of crops on account of the reasons described above. Wheat, barley, maize, rice and sugarcane were major crops. Besides, cotton-seeds, millet, mustard, and many kinds of pulses were grown. Due to the rich harvests the Punjab was called the Granary of India.

2. Industries : Next to agriculture, industry was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab. There were industries run both by the state and the individuals. The state owned industries were situated in big cities, whereas the industries run by individuals were situated in villages. The textile industry was the most famous industry of the Punjab. As silk cloth was in great demand among the people of upper classes, so it was produced in large quantity. Samana, Sunam, Sirhind, Dipalpur, Jalandhar, Lahore and Multan were famous centres of silk textile. Chicken (embroidered fine muslin) was produced in Gujarat and Sialkot. Multan and Sultanpur were famous for calico (chintz). Sialkot was known for its dhotis, sarees, turbans and embroidered best quality lungis. Amritsar, Kangra and Kashmir were famous centres of woollen textiles. Besides textile industry, there were other industries which manufactured leather goods, arms, utensils, toys and articles of ivory.

3. Animal Rearing: Some people of the Punjab were engaged in animal rearing also. This included animals like cows, oxen, buffaloes, horses, ponies, camels, sheep and goats. Milk and wool were obtained from these animals. Horses, ponies, camels and oxen were used for carrying goods.

4. Trade : The trade of the Punjab was much developed. Trade was carried on by certain categories of people. The Kshatriyas, Mahajans, Banias, Soods and Aroras among the Hindus and Bohras and Khojas among the Muslims carried on trade. Transportation of goods was carried on by Banjaras. In those days the foreign trade of the Punjab was carried on mainly with Afghanistan, Egypt, the Arab countries, Syria, Tibet, Bhutan and China. Foodgrains, textile, silk, cotton seed and sugar were exported to these countries and in turn the Punjab imported horses, arms, fur, dry fruit and musk from these countries.

5. Commercial Towns : In the beginning of sixteenth century Lahore and Multan were the two most important commercial towns of the Punjab. Besides, Jalandhar, Ludhiana, Batala, Bathinda, Sunam, Ropar, Ferozepur, Sultanpur, Pathankot, Sialkot, Kjillu, Chamba and Kangra were also famous for trade and commerce.

6. Standard of Living: In those days, the standard of living of all the people of the Punjab was not the same. The upper class of Muslims rolled in wealth and thus led a luxurious life. The upper class of Hindus also had much wealth, but the Muslims used to loot them. So, they spent their wealth stealthily. The middle class of Muslims enjoyed a better standard of living whereas the Hindus of the middle class were not having a good standard of living. The Hindus could hardly make both ends meet. The poor and the farmers in the society had a very low standard of living. They could neither taste good food nor wear good clothes.

Question 6.
Give a brief account of the religious condition of the people of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
In the 16th century, two main religions Hinduism and Islam were prevalent. These religions were divided into several sects further. Besides these, Buddhism and Jainism were also popular. A brief description of these religions is as follows :

1. Hinduism: Hinduism was the most important religion of the people of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century. Hindus believed in the Vedas. Ramayana and Mahabharata were extremely popular among the people of Punjab in the 16th century. Brahmans hold the supreme position during this period. All customs from birth till death were considered incomplete without the presence of the BrahmAnswer: The following sects were popular in Hinduism in Punjab :

(a) Shaivism: Shaivism was very popular at the beginning of the 16th century in Punjab. Most of the people were devotees of Shiva. They had established Shivalayas at several places, where the teachings of Shaivism were imparted. Those who believed in Shaivism were called Jogis. The main branch of the Jogis was called Nathpanthi. It was established by Gorakhnath. Because they pierced their ears to wear kundals, they were also referred to as ‘Kaanfate Jogi’. The main centre of the Jogis in Punjab was at Gorakhnath ka Tilla in Jhelum. The Jogis preached against the Brahmanic customs and caste system.

(b) Vaishnavism: Vaishnavism was also quite popular in Punjab. The people of this sect worshipped Vishnu and his incarnations. In this period, Sri Ram and Sri Krishna were worshipped as incarnations of Vishnu. Several huge and beautiful temples were built in several parts of Punjab. The devotees of this sect did not consume wine or flesh.

(c) Shaktism: Shaktism was quite prevalent among the people of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century. The people of this sect worshipped Durga, Kali and other deities. They considered these goddesses as the symbol of power. To please these deities, animals were sacrificed. Several temples were constructed in their memory. Of these, the famous temples were Jwala Ji, Chintapurni, Chamunda Devi and Naina Devi.

2. Islam: Islam was founded by Prophet Muhammad Sahib in the 7th century A.D. in Mecca. He vehemently opposed the social and religious malpractices prevalent in society. He gave the message of one God and the mutual brotherhood of mankind. At the beginning of the 16th century, Islam spread fervently. There were two reasons for this. Firstly, all the Sultans who ruled over India were Muslims. Secondly, they converted people to Islam at the point of a sword. The followers of Islam were divided into Sunni and Shia sects. The number of Sunni Muslims was greater and they had orthodox ideas. The religious leaders of Muslims were called the Ulemas. They interpreted the Islamic laws and inspired the people to spend a pious life. They looked down upon the other religions with hatred.

3. Sufism : Sufism was a sect that was associated with Islam. This sect was popular in Punjab. This sect was divided in 12 Silsilas. The Chishti and Suhrawardi Silsilas of Punjab were most popular. Thaneswar, Hansi, Narnaul and Panipat were the famous centres of the Sufis. The people of this sect believed in only one Allah. They respected all religions. They considered service to humanity as their greatest responsibility. They believed in music. The Sufis inspired the Hindus and Muslims to maintain cordial relations, encouraged the Sultans to give up fanaticism and contributed appreciably towards the development of music and literature.

4. Jainism : Jainism was prevalent amongst the traders. The people of this sect believed in 24 Tirthankaras, Triratnas, Ahimsa, principle of Karma and Nirvana. They did not believe in the existence of God.

5. Buddhism : In the 16th century, Buddhism was a part of Hinduism. Lord Buddha was considered to be an incarnation of Lord Vishnu. Very few people of Punjab followed Buddhism. Guru Nanak Dev Ji has described the religious condition of the people of Punjab in the 16th century in his compositions. According to him, both the Hindus and the Muslims observed several religious rituals such as rubbing ash on the body, putting tilak on the forehead, piercing ears for wearing kundals, bathing in the rivers, observing rozas and worshipping the tombs etc. People had completely forgotten the true spirit of religion. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. Hari Ram Gupta, “In short, at the time of Guru Nanak’s advent both the religions in India, Hinduism and Islam, had become corrupt and degraded. They had lost their pristine purity and glory.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 7.
Describe the social and religious condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th’century.
Answer:
The social condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was very deplorable. The society was divided into two major classes, namely the Hindus and the Muslims. The Muslims enjoyed many privileges, because they belonged to the ruling class. On the other hand, the Hindus, who formed the majority of population, were deprived of almost all the rights. They were called ‘Kafirs’ and ‘Zimmies.’. Jaziya and the pilgrimage tax were for’cibly charged from the Hindus. The Muslims subjected the Hindus to so much atrocity that a large number of them were compelled to embrace Islam. The condition of women in the society was worse than that of animals. In the words of Dr. Jasbir Singh Ahluwalia, “When Guru Nanak appeared on the horizon, the Indian society had already become static and decadent.”

Features of the Muslim Society:

The Muslim society of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century had the following main features :

1. Three Classes : The Muslim society in the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into three groups—upper class, middle class and lower class.

(a) Upper Class : The upper class of the Muslim society consisted of Amirs, KhAnswer: Sheikhs, Maliks, Iqtadars, Ulemas, Qazis etc. They led a life of luxury and extravagance. They lived in grand palaces. They spent most of their time in merry¬making and feasts. Only during the days of battles were an exception to it. Ulemas and Qazis were religious leaders of the Muslims. Their main duty was to explain Islamic laws and deliver justice to people. But, many of the Ulemas and Qazis of that time had gone astray from their real path.

(b) Middle Class: It consisted of the soldiers, traders, farmers and subordinate officials of the government. There was a considerable difference between the standard of living of this class and that of the upper class. However, their social status was much better than that of the Hindus.

(c) Lower Class : It consisted of slaves, servants and labourers. They were in a very large number. They had to work hard to earn their livelihood. Their life was not satisfactory. They were often subjected to the tyranny of their masters. The condition of the slaves working in the courts was somewhat better than those working in the houses. Sometimes they could reach to high positions in the court.

2. Position of Women: The condition of women in the Muslim society was not satisfactory in any way. They were the least educated. The Purdah system was in vogue. Institutions of polygamy and divorce had made the lives of Muslim women more pitiable. Only women of the upper class Muslim society were granted some facilities, but their number was very small.

3. Diet: The Muslims belonging to the upper class enjoyed delicious food of many kinds. It included meat, halwa, puri, butter, fruits and vegetables. They were very much fond of chewing the betel (pan) and the betel-nut (supari). They drank many kinds of flavoured cold drinks (sharbats) in the summer. The lower class ate very simple food.

4. Dress : The Muslims of the upper class used to wear very costly dresses. Such dresses were made of silk and velvet. These dresses were studded with many kinds of precious stones and jewels. People of lower class used to wear cotton clothes. Men wore kurta and pyjama and women wore long burqas. Both men and women were fond of wearing ornaments. The ornaments of the upper class were made of precious stones, jewels, gold and silver, whereas ornaments of the lower class were very simple and ordinary. The ladies used many kinds of cosmetics.

5. Education : No remarkable progress was made in the field of education in the beginning of the sixteenth century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. They held classes in mosques, maktabs and madarasas. The government gave them grants. Primary education was given in the mosques and maktabs whereas higher education was provided in the madarasas. Madarasas were usually situated in cities. Lahore and Multan were the well known centres of education for the Muslims in the Punjab. Besides these, Jalandhar, Sultanpur, Samana, Narnaul, Bathinda, Sirhind, Sialkot and Kangra were other important centres of education in the Punjab.

6. Means of Entertainment: The Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting and polo. They were fond of horse riding and watching animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these fairs, musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and chaupar. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-e-Barat etc. with great pomp and show.

Features of the Hindu Society:

Following were the main features of the Hindu society in the beginning of sixteenth century :

1. Caste System : The Hindu society was mainly divided into four castes and many sub-castes. The Brahmans occupied the topmost position in the society. Their supreme position had received a great set back with the establishment of Muslim rule in India. Even, then all the rituals of the Hindus were performed by them alone.

The main occupation of the Kshatriyas was to fight and rule. But under the changed circumstances, they had adopted new occupations like trade, agriculture etc. The Vaishyas however, continued to follow their old occupations of trade and agriculture. The Shudras were treated badly in those days. Besides these four main castes, the Hindu society of those days was divided into many other castes and sub-castes. According to Nicoli Conti, an Italian traveller, there were 84 sub¬castes among the Hindus. These castes badly hated one another. The high-caste people contemptuously treated the people of low castes. The caste-system was in fact a blot on the face of the Hindu society. It had weakened the Hindu society to the extent, that its very foundations had been shaken.

2. Position of Women : The position of women in the Hindu society was also not good. She was deprieved of rights given to men. No attention was paid towards girl’s education. So, they remained uneducated. As the Muslims used to take away young Hindu girls forcibly in those days, so, they \vere married at an early age. The women were compelled to remain confined within the four walls of their houses for their whole lives. Purdah had become very popular among the Hindu women. The custom of sati was also on the rise. According to sati system, after the death of her husband, the widow was forcibly burnt alive along with the dead body of her husband on the same pyre. The re-marriage of the widow was not permitted.

3. Diet: The diet of the Hindus was very simple. Most of them were vegetarian. Their meals consisted of wheat, rice, vegetables, ghee and milk. They avoided meat, garlic and onion. The diet of the poor included coarse bread and lassi.

4. Dress: The dress of the Hindus was simple. They usually wore cotton clothes. Men used to wear dhoti and kurta and a turban on their heads. The Brahmans wore only dhoti. Women wore sari, choli (a blouse-like dress) and lehnga (a skirt¬like dress). The poor clad their bodies with a single cotton cloth (chadar). The Hindu men and women were also fond of wearing ornaments.

5. Means of Entertainment : The Hindus were fond of singing, dancing and music. They played chess and cards also. They entertained themselves through animal fights and wrestling. Besides, they celebrated their festivals with great enthusiasm.

6. Education: The Hindus received education from the Brahmans in the temples and pathshalas. They received elementary education at these places. There was no centre of higher education for the Hindus in the Punjab. The Hindus belonging to the rich class sent their wards to the madarasas of the Muslims for higher education. However, their number used to be very negligible as the Muslims hated them.

In the 16th century, two main religions Hinduism and Islam were prevalent. These religions were divided into several sects further. Besides these, Buddhism and Jainism were also popular. A brief description of these religions is as follows :

1. Hinduism: Hinduism was the most important religion of the people of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century. Hindus believed in the Vedas. Ramayana and Mahabharata were extremely popular among the people of Punjab in the 16th century. Brahmans hold the supreme position during this period. All customs from birth till death were considered incomplete without the presence of the BrahmAnswer: The following sects were popular in Hinduism in Punjab :

(a) Shaivism: Shaivism was very popular at the beginning of the 16th century in Punjab. Most of the people were devotees of Shiva. They had established Shivalayas at several places, where the teachings of Shaivism were imparted. Those who believed in Shaivism were called Jogis. The main branch of the Jogis was called Nathpanthi. It was established by Gorakhnath. Because they pierced their ears to wear kundals, they were also referred to as ‘Kaanfate Jogi’. The main centre of the Jogis in Punjab was at Gorakhnath ka Tilla in Jhelum. The Jogis preached against the Brahmanic customs and caste system.

(b) Vaishnavism: Vaishnavism was also quite popular in Punjab. The people of this sect worshipped Vishnu and his incarnations. In this period, Sri Ram and Sri Krishna were worshipped as incarnations of Vishnu. Several huge and beautiful temples were built in several parts of Punjab. The devotees of this sect did not consume wine or flesh.

(c) Shaktism: Shaktism was quite prevalent among the people of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century. The people of this sect worshipped Durga, Kali and other deities. They considered these goddesses as the symbol of power. To please these deities, animals were sacrificed. Several temples were constructed in their memory. Of these, the famous temples were Jwala Ji, Chintapurni, Chamunda Devi and Naina Devi.

2. Islam: Islam was founded by Prophet Muhammad Sahib in the 7th century A.D. in Mecca. He vehemently opposed the social and religious malpractices prevalent in society. He gave the message of one God and the mutual brotherhood of mankind. At the beginning of the 16th century, Islam spread fervently. There were two reasons for this. Firstly, all the Sultans who ruled over India were Muslims. Secondly, they converted people to Islam at the point of a sword. The followers of Islam were divided into Sunni and Shia sects. The number of Sunni Muslims was greater and they had orthodox ideas. The religious leaders of Muslims were called the Ulemas. They interpreted the Islamic laws and inspired the people to spend a pious life. They looked down upon the other religions with hatred.

3. Sufism : Sufism was a sect that was associated with Islam. This sect was popular in Punjab. This sect was divided in 12 Silsilas. The Chishti and Suhrawardi Silsilas of Punjab were most popular. Thaneswar, Hansi, Narnaul and Panipat were the famous centres of the Sufis. The people of this sect believed in only one Allah. They respected all religions. They considered service to humanity as their greatest responsibility. They believed in music. The Sufis inspired the Hindus and Muslims to maintain cordial relations, encouraged the Sultans to give up fanaticism and contributed appreciably towards the development of music and literature.

4. Jainism : Jainism was prevalent amongst the traders. The people of this sect believed in 24 Tirthankaras, Triratnas, Ahimsa, principle of Karma and Nirvana. They did not believe in the existence of God.

5. Buddhism : In the 16th century, Buddhism was a part of Hinduism. Lord Buddha was considered to be an incarnation of Lord Vishnu. Very few people of Punjab followed Buddhism. Guru Nanak Dev Ji has described the religious condition of the people of Punjab in the 16th century in his compositions. According to him, both the Hindus and the Muslims observed several religious rituals such as rubbing ash on the body, putting tilak on the forehead, piercing ears for wearing kundals, bathing in the rivers, observing rozas and worshipping the tombs etc. People had completely forgotten the true spirit of religion. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. Hari Ram Gupta, “In short, at the time of Guru Nanak’s advent both the religions in India, Hinduism and Islam, had become corrupt and degraded. They had lost their pristine purity and glory.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Explain the political condition of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What was the political condition of Punjab in the beginning of. 16th century?
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century, the political condition of the Punjab was very unstable. As a result of the wrong policies of Lodhi Sultans, lawlessness prevailed all around. The govt, officials had become corrupt to the core and bribery was rampant. The Muslims converted the Hindus to Islam at the point of the Sword. Seaving the situation, the governor of Punjab Daulat-Khan-Lodhi invited Babar to attack India.

Question 2.
“In the beginning of the 16th century, the Punjab was a cockpit of triangular struggle”. Explain.
Or
Explain the triangular struggle of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What do you know about the triangular struggle in Punjab?
Or
Write in brief about the triangular struggle of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century.
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century the Punjab was a cockpit of triangular struggle. This triangular struggle began between Babar, the ruler of Kabul, Ibrahim Lodhi, the ruler of Delhi and Daulat Khan Lodhi, the Governor of the Punjab. Daulat Khan Lodhi wanted to become an independent ruler of the Punjab. When Ibrahim Lodhi came to know about it, he imprisioned Daulat Khan Lodhi’s younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. In order to take revenge of this insult, he invited Babar to invade India. In this triangular struggle, Babar came out victorious.

Question 3.
Who was Daulat Khan Lodhi?
Or
Write a short note on Daulat Khan Lodhi.
Answer:
Daulat Khan Lodhi was appointed as the Governor of the Punjab in 1500 A.D. Daulat Khan Lodhi wanted to be an independent ruler of the Punjab. When Ibrahim Lodhi came to know about it, he issued an order to Daulat Khan Lodhi to present himself in the royal court of Delhi. In order to escape the wrath of the Sultan, Daulat Khan sent his younger son Dilawar Khan to Delhi. When Dilawar Khan reached there, he was arrested and put into prison. But soon, he succeeded in escaping from the jail. Daulat Khan invited Babar to invade India, in order to take revenge of the insult.

Question 4.
Write any three causes of the invasions of Babur over India.
Answer:

  • He wanted to expand his empire.
  • He wanted to plunder the wealth of India.
  • He wanted to spread Islam in India.

Question 5.
When did Babar invade Saidpur? What is its importance in Sikh History?
Or
Give a brief account of Babar’s third invasion over Punjab.
Answer:
Babar invaded Saidpur in 1520 A.D. The people of this place stoutly resisted Babur. Consequently, Babar got angry. His forces massacred people in a large number, set the houses and palaces on fire after plundering them. Thousands of women were taken into custody and they were maltreated. Guru Nanak Dev Ji was in Saidpur at that time and he wrote in his ‘Babar Bani’ about the tyranny of the Mughal army on people. The army of Babar had arrested the Guru Nanak Dev Ji also. Later on, when Babar came to know about the piety of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, he at once ordered his release.

Question 6.
Write a brief note on the first battle of Panipat.
Or
Give a brief account of the first battle of Panipat.
Or
Explain the first battle of Panipat and its significance
Answer:
Babar invaded Punjab for the fifth time in November 1525 A.D. to teach Daulat Khan Lodhi, the Governor of Punjab, a lesson. After putting up a brief resistance, Daulat Khan Lodhi surrendered. Encouraged by the conquest of Punjab, Babar decided to clash against Ibrahim Lodhi. With this objective in mind, he ordered his army to march towards Delhi. On April 21, 1526 A.D. both armies clashed in the first battle of Panipat. Ibrahim Lodhi was defeated and killed in this battle. Consequently, the rule of the Lodhi dynasty in India came to an end and it led to the foundation of the Mughal dynasty.

Question 7.
What were the three results of the first battle of Panipat?
Answer:

  • Ibrahim Lodhi was defeated.
  • It led to the end of the Delhi Sultanate.
  • It led to the foundation of Mughal rule.

Question 8.
What led to the victory of Babar in the first battle of Panipat?
Or
Give a brief account of the causes of the victory of Babar and the defeat of the Afghans in India.
Answer:

  • Ibrahim Lodhi, the Sultan of Delhi was notorious for his ill-treatment and the tyranny caused to his nobles and his subjects. They wanted to get rid of such a ruler,
  • Babar was an able commander.
  • The artillery of Babar created havoc. The soldiers of Ibrahim Lodhi could not face them with their swords, bows and arrows.

Question 9.
According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji why the rulers were unjust?
Answer:

  • They used to collect Jaziya and pilgrimage tax from the Hindus.
  • They fleeced the peasants and committed untold atrocities on the people.
  • They did not provide justice to the people without taking any bribes.

Question 10.
What was the social condition of Punjab, at the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
What do you know about the social condition of Punjab at the time of the birth of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
At the beginning of the 16th century, the society of Punjab was divided into two main classes-the Muslims and Hindus. The Muslims being related to the ruling class, enjoyed some special privileges. They were appointed to high offices of the State. On the other hand, the Hindus were deprived of all their rights. The Muslims perpetrated so much tyranny on the Hindus that several Hindus embraced Islam under duress. At that time, the condition of women was also pitiable.

Question 11.
What was the condition of women in the society of Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century? Explain briefly.
Describe the condition of women in Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
The condition of the women folk in society of Punjab, in the beginning of the 16th century was not satisfactory. Child marriage was prevalent in the society at that time. The women were deprieved all those rights which were given to men. Hindu society. As the birth of a girl was deemed an ill-omen, many of them were killed as soon as they were bom. Sati system was also at its climax. A widow was not allowed to re-marry. Muslim society also imposed many restrictions on women.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 12.
Into which classes was the Muslim society of the Punjab divided and what type of life did they lead, in the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Give an account of the Muslim classes of Punjab in the beginning of 16th century.
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century, the Muslim society was divided into three classes-

  • Upper Class : Ihe upper class of Muslim society comprised the nobles, Khans, Shaikhs, Qazis and Ulemas. People of this class led a life of pleasure, luxury and comfort.
  • Middle Class : The middle class included traders, soldiers, peasants and petty officials of the state government.
  • Lower Class : This class consisted of mostly the slaves and servants. Their life was not good. They had to bear the tyranny of their masters.

Question 13.
What was the social condition of Muslims of Punjab, in the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Throw light on the condition of Muslim society of Punjab on the eve of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s birth.
Answer:
The social condition of Muslims of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century was very good in comparison to the Hindus. At that time, the Muslim society was divided into three classes. The upper class led a life of luxury and extravagance. The status of the middle class was much better than that of the Hindus. The lower class had to work hard to earn their livelihood. Their life was miserable. The condition of women in the Muslim society was not good.

Question 14.
What was the social condition of the Hindus in the society of the Punjab, in the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Make a mention of the social condition of Hindus in Punjab in the opening of 16th Century.
Answer:
The condition of the Hindus in society of the Punjab, in the beginning of 16th century, was deplorable. They were deprived of almost all the rights. They were called Kafirs and Zimmies. A Jaziya tax was forcibly charged from them. The Muslims forced them at the point of the sword to embrace Islam. The Hindu society was fragmented into many castes and sub-castes. It system had thoroughly weakened the very roots of the Hindu society.

Question 15.
Give a brief account of prevalent education in the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
No special progress was made in the field of education in the beginning of the 16th century. Ulemas and Maulvis taught the Muslims. Primary education was given in the mosques and maktabs, whereas higher education was provided in madarasas. Lahore and Multan were the well-known centres of higher education for the Muslims in the Punjab. The Hindus received their elemantry education from the Brahmins in the temples and pathshalas. They received their higher education with the Muslims.

Question 16.
Write a note on the means of entertainment of the people of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
What were the main means of entertainment of the people of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century, the Muslims entertained themselves in many ways. They were very fond of hunting polo, dancing, singing, music, chess, wrestling, horse riding and witnessing animal fights. They used to take part in fairs and festivals with great enthusiasm. In these, musicians and dancers entertained the viewers. They were also great lovers of playing chess and chaupar. They celebrated their festivals like Id, Nauroz and Shab-i-Barat etc. with great pomp and show.

Question 17.
Give a brief account of the economic condition of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Or
Briefly explain the economic condition of Punjab during the 16th century.
Or
Briefly mention the economic condition of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
The economic condition of people in Punjab was quite sound in the beginning of the 16th century. Agriculture was the main occupation of the people. The soil of Punjab being fertile, resulted in bumper harvests. For this reason, Punjab was called granary of India. The other occupation of people in Punjab was industry. The textile industry, leather industry, arms manufacturing and wood work were the famous industries of the Punjab, at that time. These industries were owned both by the government and the public. Trade, at that time, was good in Punjab.

Question 18.
Give a brief account of the agriculture in the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century, agriculture was the main occupation of people in the Punjab. Land in Punjab was very fertile. People here were very hard-working. Canals, ponds and wells were used for irrigation. Due to these reasons, there used to be bumper harvests. Main crops of the Punjab were wheat, barley, cotton, maize, rice and sugarcane. Punjab was called the granary of India.

Question 19.
What do you know about the Punjab industries in the beginning of the 16th century?
Or
Give an account of the main industries of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
Next to agriculture, industry was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab. The state owned industries were situated in big cities, whereas the industries run by individuals were situated in villages. The textile industry was the most famous industry of the Punjab. Samana, Sunam, Sirhind, Dipalpur, Jalandhar, Lahore, Multan, Amritsar and Kashmir were famous centres of silk textile. Other industries manufactured leather goods, arms, utensils, toys and articles of ivory.

Question 20.
Give a brief account of the trade of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
The trade of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century was developed. Transportation of goods was carried on by Banjaras. Special markets were organised on the occasions of fairs and festivals’. Foreign trade of the Punjab was carried on mainly with Afghanistan, Egypt, the Arab countries, Syria, Tibet, Bhutan and China. Foodgrains, textile, silk, cotton and sugar were exported. Punjab imported horses, arms, fur, dry fruit and musk etc.

Question 21.
What was the living standard of people in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century the standard of living of all the people of the Punjab was not the same. The upper class of Muslims rolled in wealth and thus led a luxurious life. The upper class of Hindus also had much wealth, but the Muslims used to loot them. The middle class of Muslims enjoyed a better standard of living than the Hindus. The lower class were not having good standard of life. They led a pitiable life.

Question 22.
What was the religious condition of Hinduism in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
Hinduism was the cardinal religion of the people of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century. The Hindus believed in the Vedas. The Ramayana and the Mahabharata were very popular at that time. The Hindus worshipped various gods and goddesses and believed in going on pilgrimage to holy places and taking bath in holy rivers. They showed deep reverence to the BrahmAnswer: No religious ceremony could be observed without the blessings of the Brahmins.

Question 23.
Write a short note on Islam.
Or
What was the condition of Islam in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
Besides Hinduism, the other dominating religion in Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century was Islam. It was founded by Prophet Mohammad at Mecca in the 7th century. He condemned the social and religious evils prevalent in the Arabian society. He preached the oneness of God and the brotherhood of mankind. According to him, a Muslim should follow five principles. These principles were called the five pillars of life.

Question 24.
Who were Ulemas? What were their main functions?
Answer:

  • Who were Ulemas? Ulemas were the religious leaders of Islam.
  • Main functions of the Ulemas.

The main functions of the Ulemas were :

  • They used to explain the Islamic laws (Shariyats).
  • They used to encourage the Sultan to take Jihad against the Hindus.
  • They prepared plans and projects for the spread of Islam.

Question 25.
Write a short note on the Sunnis.
Or
The Sunni Muslims.
Answer:
There was the majority of Sunni Muslims in Punjab. All Sultans of Delhi Sultanate and Mughal Emperors belonged to the Sunnis. So, they encouraged the Sunnis and provided many facilities to them. All Qazis, Muftis and Ulemas, who did justice and imparted education, belonged to the Sunnis. The Sunnis were disciples of Prophet Mohammad Sahib. They considered Quran their most sacred scripture. They believed in one God (Allah). Allah was omnipresent and all-powerful and kind. They were not religiously tolerant. So, they were bitter opponents of Hindus. They called them ‘Kafirs’.

Question 26.
Who were the Shias? Explain.
Or
The Shias.
Answer:
Another popular sect in Punjab was the Shias. They also belonged to Prophet Mohammad Sahib like Sunnis. Their sacred scripture was Quran. They believed in one Allah. They also performed Namaz five times a day. They observed fast in the month of Ramzan. They also considered a pilgrimage to Mecca, once in life, a necessity. Though there were many similarities between the Sunnis and the Shias yet there were many differences in them. These differences made them opponents of each other.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 27.
Write the main teachings of Sufism.
Answer:
In the beginning of the 16th century, Sufism had become very popular. They believed in Allah. According to them, Allah is omnipotent and omnipresent. One could realise Allah only through love. They started the traditions of Qawalis. They considered service of mankind as service to God. They did not believe in caste system. They respected other faiths.

Objective Type Questions:

Question 1.
What was the political condition of the Punjab at the time of Babar’s invasion?
Answer:
Very pitiable.

Question 2.
What did Guru Nanak Dev Ji say about the political condition of the Punjab?
Answer:
Bribery and untruthfulness were very much common.

Question 3.
Who ruled over Delhi at the time of the birth of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Or
Who was the founder of Lodhi dynasty?
Answer:
Bahlol Lodhi.

Question 4.
Who was Sikandar Lodhi?
Answer:
He was the Sultan of India from 1489 to 1517 A.D.

Question 5.
When did Sikandar Lodhi occupy the throne of Delhi?
Answer:
1489 A.D.

Question 6.
When did Ibrahim Lodhi occupy the throne?
Answer:
1517 A.D.

Question 7.
Who was the last ruler of Lodhi dynasty?
Answer:
Ibrahim Lodhi.

Question 8.
Who was Daulat Khan Lodhi?
Answer:
He was Governor of Punjab from 1500 A.D. to 1525 A.D.

Question 9.
Who was the ruler of Punjab in the beginning of 16th century?
Answer:
Daulat Khan Lodhi.

Question 10.
What do you understand by the triangular struggle of the Punjab?
Answer:
Struggle which ensued between Ibrahim Lodhi, Daulat Khan Lodhi and Babar for power in the early 16th century.

Question 11.
Of which place was Babar the ruler?
Answer:
Kabul.

Question 12.
Who was Babar?
Answer:
Babar was the ruler of Kabul.

Question 13.
When did Babar first invade Punjab?
Answer:
1519 A.D.

Question 14.
Why did Babar invade India? Give any one cause.
Answer:
He wanted to expand his empire.

Question 15.
Which of Babar’s invasions is compared to the ‘Bridal Procession of Sins’ by Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Third invasion of Babar (Saidpur).

Question 16.
When did Babar invade Saidpur?
Answer:
1520 A.D.

Question 17.
Which Sikh Guru Sahiban was imprisoned at the time of invasion of Saidpur by Babar?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 18.
Which Mughal emperor had imprisioned Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Babar.

Question 19.
When was the first battle of Panipat fought?
Answer:
April 21, 1526.

Question 20.
Between whom was the first battle of Panipat fought?
Answer:
Babar and Ibrahim Lodhi.

Question 21.
Mention any one important result of first battle of Panipat.
Answer:
Foundation of Mughal rule in India.

Question 22.
Into which two main classes the society of Punjab was divided in the beginning of ’16th century?
Answer:
Muslim and Hindu.

Question 23.
Name three classes of the Muslim society in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
Three classes
(a) Upper class,
(b) Middle class and
(c) Lower class.

Question 24.
Mention any one feature of upper class in Muslim society in Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
They lived a luxurious life.

Question 25.
Into how many classes was the Hindu society of Punjab divided in the early 16th century?
Answer:
Four classes—
(a) The Brahman,
(b) Khatri,
(c) Vaish and
(d) Shudra.

Question 26.
What was the condition of Shudras in Hindu society of Punjab in the early 16th century?
Answer:
Pitiable.

Question 27.
Name any one centre of Islamic education in the Punjab in the 16th century.
Answer:
Lahore.

Question 28.
What was the main occupation of the people of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century?
Answer:
Agriculture.

Question 29.
Name any one crop raised in Punjab during the beginning of 16th century?
Answer:
Wheat.

Question 30.
Which was the most famous industry of Punjab in the early 16th century?
Answer:
Textile industry.

Question 31.
Name any one important woollen centre of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
Amritsar.

Question 32.
Name two items of export from Punjab in the early 16th century.
Answer:
Textiles and foodgrains.

Question 33.
Name any one trader community of Punjab in the early 16th century.
Answer:
Mahajan.

Question 34.
What was the name of the main sect of Punjabi Jogis in the beginning of 16th century?
Answer:
Nath Panthis and Gorakh Panthis.

Question 35.
Whom did the Jogis worship?
Answer:
Lord Shiva.

Question 36.
Why were Jogis called Kanphate Jogis?
Answer:
Because they donned huge rings in their ears.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Question 37.
What do you mean by Shaivism?
Answer:
The people of Shaivism believed in the worship of Lord Shiva.

Question 38.
What do you mean by Vaishnavism?
Answer:
The people of this sect believed in the worship of Lord Vishnu.

Question 39.
What do you mean by Shaktism?
Answer:
The people of this sect believed in the worship of Kali, Durga and other goddesses.

Question 40.
By whom was Islam founded?
Answer:
Prophet Mohammad.

Question 41.
In how many pillars Islam believed?
Answer:
Five pillars.

Question 42.
By whom was Chishti Silsila founded in India.?
Answer:
Shaikh Muinuddin Chishti.

Question 43.
At which place Shaikh Muinuddin Chishti founded Chisti Silsila?
Answer:
Ajmer.

Question 44.
Who was the most famous Chishti leader in Punjab?
Answer:
Shaikh Farid.

Question 45.
By whom was Suharwardi Silsila founded?
Answer:
Shaikh Bahauddin Zakaria.

Question 46.
Where was the foundation of Suharwardi Silsila laid?
Answer:
Multan.

Question 47.
Give any one principle of the Sufis?
Answer: Sufis believed in one God.

Question 48.
Who were Ulemas?
Answer:
They were the religious leaders of the Muslims.

Question 49.
What is meant by Jaziya?
Answer:
It was a religious tax collected from Non-Muslims.

Question 50.
Give any one principle of Bhakti Movement.
Answer:
Bhaktas believed in one God.

Question 51.
Who was the founder of Bhakti Movement in Punjab?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 52.
Bring out the main point of difference between the teachings of Bhaktas and those of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji did not believe in incarnation, while the Bhaktas fully believed in it.

Fill in the blanks:

1. The political situation of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was quite ………………
Answer:
deplorable

2. Bahlol Lodhi founded Lodhi dynasty in …………………
Answer:
1451 A.D.

3. In 1469 A.D. at- the time of Guru Nanak Ji’s birth, ………………. was the king of Delhi.
Answer:
Bahlol Lodhi

4. Ibrahim Lodhi succeeded to the throne of Delhi in ………………..
Answer:
1517 A.D.

5. Daulat Khan Lodhi was appointed the Governor of the Punjab in …………….
Answer:
1500 A.D.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

6. From 1519 A.D. to 1526 A.D., a ………………. struggle started for power in Punjab.
Answer:
triangular

7. In 1504 A.D. Babar became the ruler of ………………..
Answer:
Kabul

8. Babar invaded Punjab ………………….. times between 1519 A.D. to 1526 A.D.
Answer:
five

9. Babar invaded Punjab in ………….. for the first time.
Answer:
1519 A.D.

10. Babar imprisoned Guru Nank Dev Ji during …………….. invasion.
Answer:
Skidpur

11. The first battle of Panipat was fought on ………………….
Answer:
April 21, 1526 A.D.

12. In the beginning of the 16th century Muslim society of Punjab was divided into …………….. classes.
Answer:
three

13. Main centres of Islamic education in Punjab were ………………. and …………………
Answer:
Lahore, Multan

14. In the beginning of 16th century, the ………………. occupied top most position in the Hindu Society.
Answer:
Brahmans

15. The condition of women in Punjab was ………………… in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
deplorable

16. Most of the Hindus were ……………….. in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
vegetarian

17. In the beginning of the 16th century, ………………. was the main occupation of the people of Punjab.
Answer:
agriculture

18. The ……………… industry was the most famous industry of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
Textile

19. …………… and ………………… were the two important woollen centres of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
Amritsar, Kashmir

20. ……………….. and ……………. were two famous trade centres of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
Lahore, Multan

21. Yogi sect was founded by …………………..
Answer:
Gorakh Nath

22. ……………….. was the founder of Bhakti Movement.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji

23. Islam was founded by …………………
Answer:
Prophet Mohammad

24. The most famous Chishti leader in Punjab was …………………….
Answer:
Shaikh Farid Ji

True Or False:

1. The political situation of the Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was quite good.
Answer:
False

2. Sikandar Lodhi founded the Lodhi dynasty.
Answer:
False

3. In 1457 A.D. BahloL Lodhi sat on the throne.
Answer:
True

4. Sikandar Lodhi succeeded to the throne in 1489 A.D.
Answer:
True

5. Ibrahim Lodhi was the new ruler in 1517 A.D.
Answer:
True

6. Daulat Khan LOdhi was appointed as Governor of the Punjab in 1469 A.D.
Answer:
False

7. Babar was born in 1494 A.D.
Answer:
False

8. Babar occupied Kabul in 1504 A.D.
Answer:
True

9. Babar invaded India in 1519 A.D. for the first time.
Answer:
True

10. Babar attacked Saidpur in 1526 A.D.
Answer:
False
11. Guru Nanak Dev Ji compared the ‘Babar’s invasion on Saidpur to ‘Bridal procession of Sins’
Answer:
True

12. The first battle of Panipat was fought between Babar and Ibrahim Lodhi in 1526 A.D.
Answer:
True

13. The Muslim society of Punjab in the beginning of the sixteenth century was divided into two groups.
Answer:
False

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

14. Lower class of Muslim society consisted mainly of the peasants.
Answer:
False

15. The women in the Muslim society were highly respected in the beginning of the sixteenth century.
Answer:
False

16. Lahore and Multan were the well known centres of the education for Muslims in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
True

17. The Brahmans occupied the top most position in the Hindu society in the beginning of £he 16th century.
Answer:
True

18. The main Occupation of the Kshatriyas was agriculture in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
False

19. The position of women in Hindu society was very pitiable in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
True

20. In the beginning of thel6th century, animal rearing was the main occupation of the people of Punjab.
Answer:
False

21. In the beginning of thel6th century, wheat was richly harvested in Punjab.
Answer:
True

22. The textile industry was the most famous industry of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century.
Answer:
True

23. Kashmir was the famous centre of woollen shawls in the 16th century.
Answer:
True

24. Nath Panthi sect of Yogis was founded by Gorakh Nath.
Answer:
True

25. Islam was founded by Prophet Mohammad.
Answer:
True

26. Chisti Silsila was founded by Shaikh Muinuddin Chisti.
Answer:
True

27. Shaikh Farid Ji was the prominent preacher of Chisti Silsila in Punjab.
Answer:
True

28. Shaikh Baha-ud-din laid the foundation of Suharawardi Silsila.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Who founded Lodhi dynasty?
(a) Bahlol Lodhi
(b) Daulat Khan Lodhi
(c) Sikandar Lodhi
(d) Ibrahim Lodhi.
Answer:
(a) Bahlol Lodhi

2. When did Bahlol Lodhi succeed the throne of Delhi?
(a) In 1437 A.D.
(b) In 1451 A.D.
(c) In 1489 A.D.
(d) In 1577 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1451 A.D.

3. When did Ibrahim Lodhi succeed the throne of Delhi? ,
(a) In 1489 A.D.
(b) In 1516 A.D.
(c) In 1517 A.D.
(d) In 1526 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1517 A.D.

4. Who was Daulat Khan Lodhi?
(a) Governor of Punjab
(b) Governor of Delhi
(c) Governor of Awadh
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Governor of Punjab

5. When was Daulat Khan Lodhi appointed as Governor of Punjab?
(a) In 1489 A.D.
(b) In 1500 A.D.
(c) In 1517 A.D.
(d) In 1526 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1500 A.D.

6. Who was not included in the triangular struggle of Punjab?
(a) Babar
(b) Daulat Khan Lodhi
(c) Ibrahim Lodhi
(d) Alam Khan Lodhi.
Answer:
(d) Alam Khan Lodhi.

7. When did Babar first invade Punjab?
(a) In 1509 A.D.
(b) In 1519 A.D.
(c) In 1520 A.D.
(d) In 1524 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1519 A.D.

8. When did Babar invade Saidpur?
(a) In 1519 A.D.
(b) In 1520 A.D.
(c) In 1524 A.D.
(d) In 1526 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1520 A.D.

9. Which Guru was imprisoned by Babar during Saidpur invasion?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Amar Das Ji
(c) Guru Hargobind Ji
(d) Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji.
Answer:
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji

10. When was the first battle of Panipat fought between Ibrahim Lodhi and Babar?
(a) In 1519 A.D.
(b) In 1525 A.D.
(c) In 1526 A.D.
(d) In 1526 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1526 A.D.

11. Who was defeated in the first battle of Panipat?
(a) Babar
(b) Maharana Partap
(c) Ibrahim Lodhi
(d) Daulat Khan Lodhi.
Answer:
(c) Ibrahim Lodhi

12. Into how many classes, the Muslim society was divided in the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Two
(b) Three
(c) Four
(d) Five
Answer:
(b) Three

13. Who were not included in upper class of Muslim society in the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Maliks
(b) Shaikhs
(c) Iqtadars
(d) Traders
Answer:
(d) Traders

14. Who belonged to middle class of Muslim society in the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Traders
(b) Soldiers
(c) Farmers
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

15. Who among the following did not belong to lower class of Muslim society?
(a) Qazi
(b) Servants
(c) Slaves
(d) Labourers.
Answer:
(a) Qazi

16. Name the main Islamic education centre in the Punjab in the 16th century.
(a) Sirhind
(b) Jalandhar
(c) Peshawar
(d) Lahore
Answer:
(d) Lahore

17. Name the main occupation of the people of Punjab in the beginning of 16th century.
(a) Trade
(b) Agriculture
(c) Industry
(d) Animal-rearing.
Answer:
(b) Agriculture

18. Which were the main crops raised in Punjab during the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Wheat
(b) Rice
(c) Sugarcane
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

19. Which was the important industry of Punjab in the 16th century?
(a) Leather industry
(b) Textile industry
(c) Armaments industry
(d) Ivory industry.
Answer:
(b) Textile industry

20. Which city was not important woollen centre of Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Jalandhar
(b) Amritsar
(c) Kashmir
(d) Kangra
Answer:
(a) Jalandhar

21. Name the most important Trade centre of the Punjab in the 16th century.
(a) Lahore
(b) Ludhiana
(c) Jalandhar
(d) Amritsar
Answer:
(a) Lahore

22. Which was the main religion in Punjab in the beginning of the 16th century?
(a) Islam
(b) Hinduism
(c) Christianity
(d) Sikhism
Answer:
(b) Hinduism

23. Who founded the Yogis sect Nathpanthi?
(a) Gorakhanath
(b) Shivanath
(c) Mahatma Buddha
(d) Swami Mahavira.
Answer:
(a) Gorakhanath

24. How many avataras of Vishnu are mentioned in Puranas?
(a) 5
(b) 10
(c) 24
(d) 25
Answer:
(c) 24

25. Which of the following sect is not related with Hinduism in the early 16th century?
(a) Shaivism
(b) vaishmavism
(c) Shaktism
(d) Sufism
Answer:
(d) Sufism

26. Who was the founder of Islam?
(a) Abu Bakr
(b) Umar
(c) Prophet Mohammad Sahib
(d) Ali
Answer:
(c) Prophet Mohammad Sahib

27. When was Islam founded?
(a) In 5th century
(b) In sixth century
(c) In 7th century
(d) In eigth century
Answer:
(c) In 7th century

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 3 Political, Social and Economic Conditions of the Punjab in the beginning of the 16th Century

28. Who was the first Khalifa of Islam?
(a) Ali
(b) Abu Bakr
(c) Umar
(d) Usman.
Answer:
(b) Abu Bakr

29. Sufi mode of idealogy is known as
(a) Pir
(b) Dargah
(c) Tasawaf
(d) Silsila.
Answer:
(c) Tasawaf

30. Who was the founder of Chisti Silsila?
(a) Shaikh Muinuddin Chisti
(b) Shaikh Bahuddin Zakaria
(c) Shaikh Farid Ji
(d) Shaikh Nizamuddin Auliya
Answer:
(a) Shaikh Muinuddin Chisti

31. Who was the famous Chisti saint of Punjab?
(a) Sheikh Nizamuddin Auliya
(b) Sheikh Farid
(c) Shaikh Qutabuddin Bekhtiyar
(d) Khawaja Muinuddin Chisti.
Answer:
(b) Sheikh Farid

32. Where was the main centre of Suharawadi Silsila in Punjab?
(a) Multan
(b) Lahore
(c) Jalandhar
(d) Amritsar.
Answer:
(a) Multan

33. Who started the tradition of Qawalis?
(a) Islam
(b) Sufis
(c) Hindus
(d) Sikhs
Answer:
(b) Sufis

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class History Book Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 History Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
What five problems are faced by historians in understanding the history of Punjab?
Or
What are the main problems regarding the historical sources of Punjab?
Or
What five difficulties do we face regarding the historical sources of Punjab?
Or
What problems are faced by the students in composing the history of Punjab?
Answer:
Writing the history of Punjab the historians confront numerous problems in writing the history of Punjab. These problems are briefly described below :

1. Sikhs did not find time to write their own History: Punjab became an arena of wars in the 18th century. Anarchy was the order of the day. The Sikhs were fighting for their existence. They had to flee to the mountains and jungles leaving their homes. As a result, they could hardly find time to pen down their history.

2. Biased views of Muslim Historians: Most of the sources available to understand the history of Punjab are written in Persian by Muslim historians were: They were staunch Muslims. They considered the Sikhs their inveterate enemies. They willfully distorted the facts of Sikh history in a malicious manner. Therefore, their writings cannot be trusted.

3. Destruction of Historical Sources: Till the seventh decade of the 18th century, there was no peace, and anarchy prevailed in Punjab. The invasion of Na*dir Shah in 1739 A.D..aad subsequently eight invasions of Ahmad Shah Abdali from 1747 to 1767 A.D. ruined the Punjab. How could the Sikhs preserve their sacred documents when even the lives of their families were at risk? A large number of their holy writings were lost.

4. Punjab, a part of Mughal Empire: Till 1752 A.D. Punjab formed a part of the Mughal empire. As a result, no history could be written apart from the history of India. The contemporary writers wrote largely on the Mughal emperors, but just not write about the political, social, religious, and economic conditions of Punjab. Therefore, a detailed account of the history of Punjab is not available from the works of contemporary historians.

5. Untapped Historical Sources: Many deeds of covenants, deeds of the grant, personal letters, Bhat Vahid, and religious documents of Sikh Misls and Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s times are still remained locked in the boxes of many Sikh families and feudal lords. These sources still remain unexplored.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 2.
Write a short note on Hukamnamas.
Answer:
Hukamnamas were the orders of the Sikh Gurus or of their family members which were issued to the Sikh Sangat or individuals from time to time. In most of these Hukamnamas, they were asked to bring rations for the community kitchen, money for the construction of religious places, horses and arms to be used in battles. In all 89 Hukamnamas have been compiled so far by Dr. Ganda Singh. Of these 34 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Gobind Singh and 23 by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. The other Hukamnamas belong to Guru Arjan Dev, Guru Hargobind Sahib, Guru Har Rai, Guru Harkrishan, Mata Gujri, Mata Sundri, Mata Sahib Devan, Baba Gurditta Ji and Banda Bahadur. The Sikhs obeyed these Hukamnamas as orders from God. From these Hukamnamas we learn about the political, religious, literary, and economic history of the Punjab of the period of Sikh Gurus.

Question 3.
Mention briefly any five important historical sources related to the religious literature of the Sikhs.
Or
Give a brief account of five important sources based on religious literature of Punjab History.
Answer:
Religious literature of the Sikhs contributes much to the writing of the history of Punjab.

1. The Adi Granth Sahib Ji: The Adi Granth Sahib Ji is the most sacred and authentic scripture of Sikhism. Guru Arjan Dev Ji compiled this great holy scripture in 1604 A.D. In it, the hymns of the first five Sikh Gurus and those of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji, the ninth Guru of the Sikhs, are compiled. In addition to it, the hymns of many Hindu Bhagats, Muslim Sufi Saints, Bhats, etc. were also included. Adi Granth Sahib Ji gives us the most valuable information regarding the political, religious, social, and economic life of the people of those days.

2. Dasam Granth Sahib Ji: Dasam Granth Sahib Ji is another holy scripture of Sikhism. It is a compilation of the writings of Guru Gobind Singh Ji and his court poets. This holy scripture was compiled by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in 1721 A.D. ‘Bachitar Natak’ and ‘Zafarnama’ are the most significant from the historical point of view.

3. Vars of Bhai Gurdas Ji: Bhai Gurdas Ji was the son of Bhai Datar Chand Bhalla, a brother of Guru Amar Das Ji. He was a contemporary of Guru Arjan Dev Ji and Guru Hargobind Ji. He composed 39 Vars. These Vars are considered the key to understanding Guru Granth Sahib Ji. Vars No. 1 and 11 are considered important from the historical point of view. The first Var contains a very detailed description of the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. In the eleventh Var, we get information of the important Sikhs and places connected with the first six Gurus.

4. Janam Sakhis: The stories relating to the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called Janam Sakhis. Many such Janam Sakhis were written in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. They were written in the Punjabi language. Janam Sakhis of Puratan Janam Sakhis, Janam Sakhis of Meherban, Janam Sakhi of Bhai Bala Ji and Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh Ji were the most important Sakhis.

5. Hukamnamas: Hukamnamas were those orders or proclamations that were issued by the Sikh Gurus or by the members of their families to the Sikhs from time to time. In the majority of such Hukamnamas, demands were made to supply grains for the Langar (common kitchen), to donate money for building religious places, and to bring horses and arms for battles.

Question 4.
What is meant by Janam Sakhis? Explain briefly the four Janam Sakhis.
Or
What are the Janam Sakhis? Discuss the importance of different Janam Sakhis?
Answer:
The stories relating to the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called Janam Sakhis.
1. Puratan Janam Sakhi: This Janam Sakhi-was edited by Bhai Vir Singh in 1926 A.D. It is considered more reliable than other Janam Sakhis.

2. Janam Sakhi of Meharban: Meharban was the son of Prithi Chand, the elder brother of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. He was a great scholar. As he himself belonged to the Guru family, he gave a very detailed description of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It is considered more reliable.

3. Janam Sakhi of Bhai Bala : This Janam Sakhi was written by Bhai Bala Ji. Many events denoted in this Janam Sakhi are imaginary and many others are historically incorrect. Thus this Janam Sakhi is regarded as the least authentic.

4. Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh: This Janam Sakhi, popularly known as ‘Gyan Ratnavali’, was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji. This Janam Sakhi is very reliable due to many reasons. It contains no imaginary events. Thirdly, all events are recorded in a chronological manner.

Question 5.
What do you know about Vars of Bhai Gurdas Ji?
Or
Write a note on Bhai Gurdas Ji Bhalla.
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji Bhalla (1551—1635 A.D.) was the son of Datar Chand Bhalla, the brother of Guru Amar Das. He was contemporary of third, fourth, fifth, and sixth Sikh Gurus. He was a top-class writer. He composed 39 Vars. These vars are written in Punjabi. In order to understand Guru Granth Sahib, the study of these Vars is very essential. That is why they are called a key to Guru Granth Sahib. We get useful information about the first six Gurus’ lives, teachings of Sikh religion, names of cities, and the lives of Saints and Bhaktas from these Vars. The first and eleventh Vars are considered important from the historical point of view. In the first Var, light is thrown on the Sikh history from first to 6th Guru. The eleventh Var gives information about the names of Sikhs related to the Gurus and their activities.

Question 6.
Write a note on the special features of Adi Granth Sahib.
Or
Give a brief description of Adi Granth Sahib and its historical importance.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji used various sources for writing the Bani. The Bani of the first three Gurus—Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji, and Guru Amar Das Ji were with the eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji i.e. Baba Mohan Ji. To compile the Bani, Guru Arjan Dev Ji first sent Bhai Gurdas Ji and then Baba Buddha Ji to Baba Mohan Ji but they were not successful in their objective. After this, Guru Sahib himself went from Amritsar to Goindwal Sahib barefooted. Impressed by the humility of Guru Ji, Baba Mohan Ji gave away the entire Bani to Guru Ji. Guru Arjan Dev Ji already had the Bani of Guru Ram Das Ji with him.

Guru Sahib included his own Bani in it. After this Guru Sahib called upon the devotees of Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints and asked them to recite the hymns of their saints correctly. The hymns of only those Bhagats and Saints were included in the Guru Granth Sahib which was similar to the Bani of the Gurus. The works of Kahna, Chhajju, Shah Hussain, and Pilu were rejected. The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji in 1604 A.D. is a great landmark In the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political, and economic life of the 16th and 17th centuries.

Question 7.
Write a short note on Dasam Granth Sahib.
Or
What do you know about Dasam Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Dasam Granth Sahib is another holy scripture of the Sikhs. It is an anthology of the works of Guru Gobind Singh and his court poets. Bhai Mani Singh compiled Dasam Granth in 1721 A.D. The Dasam Granth Sahib was primarily compiled to awaken heroic sentiments among the Sikhs so as to enable them to fight against political injustice and religious intolerance. It is a collection of 18 works. Jaap Sahib, Akal Ustat, Chandi di Var, Chaubis Avtar, Shabad Hazare, Shastar Nama, Bachitar Natak, and Zafarnama are worthy of special mention. Bachelor Natak is Guru Gobind Singh’s autobiography.

It is a useful source giving us information about the ancient history of Bedi and Sodhi castes, the martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur, and the battles of Guru Gobind Singh against the Hill Chiefs and the Mughals. Guru Gobind Singh wrote the Zafarnama at Dina. It is a letter of Victory which Guru Gobind Singh addressed to Aurangzeb in Persian. In this letter, the Guru has daringly and fearlessly described the tyranny of Aurangzeb. It also refers to the treachery of his generals and the breaking of oaths taken on the Quran. Dasam Granth Sahib is, thus, an important source of the life and work of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 8.
Give a brief account of five historical sources written in 18th century in Punjabi.
1. Sri Gursobha: Sri Gursobha was written by Sainapat, a famous court poet of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1741 A.D. He has given an eye-witness account of the events that took place from 1699 A.D. to 1708 A.D. about its historical value.

2. Sikhan Di Bhagat Mala : This work was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in the eighteenth century. It is also known as ‘Bhagat Ratnavali’. It provides valuable information about the lives of the Gurus, names of the prominent Sikhs, their castes and places of residence along with the social conditions of the time.

3. Bansavali Nama : It was written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar in 1780 A.D. It covers the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the middle of the eighteenth century. It is more reliable as far as later history is concerned than that of the Guru’s period because the writer gives an eye-witness account of many such events.

4. Mehma Prakash: In fact, it comprises two books:

  • Mehma Pvakash Vartik was written by Bawa Kirpal Singh in 1741 A.D. It describes the lives of the Sikh Gurus in brief.
  • Mehma Prakash Kavita was written by Sarup Das Bhalla in 1776 A.D. It describes the lives of Sikh Gurus in detail.

5. Prachin Panth Prakash: It was written by Rattan Singh Bhangu in 1841 A.D. It provides very important information regarding the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the eighteenth century.

Question 9.
Give a brief account of five important Persian sources of the history of Punjab.
Or
Give a brief mention of five important Persian sources which are essential for composing the History of Punjab.
Answer:
1. Ain-i-Akbari is written by Abul Fazl, a famous historian and courtier of Akbar. It is the main source of information regarding Akbar’s relations with the Sikh Gurus. Besides, this source, tells us about the political, religious, social, and economic conditions of Punjab.

2. Tuzak-i-Jahangiri is the autobiography of the Mughal emperor Jahangir. We get valuable information about the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji from it. By reading it, it becomes clear that Guru Ji was martyred for religious reasons.

3. Jang Nama is written by Qazi Nur Muhammad. He accompanied Ahmad Shah Abdali during the latter’s invasion of Punjab in 1764 A.D. In this work, he gave an eyewitness account of the warfare of the Sikhs and their character.

4. Umdat-ut-Tawarikh’s writer was Sohan Lai Suri, a courtier of Maharaja Ranjit Singh. In it, he has written the history of Punjab from 1469 A.D. to 1849 A.D. It is a very trustworthy source about Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s period.

5. Zafar-Nama-i-Ranjit Singh. It is an important source related to the period of Maharaja Ranjit Singh. It was written by Diwan Amar Nath. This work describes the eye-witness account of events of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s reign up to 1837 A.D.

Question 10.
Mention five important English sources which give information about the history of Punjab.
Answer:
1. The Court and Camp of Ranjit Singh: Capt. William Osborne wrote this book in 1840 A.D. He has given a detailed account of the grandeur of Maharaja’s court, his courtiers, and his military administration. His book is a very useful source from a historical point of view.

2. History of Punjab: Murray wrote this book in 1842 A.D. It has two parts. The history of the Sikhs has been written in detail in these parts. It is a significant source regarding Maharaja Ranjit Singh and his successors.

3. History of the Sikhs: Dr. Me Gregor wrote this book. It was written in 1846 A.D. and it has two parts. It provides useful information about the battles of Maharaja Ranjit Singh and the Sikhs against the English.

4. Punjab: This book was written in 1846 A.D. by Steinbach. He occupied a high post in the army of Maharaja Ranjit Singh. Therefore, he has mentioned very important details about the army of the Maharaja in this book.

5. Sketch of the Sikhs: It was written in 1812 A.D. by Malcolm, a Colonel in the British army. He came to Punjab after Holkar IP 1805 A.D. He wrote very briefly about the history of the Sikhs and their institutions.

Question 11.
Write a short note on the historical importance of Records of the British Indian Government.
Or
Throw light on four important sources of information on Punjab History written in English.
Answer:
The records of the British Indian government provide the most important information regarding Sikh History from the beginning of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s reign from 1799 A.D. to the downfall of the Sikh Empire in 1849 A.D. The records of Delhi Residency and Ludhiana Residency are significant in particular for the history of Punjab. Among these, the records of Murrey, Ochterloney, Richmond, Me Gregor, Nicholson, Cunningham, Princep, and Broadfoot are of great historical value. These records are stored in the National Archives Department Delhi. These records throw valuable light on Anglo-Sikh relations, about the Kingdom of Ranjit Singh and his reign and the relations of the English with Afghanistan and Sind. Besides the letters written by Governor Generals to the British Government, to their friends and family members also provide valuable information regarding the important events of Punjab. Though these records are biasedly written, yet they constitute an important source of the History of Punjab.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 12.
Examine the importance of coins in the construction of the History of Punjab.
Answer:
The coins are of special importance in the construction of the history of Punjab. We find the coins of Mughals, Banda Singh Bahadur, Jassa Singh Ahluwalia, Ahmad Shah Abdali and Maharaja Ranjit Singh. These coins throw valuable light on the dates and other important facts about the different rulers. The coins of Banda Bahadur prove that he had great respect for Guru Nanak Dev Ji and Guru Gobind Singh Ji. The coins of Jassa Singh Ahluwalia tell us that he had occupied the territory of Ahmad Shah Abdali. The coins of Maharaja Ranjit Singh throw light on the fact that he was a very kind-hearted king and he was a great follower of Sikhism. As the facts provided by these coins are very trustworthy, so they help a lot in solving many problems related to the history of Punjab.

1. Difficulties Regarding the History of Punjab: The Janam Sakhis related to the Sikh Gurus have several inconsistencies in them—The Muslim writers who were fanatics and biased have distorted the facts of history—The Sikhs did not have any time for writing their own history during this period of anarchy—Moreover, whatever meager historical books had already been written were destroyed during the foreign invasions—Several historical sources were also destroyed during the partition of Punjab in 1947 A.D.

2. Kinds of Sources: The main sources related to the history of Punjab are as follows :

→ Religious literature of the Sikhs: The Adi Granth Sahib gives us the most authentic information of this period. It wags compiled by Guru Arjan Dev Ji in 1604 A.D.The Dasam Granth Sahib is a compilation of the works of the tenth Guru, Guru Gobind Singh Ji, and the poets of his court, of these, the ‘Bachitar Natak’ and ‘Zafarnama’ are historically the most important.The 39 Vars written by Bhai Gurdas Ji give us important information about the lives of the first six Gurus and the famous pilgrimages. Among the Janam Sakhis based on the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, the most important are Puratan Janam Sakhi, Meharban’s Janam Sakhi, Janam Sakhi of Bhai Bala, and Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh Ji.The Hukamnamas issued by the Sikh Gurus provide us with very valuable information about contemporary society Of these 34 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Gobind Singh Ji and 23 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji.

→ Historical and Semi-Historical works in Punjabi and Hindi: ‘Sri Gursobha’ gives us an eye-witness account of the events that took place from 1699 to 1708 A.D. Gursobha was written by Sainapat a famous court poet of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1741 A.D. Sikhan Di Bhagatmala provides valuable information about the social condition of the periods of the Gurus. It was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji ‘Bansavali Nama’ written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar describes the incidents from the Guru period to the middle of the 18th century  ‘Gurpratap Suraj Granth’ written by Bhai Santokh Singh and ‘Prachin Panth Prakash’ written by Rattan Singh Bhangu has an important position in the construction of the history of Punjab.

3. Historical works in Persian: ‘Babarnama’ written by the Mughal emperor Babar gives us historical information about Punjab at the beginning of the 16th century.‘Ain-i-Akbari’ and ‘Akbarnama’ written by Abul Fazl gives us information about the relations of Akbar with the Sikh Gurus‘Dabistan-i- Mazahib’ written by Mubid Zulfiqar Ardistani gives us valuable information pertaining to the Sikh Gurus‘Khulasat-ut-Tawarikh’ written by Sujan Rai Bhandari, ‘Muntakhib-ut-Lubab’ written by Khafi Khan and ‘Jang Nama’ written by Qazi Nur Muhammad gives us information about the Punjab of the 18th century‘Umdat-ut-Tawarikh’ written by Sohan Lai Suri and ‘Char-Bagh-i- Punjab’ written by Ganesh Das Wadhera give us a detailed account of the incidents related to the reign of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.

4. Bhat Vahis: The Bhats used to write down all the important events with dates in their Vahis These give us useful information about the lives of the Sikh Gurus, their travels and battles.

5. Khalsa Darbar Records: These are the official records of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s time They were written in Persian and their number is more than 1 lakh—The Khalsa Darbar Records give useful information on the life and times of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.

6. Writings of Foreign Travellers and Europeans: The writings of foreign travelers and Europeans contribute greatly to the construction of the history of Punjab—Prominent among them are ‘A Journey from Bengal to England’ by George Forster, ‘Sketch of the Sikhs’ by Malcolm, ‘Origin of Sikh Power in the Punjab’ by H.T. Princep, ‘The Court and Camp of Ranjit SingJT by Captain William Osborne, ‘The Punjab’ by Steinbach, ‘History of the Sikhs’ by J.D. Cunningham.

7. Historical Buildings, Paintings, and Coins: The historical buildings, paintings, and coins of Punjab are also a very valuable source for tracing out the history of Punjab. The architecture of Khadur Sahib, Goindwal Sahib, Amritsar, Tarn Taran, Kartarpur, and Paonta Sahib, various forts, paintings in the Gurdwaras, and coins of Sikh leaders also throw ample light on the contemporary society.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Essay Type Questions:

Difficulties Regarding The History Of Punjab:

Question 1.
Explain the difficulties of the historians while constructing the history of Punjab.
Or
Or
Which difficulties are being faced by historians while composing the History of Punjab?
Answer:
Writing the history of Punjab has always remained a serious challenge for historians were: The historian confronts numerous problems in writing the history of Punjab. These problems are briefly described below :

1. Sikhs did not find time to write their own History: Punjab became an arena of wars in the 18th century. Anarchy was the order of the day. The Sikhs were fighting for their existence. They had to flee to the mountains and jungles leaving their homes. The government had put a price on their heads. The royal forces were always at their heels to hunt them. It was a time for the Sikhs to hold a sword rather than a pen in their hands. As a result, they could hardly find time to pen down their history.

2. Biased views of Muslim Historians: Most of the sources available to understand the history of Punjab are written in Persian by Muslim historians were: They were staunch Muslims. They considered the Sikhs their inveterate enemies. They willfully distorted the facts of Sikh history in a malicious manner. They described the Sikhs as brigands, dacoits, ruffians, and butchers. They described the teachings of the Sikh Gurus as anti-Islam. Therefore, their writings cannot be trusted.

3. Destruction of Historical Sources: Till the seventh decade of the 18th century, there was no peace, and anarchy prevailed in Punjab. Firstly, the Mughals and then the Afghans left no stone unturned to crush the Sikhs. The invasion of Nadir Shah in 1739 A.D. and subsequently eight invasions of Ahmad Shah Abdali from 1747 to 1767 A.D. ruined the Punjab. How could the Sikhs preserve their sacred documents when even the lives of their families were at risk? A large number of their holy writings were lost. Thus, the Sikhs were deprived of their numerous invaluable works.

4. Punjab, a part of Mughal Empire: Till 1752 A.D. Punjab formed a, part of the Mughal empire. As a result, no history could be written apart from the history of India. The contemporary writers wrote largely on the Mughal emperors but just wrote about the political, social, religious, and economic conditions of Punjab. Therefore, a detailed account of the history of Punjab is not available from the works of contemporary historians.

5. Partition of Punjab: With the partition of India in 1947 A.D., Punjab too was bifurcated. As a sequel to it, Lahore, the capital of Punjab, the Punjab University, many historical buildings, and valuable books were left in Pakistan. Many historical sources were destroyed due to riots caused by partition vandalization. So, we had to remain deprived of many historical sources which could have proved extremely useful in the construction of the history of Punjab.

Main Sources of the History of the Punjab:

Question 2.
Describe briefly the important sources of Punjab.
Or
Describe the main sources of Punjab History.
Or
Examine the sources of the History of Punjab from 1469 to 1849 A.D.
Answer:
Many types of sources of the history of Punjab from 1469 to 1849 A.D. are available. These sources can be categorized into main two parts :

  1. Literary sources and
  2. Archaeological sources.

1. Literary Sources :
These sources consist of:

  • Religious literature of the Sikhs.
  • Historical and Semi-historical works written in Punjabi and Hindi.
  • Historical works were written in Persian.
  • Bhat Vahid.
  • Khalsa Darbar Records.
  • Writings of Foreign Travellers and Europeans.

2. Archaeological Sources:
These sources consist of :

  • Buildings and Monuments.
  • Coins and Pantings.

1. Literary Sources:

1. Religious Literature of the Sikhs: Religious literature of the Sikhs played an important. role in the making of the history of Punjab. Adi Granth Sahib Ji occupies the chief place among these sources. These. days it is called Guru Granth Sahib Ji. It was compiled by Guru Arjan Dev Ji in 1604 A.D. It reveals the priceless information on political, religious, social, and economic conditions of the Punjab of that time. The Dasam Granth Sahib Ji edited by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in 1721 A.D. holds second place. It is a compilation of the writings of Guru Gobind Singh Ji and his court poets. It consists of a total of 18 compositions. Bachelor Natak and Zafarnama are the most significant from the historical point of view. These books contain information about the life of Guru Gobin.d Singh Ji and relation between Mughals and Sikhs. Then come 39 Vars written by Bhai Gurdas Ji. These contain precious information about the lives of Sikh Gurus. Besides, Janam Sakhis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and Hukamnamas of Sikh Gurus provide valuable information about the history of Punjab.

2. Historial and Semi-Historial Sikh Literature: Sri Gursobha compiled by Sainapat plays a significant role in writing the history of Punjab. It gives eye witness account of the events that took place from 1699 to 1708 A.D. Besides, Sikhan Di Bhagat Mala written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji, Bansavali Nama written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar, Mehma Prakash Vartik written by Bawa Kirpal Singh, and Prachin Panth Prakash written by Rattan Singh Bhangu throw ample light on the history of Punjab.

3. Historical works were written in Persian: Persian compositions are mainly compiled by Muslims. These works do not contain any history about Punjab or Sikhs, but these have helped in writing the history of Punjab. Babarnama written by Babar, Ain-i-Akbari and Akbarnama written by Abul Fazl, Tuzak-i-Jahangiri written by Jahangir, Umdat-ut-Tawarikh written by Sohan Lai Suri, Twarikh- i-Punjab written by Bute Shah, Zafarnama-i-Ranjit Singh by Diwan Amarnath, and Ibratnama by Ala-ud-din Mufti is worth mentioning.

4. Bhat Vahid: Bhats used to write down important events with dates in their Vahid. These Bhat Vahis have reliable contributions in writing Punjab history. The complete description of many important incidents that happened in the lives of Guru Hargobind Ji to Guru Gobind Singh Ji is mentioned in these Bhat Vahid.

5. Khalsa Darbar Records: Offical records of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s time throw ample light on medieval Punjab. These are written in Persian. These are over one lakh in number. Sita Ram Kohli prepared a catalog of these records.

6. Writings of Foreign Travellers and Europeans: Foreign travelers to Punjab and Europeans have thrown ample light on the history of Punjab in their writings. A Journey from Bengal to England by George Foster, Sketch of Sikhs by Malcolm. Origin of Sikh Power in Punjab by H.T. Princep, The Court, and Camp of Ranjit Singh by Capt. William Osborne, History of Punjab by Murray are some significant works. History of the Sikhs written by J.D. Cunnigham is considered the most reliable and important source. It has details of incidents occurring from 1699 to 1846 A.D.

2. Archaeological Sources:

The historical buildings, monuments, coins, and paintings of Punjab also contribute to writing the history of Punjab. Towns like Khadur Sahib, Goindwal Sahib, Amritsar, Tarn Taran, Kartarpur, Anandpur Sahib, etc. which were founded by Sikh Gurus, are worth mentioning religious cities of Punjab history. Besides the royal palaces and forts built by Sikhs of the 18th century throw light on the architecture of that time. Paintings related to the Sikh Gurus and others have been found which provide us information about the social and religious conditions of that time. Coins issued by different rulers of Punjab, Banda Singh Bahadur, Maharaja Ranjit Singh, Mughal, and Sikh Chiefs reveal historical dates, religious beliefs, and economic conditions of that time. So these coins contribute an important role in writing the history of Punjab.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Religious Literature Of The Sikhs:

Question 3.
Evaluate the Sikh religious literature as a source of Punjab history.
Or
What is the contribution of the Sikh Gurmukhi Literature in the history of Punjab?
Or
Describe the significance of Adi Granth Sahib and Janam Sakhis as sources of Punjab history.
Answer:
Religious literature of the Sikhs contributes much to the writing of the history of Punjab.

1. The Adi Granth Sahib Ji: The Adi Granth Sahib Ji is the most sacred and authentic scripture of Sikhism. Guru Arjan Dev Ji compiled this great holy scripture in 1604 A.D. In it the hymns of the first five Sikh Gurus and those of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji, the ninth Guru of the Sikhs, are compiled. In addition to it, the hymns of many Hindu Bhagats, Muslim Sufi Saints, Bhats, etc. were also included. Although the Adi Granth Sahib Ji or Guru Granth Sahib Ji was not compiled for any historical purpose, yet its thorough study gives us the most valuable information regarding the political, religious, social, and economic life of the people of those days. As this information is the most authentic, the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a valuable source for the history of Punjab. Moreover, Adi Granth Ji is a priceless treasure of Indian spirituality, culture, literature, and languages. Dr. Indu Bhushan Banerjee aptly says, “It may be recalled the Bible of Sikhism and is admitted to be the greatest authority on Sikhism.”

2. Dasam Granth Sahib Ji: Dasam Granth Sahib Ji is another holy scripture of Sikhism. It is a compilation of the writings of Guru Gobind Singh Ji and his court poets. This holy scripture was compiled by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in 1721 A.D. The Dasam Granth Sahib was primarily compiled to awaken heroic sentiments among the Sikhs so as to enable them to fight against political injustice and religious intolerance. It is a work of 18 compositions of which ‘Jaap Sahib’, ‘Akal Ustat’, ‘Chandi Di Var’, ‘Chaubis Avtar’, ‘Shabad Hazare’, ‘Shastra Nama’, ‘Bachitar Natak’ and ‘Zafarnama’ are worth noting. ‘Bachelor Natak and ‘Zafarnama are the most significant from the historical point of view. ‘Bachelor Natak’ is the autobiography of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

It is a very important source of information about the ancient history of the Bedis and the Sodhi’s, martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji, and the battles of Guru Gobind Singh Ji against the Hill Chiefs. ‘Zafarnama’ (letter of victory) was written by Guru Gobind Singh Ji at Dina. It is a letter written by Guru Gobind Singh Ji to the Mughal emperor Aurangzeb in Persian. In this letter, Guru Gobind Singh Ji has described the cruelties of Aurangzeb, the treachery of Mughal commanders, and the breaking of oaths taken on the holy Quran in a very courageous and fearless manner. Dasam Granth Sahib Ji is thus an important source of the life and works of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

3. Vars of Bhai Gurdas Ji: Bhai Gurdas Ji was the son of Bhai Datar Chand Bhalla, a brother of Guru Amar Das Ji. He was a contemporary of Guru Arjan Dev Ji and Guru Hargobind Ji. He composed 39 Vars. These Vars are considered the key to understanding Guru Granth Sahib Ji. Vars No. 1 and 11 are considered important from the historical point of view. The first Var contains a very detailed description of the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Besides, we get a glimpse of Guru Angad Ji, Guru Amar Das Ji, Guru Ram Das Ji, Guru Arjan Dev Ji, and Guru Hargobind Ji’s life from this Var. In the eleventh Var, we get information of the important Sikhs and places connected with the first six Gurus.

4. Janam Sakhis: The stories relating to the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called Janam Sakhis. Many such Janam Sakhis were written in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. They were written in the Punjabi language. They were compiled for the faithful and not for students of history. Though they are a mixture of facts and fiction, yet they provide valuable information about the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. A brief description of the important Janam Sakhis is as follows :

(a) Puratan Janam Sakhi: This Janam Sakhi was edited by Bhai Vir Singh in 1926 A.D. It is prepared by coordinating ‘two Janam Sakhis’—Wilayat Wali Janam Sakhi and Hafizabad Wali Janam Sakhi. This is the oldest Janam Sakhi. It is considered more reliable than other Janam Sakhis.

(b) Janam Sakhi of Meharban: Meharban was the son of Prithi Chand, the elder brother of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. He was a great scholar. As he himself belonged to the Guru family, he had a thorough and authentic knowledge of the stories about Guru Nanak Dev Ji. He gave a very detailed description of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and his stay at Kartarpur. For a long time, this Janam Sakhi was not considered reliable because it was written by the son of Prithi Chand, a sworn opponent of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. However, the latest researches have proved beyond doubt that this Janam Sakhi is very dependable. First, it offers a more satisfactory chronology. Secondly, the names of persons and places mentioned in it are generally correct. Thirdly, there are a few miraculous stories.

(c) Janam Sakhi of Bhai Bala Ji : Bhai Bala Ji was a childhood companion of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. He accompanied Guru Nanak Dev Ji in some of his Udasis. It is said that this Janam Sakhi was written during the times of Guru Angad Dev Ji on the verbal details given by Bhai Bala Ji himself. But .this does not seem correct, as the events mentioned in this Janam Sakhi show, that it was written either in the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji or afterward. Some historians even deny the very existence of Bhai Bala Ji. Many events denoted in this Janam Sakhi are imaginary and many others are historically incorrect. Thus, this Janam Sakhi is regarded as the least authentic.

(d) Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh Ji: This Janam Sakhi, popularly known as ‘Gyan Ratnavali’, was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji, a devotee of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. It was written between 1675 A.D. and 1708 A.D. This Janam Sakhi is very reliable due to many reasons. First, it is written on the basis of the first Var of Bhai Gurdas Ji. Secondly, it contains no imaginary events. Thirdly, all events are recorded in a chronological manner. Fourthly, it avoids many errors of other Janam Sakhis.

5. Hukamnamas: Hukamnamas were those orders or proclamations that were issued by the Sikh Gurus or by the members of their families to the Sikhs from time to time. In the majority of such Hukamnamas, demands were made to supply grains for the Langar (common kitchen), to donate money for building religious places, and to bring horses and arms for battles. 89 Hukamnamas are available up to this day. Of these, 34 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Gobind Singh Ji and 23 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. These Hukamnamas provide very valuable information about the political, religious, economic, and literary history of the period of the great Gurus.

Historical And Semi-Historical Works It Punjabi And Hindi:

Question 4.
How far are Sikh Historical and Semi-Historical literature helpful in giving information about Punjab History?
Answer:
Many historical and semi-historical works were written in Punjabi and Hindi languages in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. These works throw ample light on the history of Punjab. Most prominent among them are mentioned below :

1. Sri Gursobha: Sri Gursobha was written by Sainapat, a famous court poet of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1741 A.D. He has given an eye-witness account of the events that took place from 1699 A.D. to 1708 A.D. about its historical value.

2. Sikhan Di Bhagat Mala: This work was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in the eighteenth century. It is also known as ‘Bhagat Ratnavali’. It provides valuable information about the lives of the Gurus, names of the prominent Sikhs, their castes, and places of residence along with the social conditions of the time.

3. Bansavali Nama: It was written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar in 1780 A.D. It covers the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the middle of the eighteenth century. It is more reliable as far as later history is concerned than that of the Guru’s period because the writer gives an eye-witness account of many such events.

4. Mehma Prakash: In fact, it comprises two” books —(a) Mehma Prakash Vartik (b) Mehma Prakash Kavita. (a) Mehma Prakash Vartik was written by Bawa Kirpal Singh in 1741 A.D. It describes the. lives of the Sikh Gurus, in brief, (b) Mehma Prakash Kavita was written by Sarup Das Bhalla in 1776 A.D. It describes the lives of Sikh Gurus in detail.

5. Gur Partap Suraj Granth: It is a comprehensive work. It was written by Bhai Santokh Singh. It has two parts :

  • Nanak Prakash: It was written in 1823 A.D. It gives a graphic account of the life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji only.
  • Suraj Prakash: It was written in 1843 A.D. It refers to the events that took place from the time of Guru Angad Dev Ji to Banda Singh Bahadur. Although the work is very comprehensive and detailed, it is less useful from a historical point of view.

6. Prachin Panth Prakash: It was written by Rattan Singh Bhangu in 1841 A.D. It provides very important information regarding the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the eighteenth century. The foremost importance of this book lies in the fact that it gives the description of the facts in a systematic manner. Dr. Hari Ram Gupta aptly says,
“This work is the first attempt made by a Sikh to compile a Sikh history and is of supreme importance.”

7. Panth Prakash and Twarikh Guru Khalsa: Both these books were written by Giani Gian Singh. ‘Panth Prakash’ is written in a poetic form whereas ‘Twarikh Guru Khalsa’ is a prose work. Both these books narrate history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji till the end of the Sikh empire (1849 A.D.). From a historical point of view, Twarikh Guru Khalsa is more useful than Panth Prakash.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
What problems are faced by the students in composing the History of Punjab?
Or
Describe any three important problems being faced by the students in composing the history of Punjab.
Answer: We face several problems in respect of sources of the history of Punjab.

  • The sources related to the period of the Gurus are quite insufficient
  • The Muslim writers have deliberately not presented the Sikh history correctly.
  • Several books of Sikh history were destroyed in the 18th century during the invasions of Nadir Shah and Ahmad Shah Abdali.
  • Many sources of Punjab history are still lying without scrutiny.

Question 2.
Write a short note on Hukamnamas.
Answer:
Hukamnamas were the orders of the Sikh Gurus or of their family members. In most of these Hukamnamas, they were asked to bring ration, for ‘ community kitchen, money for the construction of religious places, horses and arms to be used in battles. In all 89 Hukamnamas have been compiled so far by Dr. Ganda Singh. Of these 34 Hukamnamas were issued by Guru Gobind Singh Ji and 23 by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. The Sikhs obeyed these Hukamnamas as orders from God.

Question 3.
Mention briefly any five important historical sources related to the religious literature of the Sikhs.
Answer:

  • In the religious Sikh literature, Adi Granth Sahib occupies the highest place. Guru Arjan Dev Ji compiled it in 1604 A.D. We get valuable information about the political, religious, social, and economic conditions of that time from Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
  • Bhai Mani Singh Ji compiled Dasam Granth Sahib in 1721 A.D. It is a precious source of knowledge about Guru Gobind Singh JI’s life,
  • Bhai Gurdas Ji wrote 39 Vars. These Vars are called the key to understanding Guru Granth Sahib,
  • Gyan Ratnavali written by Bhai Gurdas Ji has presented historical facts in a sequence,
  • Hukamnamas also provide us with knowledge about the Sikh Gurus and the contemporary social structure.

Question 4.
What is meant by Janam Sakhis? Explain briefly the three Janam Sakhis.
Or
What are the Janam Sakhis? Discuss the importance of different Janam Sakhis.
Or
Throw light on any three Janam Sakhis.
Answer:
The stories concerning the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called Janam Sakhis.

  • Bhai Vir Singh edited Puratan Janam Sakhi in 1926 A.D. This is the oldest and the most trustworthy Janam Sakhi.
  • The Janam Sakhi of Meharban was written by Meharban, the son of Prithi Chand. In it, he gave a detailed description of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji.
  • Bhai Balaji’s Janam Sakhi. It is not trustworthy,
  • Bhai Mani Singh Ji’s Janam-Sakhi. It is a very trustworthy source.

Question 5.
Write a short note on Janam Sakhi of Meharban.
Answer:
Meharban was the son of Prithi Chand, the elder brother of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. He gave a very detailed description of the Udasis of Guru Nanak Dev Ji and his stay at Kartarpur. It gives a more satisfactory chronology. Names of persons and places mentioned in it are generally correct. There are a few myths.

Question 6.
What do you know about Vars of Bhai Gurdas Ji?
Or
Write a note on Bhai Gurdas Bhalla.
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Bhalla (1558-1635 A.D.) was the son of Datar Chand Bhalla, the brother of Guru Amar Das Ji. He was contemporary of third, fourth, fifth, and sixth Sikh Gurus. He was a top-class writer. He composed 39 Vars. These Vars are written in Punjabi. We get useful information about the first six Gurus’ lives, teachings of Sikh religion, names of cities, and the lives of Saints and Bhaktas from these Vars. The first and eleventh Vars are considered important from the historical point of view.

Question 7.
Describe the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji as a source of the History of Punjab.
Or
Write a note on Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
Give a brief description of Adi Granth Sahib Ji and its historical importance.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib Ji is considered the supreme, sacred and authentic scripture of the Sikhs. Guru Arjan Dev Ji compiled Adi Granth Sahib Ji in 1604 A.D. The Bani of the first five Sikh Gurus and of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji is included in it. Besides, the Bani (hymns) of many Hindu Bhagats, Sufi Saints, Bhats, etc. are also included in it. We get valuable information about the political, religious, social, and economic life of that time by studying Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

Question 8.
Write a short note on Dasam Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
What do you know about Dasam Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
Dasam Granth Sahib Ji is a compilation of the works of Guru Gobind Singh Ji and his court poets. Bhai Mani Singh Ji compiled Dasam Granth Sahib Ji in 1721 A.D. It is a collection of 18 works. Jaap Sahib, Akal Ustat, Chandi di Var, Chaubis Avtar, Shabad Hazare, Shastarnama, Bachitar Natak, and Zafarnama are worthy of special mention. Bachelor Natak is Guru Gobind Singh Ji’s autobiography. Zafarnama is a letter of victory written by Guru Gobind Singh Ji to Aurangzeb.

Question 9.
What is the importance of Bachittar Natak in the life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji?
Or
Write a short note on Bachittar Natak.
Or
Discuss Bachittar Natak.
Answer:
It is an autobiography of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. It explains the life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. It also explains the creation of this world and History of Bedis and Sodhi’s and the battles of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. In it, the objective of the life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji is also given. It throws light on the martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 10.
Give a brief account of five historical sources written in the 18th century in Punjabi.
Answer:
The five historical sources written in Punjabi in the 18th century are as follows :

  • Sikhan Di Bhagatmala: This work was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in the eighteenth century. It provides valuable information about the lives of the Gurus, names of the prominent Sikhs, their castes, and places of residence.
  • Bansavali Nama: It was written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar in 1780 A.D. It covers the historic middle of the eighteenth century.
  • Mehma Prakash Kavita was written by Sarup Das Bhalla in 1776 A.D. It describes the lives of Sikh Gurus in detail.
  • Prachin Panth Prakash. It was written by Ratna Singh Bhangu in 1841 A.D. It explains the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to mid 18th century.
  • Sri Gursobha. It was written by Sainapat a court poet of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1741 A.D. He explains the events that took place between the period 1699 A.D. to 1708 A.D.

Question 11.
Write a short note on Sri Gursobha.
Answer:
Sri Gursobha was written by the famous court poet Sainapat of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1741 A.D. It has given an eye-witness account of the events from the creation of the Khalsa in 1699 A.D. to the death of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in 1708 A.D. It gives a detailed account of the creation of Khalsa, the battles of the post-Khalsa period, how Zafarnama, was delivered by Bhai Daya Singh Ji, the meeting Guru Gobind Singh Ji with the new Mughal Emperor Bahadur Shah in Agra, and about the death of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 12.
What do you know about the Sikhan Di Bhagatmala?
Answer:
It was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in the 18th century. It is also known as Gyan Ratnavali. It throws light about the lives of the Gurus, names of the prominent Sikhs, their castes, and their places of residence. It also provides valuable information about the social conditions of that time.

Question 13.
Write a short note on Bansavalinama.
Answer:
Bansavalinama was written by Kesar Singh Chhibbar in 1780 A.D. It covers the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the middle of the eighteenth century. This work is divided into 14 chapters. The first 10 chapters are related to the Sikh Gurus. The rest 4 are related to the martyrdom of Sahibzadas, Banda Singh Bahadur, Mata Sundri Ji, and the Khalsa Panth.

Question 14.
Give a brief account of Prachin Panth Prakash.
Answer:
Prachin Panth Prakash was written by Rattan Singh Bhangu in 1841 A.D. It provides very important information regarding the history from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to the eighteenth century. The foremost importance of this book lies in the fact that it is the first history book ever written by a Sikh. Secondly, the description of the facts is systematic and correct.

Question 15.
Give a brief account of important Persian sources of the History of Punjab.
Or
Explain any three important Persian sources which are essential for composing the History of Punjab.
Answer:

  • Ain-i-Akbari. It is the main source of information regarding Akbar’s relations with the Sikh Gurus. It is written by Abul Fazl.
  • Tezak-i-Jahangiri is the autobiography of the Mughal emperor Jahangir. It explains the reasons which led to the martyrdom of Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
  • Qazi Nur Muhammad wrote Jang Nama. He gave an eye-witness account of warfare of the Sikhs and their character,
  • Tarikh-i-Sikhan is written by Khushwat Rai. It describes the history of the Sikhs from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to 1811 A.D.
  • Char-Bagh-i- Punjab is written by Ganesh Das Wadehra about the administration of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.

Question 16.
Write a short note on Char Bagh-i-Punjab.
Answer:
This work was written by Ganesh Das Wadehra in 1855 A.D. He served as a Qanungo under Maharaja Ranjit Singh. The writer has narrated the history of Punjab from the ancient period to 1849 A.D. However, he has described the events relating to the reign of Maharaja Ranjit Singh as an eye-witness account in chronological order. He has taken special care about the authenticity of the facts.

Question 17.
Mention important English sources which give information about the History of Punjab.
Or
Throw light on three important sources of information on Punjab History written in English.
Answer:

  • The Court and Camp of Ranjit Singh: In it Capt. William Osborne has thrown light on the grandeur of Maharaja’s court, his courtiers, and his military administration.
  • History of the Sikhs: In this book, Dr. Mac Gregor provides useful information about the battles of Maharaja Ranjit Singh and the Sikhs against the English.
  • The Punjab: In this book, Steinbach has given very important details about the army of the Maharaja.
  • History of Punjab: Dr. Murray has given an account of the successors of Ranjit Singh.
  • Sketch of the Sikhs : In this book, Malcolm has given a brief account of the Sikhs.

Question 18.
Write a short note on the historical importance of Records of the British Indian Government.
Answer:
The records of the British Indian government provide the most important information regarding the Sikh History from the beginning of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s reign from 1799 A.D. to the downfall of the Sikh Empire in 1849 A.D. These records throw valuable light on Anglo-Sikh relations, about the Kingdom of Ranjit Singh and his reign and “the relations of the English with Afghanistan and Sind.

Question 19.
Examine the importance of coins in the construction Of the History of Punjab.
Answer:
The coins are of special importance in the construction of the history of Punjab. We find the coins of Mughals, Banda Singh Bahadur, Jassa Singh Ahluwalia, Ahmad Shah Abdali and Maharaja Ranjit Singh. These coins throw valuable light on the dates and other important facts about the different rulers. As the facts provided by these coins are very trustworthy, so they help a lot in solving many problems related to the history of Punjab.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Objective Type Questions:

Question 1.
Write anyone difficulty in the creation of the History of Punjab.
Answer:
The Punjabis were not much interested in writing History.

Question 2.
Name any one historical source of Punjab related to the Sikhs.
Or
Name any one source of the History of Punjab which is written in Gurmukhi script.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

Question 3.
When was Adi Granth Sahib Ji compiled?
Answer:
In 1604 A.D.

Question 4.
Which Sikh Guru Sahib had compiled Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 5.
What is the name of the main religious book (Granth Sahib) of the Sikhs?
Or
Which is the most famous Granth of Sikhs?
Or
Name the central scripture of the Sikhs.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib Ji or Guru Granth Sahib Ji.

Question 6. When was Dasam Granth Sahib Ji compiled?
Answer:
In 1721 A.D.

Question 7.
Who compiled Dasam Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 8.
To which Guru is Dasam Granth Sahib related?
Or
Who is associated with Dasam Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 9.
Name any one composition of Guru Gobind Singh Ji included in Dasam Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
Bachelor Natak.

Question 10.
Who composed Bachitar Natak?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 11.
What is Bachitar Natak?
Answer:
Biography of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 12.
What is Zafarnama?
Answer:
Zafarnama is a letter of Guru Gobind Singh Ji written to Aurangzeb.

Question 13.
At which place did Guru Gobind Singh Ji write Zafarnama to Aurangzeb?
Answer:
Dina Kangar.

Question 14.
In which language Zafarnama was written?
Answer:
Persian.

Question 15.
Who was Bhai Gurdas Ji?
Answer:
He was the son of Guru Amar Das Ji’s brother Datar Chand Bhalla.

Question 16.
How many vars were composed by Bhai Gurdas Ji?
Answer:
39.

Question 17.
What is meant by Janam Sakhis?
Answer:
Janam Sakhis mean the episodes related to Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s birth and his life.

Question 18.
Write the name of anyone Janam Sakhi.
Answer:
Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 19.
Which is the most authentic Janam Sakhi?
Answer:
Puratan Janam Sakhi.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 20.
Who wrote Gyan Ratanavali?
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 21.
Who was Bhai Bala Ji?
Answer:
A childhood companion of Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 22.
What are the Hukamnamas?
Or
What is meant by Hukamnamas?
Answer:
Hukamnama means ‘an order’.

Question 23.
How many Hukamnamas issued by Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji have been found?
Answer:
23.

Question 24.
Which Guru Sahib has issued the maximum Hukamnamas found so far?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 25.
How many Hukamnamas of Guru Gobind Singh Ji have been found?
Answer:
34.

Question 26.
How many Hukamnamas have been found so far?
Answer:
89.

Question 27.
Who was Sainapat?
Answer:
A famous poet in the Darbar of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 28.
Who composed the book Sikhan Di Bhagatmala?
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 29.
Who wrote Prachin Panth Parkash?
Answer:
Rattan Singh Bhangu wrote Prachin Panth Parkash.

Question 30.
When did Rattan Singh Bhangu write Panth Prakash?
Answer:
1841 A.D.

Question 31.
Who wrote Gur Partap Suraj Granth?
Answer:
Bhai Santokh Singh Ji.

Question 32.
Who wrote Bansawali Nama?
Answer:
Kesar Singh Chhibbar.

Question 33.
Who was the author of Tuzak-i-Babari?
Answer:
Babar.

Question 34.
Who was the most famous scholar in the court of Akbar?
Answer:
Abul Fazl.

Question 35.
Who wrote Ain-i-Akbari and Akbarnama?
Answer:
Abul Fazl.

Question 36.
Give the name of the autobiography of Jahangir.
Answer:
Tezak-i-Jahangiri.

Question 37.
Name the famous book written by Khafi Khan.
Answer:
Muntkhib-ul-Luba.

Question 38.
Who wrote the book ‘Jang Nama’?
Answer:
Qazi Nur Mohammad.

Question 39.
Name any two famous Persian sources related to the period of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s rule.
Answer:
Umdat-ut-Tawarikh.

Question 40.
Who was the court historian of Maharaja Ranjit Singh?
Or
Who wrote Umdat-ut-Tawarikh?
Answer:
Sohan Lai Suri.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Question 41.
Who wrote Zafar-Nama-i-Ranjit Singh?
Answer:
Diwan Amar Nath.

Question 42.
Who wrote Tawarikh-i-Punjab?
Answer:
Bute Shah.

Question 43.
Who wrote the book ‘Char-Bagh-i-Punjab’?
Answer:
Ganesh Das Wadehra.

Question 44.
Who wrote Tawarikh-i-Sikhan?
Answer:
Khushwaqat Rai.

Question 45.
Who discovered Bhat Vahis?
Answer:
Gyani Garza Singh Ji.

Question 46.
What were Bhat Vahis?
Answer:
The records compiled by Bhats.

Question 47.
Who compiled Khalsa Darbar Records?
Answer:
Sita Ram Kohli.

Question 48.
What information we get from Khalsa Darbar Records?
Answer:
About the life and times of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.

Question 49.
In which language Khalsa Darbar Records were written?
Answer:
Persian language.

Question 50.
Name the famous work of J.D. Cunningham?
Answer:
History of the Sikhs.

Question 51.
Write the name of any one town founded by Sikh Gurus.
Answer:
Amritsar.

Question 52.
By whom were the first Sikh coins issued?
Answer:
Banda Singh Bahadur.

Question 53.
In whose names Banda Singh Bahadur issued his coins?
Answer:
Guru Nanakdev Ji and Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Fill in the blanks:

1. The main source of history concerning the period of Gurus is ………………
Answer:
Janam Sakhis

2. The Adi Granth Sahib was compiled in ……………..
Answer:
1604 A.D.

3. Guru Granth Sahib was compiled by ………………
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji

4. ……………… compiled the Dasam Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji

5. Dasam Granth Sahib is related with ……………..
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji

6. ………………. is the autobiography of Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
Bachitar Natak

7. A letter written by Guru Gobind Singh to Mughal Emperor Aurangzeb is called ………………
Answer:
Zafarnama

8. Bhai Gurdas Ji composed a total of ……………. Vars.
Answer:
39

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

9. The stories relating to the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called ………………
Answer:
Janam Sakhis

10. The Janam Sakhi was written by Bhai mani Singh Ji is known as ……………..
Answer:
Gyan Ratnawali

11. Hukamnamas means ……………..
Answer:
Proclamations

12. Gursobha was written by …………………
Answer:
Sainapat

13. ……………….. was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji.
Answer:
Sikhan Di Bhagatmala

14. ………………. wrote Prachin Panth Prakash.
Answer:
Rattan Singh Bhangu

15. Twarikh Guru Khalsa was written by ………………
Answer:
Giani Gain Singh

16. Guru Partap Suraj Granth was written by ……………….
Answer:
Bhai Santokh Singh

17. Gyan Ratnawali was written by ………………
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji

18. Autobiography of the Mughal Emperor Babar is known as ……………….
Answer:
Tuzak-i-Babari

19. ………………. wrote both Ain-i-Akbari and Akbarnama.
Answer:
Abul Fazl

20. …………… is Jahangir’s autobiography.
Answer:
Tuzak-i-Jahangiri

21. Muntakhib-ul-labab was written by …………….
Answer:
Khafi Khan

22. ……………… was written by Qazi Nur Mohammad.
Answer:
Jang Nama

23. …………… was court historian of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.
Answer:
Sohan Lal Suri

24. Sohan Lai Suri wrote ……………
Answer:
Umdat-ut-Tawarikh

25. Buta Shah wrote …………….
Answer:
Tawarikh-i-Punjab

26. Zafarnama-i-Ranjit Singh was written by ………………….
Answer:
Diwan Amarnath

27. Ganesh Das Wadhera composed ……………..
Answer:
Char-Bagh-i-Punjab

28. ………………….. was the writer of The Court and Camp of Ranjit Singh.
Answer:
William Osborne

29. J.D. Cunningham wrote …………………
Answer:
History of the Sikhs

30. The first Sikh coins were issued by ……………….
Answer:
Banda Singh Bahadur

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

True or False:

1. The Adi Granth Sahib is considered as the most sacred and authentic scripture of Sikhism.
Answer:
True

2. Guru Arjan Sahib compiled, the great holy scripture the Adi Granth Sahib in 1604 A.D.
Answer:
True

3. Dasam Granth Sahib was compiled by Bhai Mani Singh Ji in 1721 A.D.
Answer:
True

4. The autobiography of Guru Gobind Singh Ji is called ‘Zafarnama’.
Answer:
False

5. Bhai Gurdas Ji composed 39 Vars.
Answer:
True

6. The stories relating to the birth and life of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are called ‘Janam Sakhis’.
Answer:
True

7. Puratan Janam Sakhi was edited by Bhai Vir Singh Ji in 1926 A.D.
Answer:
True

8. Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh Ji is also called ‘Gyan Ratnavali’.
Answer:
True

9. Hukamnamas were those orders that were issued by the Sikh Gurus or by the members of their families to the Sikh Sangat.
Answer:
True

10. Gursobha was written by Sainapat in 1741 A.D.
Answer:
True

11. Sikhan Di Bhagatmala was written by Bhai Mani Singh Ji.
Answer:
True

12. Gur Partap Suraj Granth was written by Bhai Santokh Singh.
Answer:
True

13. The writer of Panth Parkash was Giani Gian Singh.
Answer:
False

14. The autobiography of Babar is called Tuzak-i-Babari.
Answer:
True

15. The writer of Ain-i-Akbari and Akbamama was Abul Fazl.
Answer:
True

16. Tuzak-i-Jahangiri was the creation of Shah Jahan.
Answer:
False

17. Khulasat-ut-Tawarikh was written by Sujan Rai Bhandari.
Answer:
True

18. Jang Nama was written by Qazi Nur Mohammad.
Answer:
True

19. Umdat-ut-Tawarikh was written by Sohan Lai Suri.
Answer:
True

20. Diwan Amarnath wrote Zafarnama-i-Ranjit Singh.
Answer:
True

21. Ganesh Das Wadhera was the writer of Char Bagh-i-Punjab.
Answer:
True

22. Khalsa Darbar Records are written in Gurmukhi.
Answer:
False

23. Malcolm wrote Sketch of Sikhs.
Answer:
True

24. The Court and Camp of Ranjit Singh was written by Captain William Osborne.
Answer:
True

25. History of the Sikhs was written by J.D. Cunningham.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. When was Adi Granth Sahib Ji compiled?
(a) In 1601 A.D.
(b) In 1602 A.D.
(c) In 1604 A.D.
(d) In 1605 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1604 A.D.

2. Who compiled Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Angad Dev Ji
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji

3. Who edited Dasam Granth Sahib Ji?
(a) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Baba Deep Singh Ji
(d) Guru Arjan Dev ji.
Answer:
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji

4. To which Guru is Dasam Granth Sahib Ji related?
(a) First Guru
(b) Third Guru
(c) Fifth Guru
(d) Tenth Guru.
Answer:
(d) Tenth Guru.

5. Who wrote Zafarnama?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Amar Dass Ji
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji

6. Bachitar Natak is the autobiography of :
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Hargobind Ji
(c) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
(d) Banda Singh Bahadur.
Answer:
(c) Guru Gobind Singh Ji

7. How many Vars were composed by Bhai Gurdas Ji?
(a) 15
(b) 20
(c) 29
(d) 39.
Answer:
(d)

8. Who edited Puratan Janam Sakhi?
(a) Bhai Kaan Singh Nabha
(b) Bhai Veer Singh
(c) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(d) Meharban.
Answer:
(b) Bhai Veer Singh

9. Who was the author of Gyan Ratanavali?
Or
Who wrote Gyan Ratanavali?
(a) Kesar Singh Chhibbar
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Bhai Bala Ji
(d) Bhar Gurdas Ji.
Answer:
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji

10. Who was the writer of Meharban’s Janam Sakhi?
(a) Manohar Das
(b) Akhil Das
(c) Bhai Bala Ji
(d) Bhai Gurdas Ji
Answer:
(a) Manohar Das

11. What are the Hukamnamas?
(a) Letters of Sikh Gurus
(b) The most famous Janam Sakhi
(c) Orders of Mughal kings
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Letters of Sikh Gurus

12. Who wrote Sri Gursobha?
(a) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(b) Rattan Singh Bhangu
(c) Sainapat
(d) Giani Gian Singh
Answer:
(c) Sainapat

13. Who wrote Bansavalinama?
(a) Kesar Singh Chibbar
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji.
(c) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(d) Rattan Singh Bhangu.
Answer:
(a) Kesar Singh Chibbar

14.Who composed the book ‘Sikhan Di Bhagatmala’?
(a) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(b) Bhai Daya Singh Ji
(c) Bhai Santokh Singh
(d) Rattan Singh Bhanghu.
Answer:
(a) Bhai Mani Singh Ji

15. Who wrote Gurpartap Suraj Granth?
(a) Saroop Das Bhaila
(b) Bhai Santokh Singh
(c) Rattan Singh Bhangu
(d) Giani Gian Singh.
Answer:
(b) Bhai Santokh Singh

16. When did Rattan Singh Bhangu compose Prachin Panth Prakash?
(a) In 1641 A.D.
(b) In 1741 A.D.
(c) In 1841 A.D.
(d) In 1849 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1841 A.D.

17. Who wrote Tawarikh-Guru Khalsa?
(a) Giani Gian Singh
(b) Bhai Santokh Singh
(c) Rattan Singh Bhangu
(d) Bhai Mani Singh Ji.
Answer:
(a) Giani Gian Singh

18. Tuzak-i-Babri was related with which ruler?
(a) Humayun
(b) Babar
(c) Jahangir
(d) Akbar
Answer:
(b) Babar

19. In which language Babar wrote Tuzak-i-Babari?
(a) Persian
(b) Turkish
(c) Urdu
(d) Arabian
Answer:
(b) Turkish

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 2 Sources of the History of the Punjab

20. Who wrote Ain-i-Akbari and Akbarnama?
(a) Abul Fazl
(b) Sujjan Rai Bhandari
(c) Sohan Lai Suri
(d) Quzi-Nur-Mohammad
Answer:
(a) Abul Fazl

21. Who wrote Tuzak-i-Jahangiri?
(a) Babar
(b) Jahangir
(c) Shah Jahan
(d) Aurangzeb
Answer:
(b) Jahangir

22. Who wrote Khulasat-ut-Tawarikh?
(a) Sujjan Rai Bhandari
(b) Quzi Nur-Mohammad
(c) Khafi-Khan
(d) Sohan Lal Sur.
Answer:
(a) Sujjan Rai Bhandari

23. Name the famous book written by Khafi Khan.
(a) Dabistan-i-Majahib
(b) Jang Nama
(c) Khulasat-ut-Tawarikh
(d) Muntkhib-ul-Lubab
Answer:
(d) Muntkhib-ul-Lubab

24. Who wrote Jang Nama?
(a) Sohan Lai Suri
(b) Qazi Nur Mohammad
(c) Khafi Khan
(d) Abul Fazl.
Answer:
(b) Qazi Nur Mohammad

25. Which famous granth was written by court historian, Sohan Lai Suri of Maharaja Ranjit Singh?
(a) Umdat-ut-Tawarikh
(b) Tawarikh-i- Sikhan
(c) Tawarikh-i-Punjab
(d) Ibratnama.
Answer:
(a) Umdat-ut-Tawarikh

26. When did Khushwaqt Rai compose Tawarikh-i-Sikhan?
(a) In 1764 A.D.
(b) In 1784 A.D
(c) In 1811 A.D
(d) In 1821 A.D.
Answer:
(c) In 1811 A.D

27. Who wrote Tawarikh-i-Sikhan?
(a) Diwan Amarnath
(b) Khushwaqt Rai
(c) Sohan Lai Suri
(d) Bute Shah.
Answer:
(b) Khushwaqt Rai

28. Who wrote Zafarnama-i-Ranjit Singh?
(a) Sohan Lai Suri
(b) Diwan Amarnath.
(c) Allaudin Mufti
(d) Qazi-Nur-Mohammad.
Answer:
(b) Diwan Amarnath.

29. Name the famous- book of Ganesh Das Wadehra :
(a) Tawarikh-i-Punjab
(b) Tawarikh-i-Sikhan
(c) Char-Bagh-i-Punjab
(d) Ibratnama.
Answer:
(c) Char-Bagh-i-Punjab

30. In which language Khalsa Darbar Records were written?
(a) English
(b) Persian
(c) Urdu
(d) Punjabi
Answer:
(b) Persian

31. When did Malcolm compose Sketch of Sikhs?
(a) In 1802 A.D.
(b) In 1812 A.D.
(c) In 1822 A.D.
(d) In 1832 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1812 A.D.

32. Who wrote the famous book The Court and Camp of Ranjit Singh?
(a) H.T. Princep
(b) Wiliam Osborne
(c) Dr. Mac. Gregor
(d) J. D. Cunningham
Answer:
(b) Wiliam Osborne

33. Who was the writer of the History of the Sikhs?
(a) J.D. Cunningham
(b) Alexander Burns
(c) Dr. Muray
(d) Malcolm.
Answer:
(a) J.D. Cunningham

34. Who issued the first Sikh coins?
(a) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
(b) Banda Singh Bahadur
(c) Jassa Singh Ahluwalia
(d) Maharaja Ranjit Singh
Answer:
(b) Banda Singh Bahadur

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class History Book Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 History Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe any five physical features of the Punjab.
Or
Give a brief description of geographical features of Punjab.
Answer:
1. The Himalayas : The Himalayas are situated to the north of the Punjab. ‘Himalaya’ means ‘abode of snow’. Its tops remain covered with snow throughout the year. It stretches from Assam in the east to Afghanistan in the west. Its length is 2500 kilometres and the breadth ranges from 240 kilometres to 320 kilometres. The Himalayas have proved to be of great advantage to the Punjab in many ways.

2. Sulaiman Mountain Ranges : The Sulaiman mountain ranges are situated in the north-west of the Punjab. These are the western ranges of the Himalayas. These ranges have manf ‘Passes’ which connect India with other countries of Asia. The Khyber is the most prominent pass. The other known passes are Bolan, Kurram, Tochi and Gomal. The majority of foreign invaders came to the Punjab through these passes. Besides, these passes served as trade routes for India with Afghanistan and Central Asia.

3. Sub-mountainous Region : This region is located between the Shivalik ranges and the plains of the Punjab. It is called Tarai. The height of these mountains ranges between 1000 feet and 3000 feet. This region consists of Hoshiarpur, Kangra, Ambala, northern part of Gurdaspur and some areas of Sialkot. As the region is hilly, its soil is less fertile and means of transport are under-developed. Thus, the population in this region is not dense.

4. The Plains : The Plains constitute the largest and most important region of the Punjab. It is rightly called the real Punjab. This part is located between the rivers of Indus and Jamuna. It is considered one of the best fertile plains of the world. Five great rivers of the Punjab (Sutlej, Beas, Ravi, Chenab, Jhelum) flow in this very part. The plains of the Punjab can further be sub-divided into the following three parts:

  • Five Doabs,
  • Malwa and Bangar,
  • South-West Deserts.

5. Climate of the Punjab: The climate of the Punjab also shows much variation. It is extremely cold in winter and becomes too hot in summer. December and January are bitterly cold. The hilly areas receive plenty of snowfall. The temperature falls below 0°C on many occasions. The plains experience fog and mist in winter. In the months of summer, especially in May and June, scorching winds blow. The Punjab receives rainfall from July to September. The hilly areas receive more rainfall than the plains. The climate of the Punjab in the months of October, November, February and March is very pleasant.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 2.
Why is the Punjab called as the Gateway of India?
Answer:
The Punjab has acted as the gateway of India for centuries due to its geographical location. Towards its north-west are Khyber, Kurram, Tochi and Bolan passes. It was not difficult to cross these passes. Therefore, since the ancient times, the foreign invaders had been crossing these passes to invade India. The Aryans, Persians, Greeks, Kushana, Hunas, Turks, Mughals and Durranis passed through these passes and invaded India. The people of Punjab had to struggle against these invaders first of all. They could advance only after conquering Punjab. So the Punjab is called the gateway of India.

Question 3.
What is the importance of the Punjab in the Indian History?
Answer:
The holy land of the Punjab, the territory of five rivers has, undoubtedly, contributed to a great’extent in diversified fields, not only to India but to the world also. About five thousand years ago, the Indus Valley Civilisation, India’s oldest and marvellous civilisation, was born and flourished on this very land. This civilisation is considered as one of the greatest civilisations of the world. The Aryans compiled their famous religious scripture ‘Rigveda’ on this holy land. The great characters of Ramayana and Mahabharata also belonged to the Punjab. The great Mahabharata war was also fought on this land and Lord Krishna delivered his spiritual message i.e. the Gita here. The world famous Takshshila University and the centre of Gandhara Art were also situated here.

This land has the honour of giving birth to great scholars like Kautilya, Charka and Panini. It was the place where Chandragupta Maurya founded India’s first empire. The most important and decisive wars of Indian history were fought here. This land gave birth to the nine Gurus of the Sikh religion. Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent most part of his life in Punjab. The Khalsa was created here. On this land Maharaja Ranjit Singh founded the first Sikh empire whose splendour is still remembered by the people. Finally, the Punjabi patriots made greatest sacrifices to break the chains of slavery of India.

Question 4.
What do you know about Himalayas ? What were its main benefits to Punjab?
Or
What were the main benefits Of the Himalayas to Punjab?
Answer:
The Himalayas are situated to the north of the Punjab. ‘Himalaya’ means ‘abode of snow’. Its tops remain covered with snow throughout the year. It stretches from Assam in the east to Afghanistan in the west. Its length is 2500 kilometres and the breadth ranges from 240 kilometres to 320 kilometres. On the basis of its height the Himalayas can be divided into three parts. The first part, the Greater Himalayas, consists of those high peaks whose height is 20,000 ft. or above. Mount Everest, the world’s highest peak, is 29,028 ft. or 8848 meters high. These peaks remain covered with snow throughout the year. The second part consists of those peaks whose height ranges between 10,000 feet and 20,000 feet. It is called the Middle Himalayas. Shimla, Dalhousie and Kashmir are situated in it. The third part, the Outer Himalayas, consists of hill areas with a height ranging from 3,000 feet to 10,000 feet. This part is known as Shivalik range of mountains.

The Himalayas have proved to be of great advantage to the Punjab in many ways. Firstly, the Himalayas stand like a watchman both for the Punjab and India because it is the highest mountain range in the world and it always remains snow clad. So, no foreign invader dared to cross these mountains. Consequently, the Punjab remained protected from the foreign invasions from the north for a long time. Secondly, the monsoon winds hit the Himalayas and cause adequate rainfall in the Punjab. Thirdly, the great rivers flowing down the Himalayas have made the land of the Punjab very fertile.

Question 5.
What do you mean by Doab? Give a brief description of five Doabs of Punjab.
Or
Explain the five Doabs of Punjab.
Answer:
‘Doab’ is a Persian word meaning ‘two waters’ or ‘land between the two rivers’. The name of each Doab is composed of the first letters of those two rivers between which it is located.

  • Bist Jalandhar Doab: The area located between the rivers Sutlej and Beas is called Bist Jalandhar Doab. This is the most famous Doab. Jalandhar and Hoshiarpur are the two biggest cities of this Doab.
  • Bari Doab: This Doab is located between the Beas and the Ravi rivers. It is also called Majha. Lahore and Amritsar are two famous cities of this Doab.
  • Rachna Doab: The area located between the Ravi and the Chenab rivers is called Rachna Doab. Gujranwala and Sheikhupura are two important cities of this Doab.
  • Chaj Doab: The area lying between the Chenab and the Jhelum is known as Chaj Doab. Gujarat and Shahpur are two important cities of this Doab.
  • Sindh Sagar Doab: The area lying between the Jhelum and the Sindh rivers is called Sindh Sagar Doab. Rawalpindi is the most famous city of this Doab. All the Doabs except Sindh Sagar Doab are very fertile.

Question 6.
What do you understand by Malwa and Bangar?
Answer:
Besides the five Doabs, the plains of the Punjab also included a vast tract between the Sutlej and Jamuna. This area can be divided into two parts—Malwa and Bangar.

  • Malwa: The area lying between the Sutlej and the Ghaggar rivers is called Malwa. Patiala, Ludhiana, Sirhind, Sangrur, Malerkotla, Bathinda, Faridkot and Nabha fall in this area. In this area lived a famous tribe ‘Malavas’ in the ancient times, for which this region got the name Malwa. The inhabitants of this area are called Malwai.
  • Bangar: The area which falls between the Ghaggar and the Jamuna rivers is called Bangar. It is also called Haryana. It includes Ambala, Panipat, Rohtak, Karnal, Kurukshetra, Gurgaon, Jind, and Hissar. Many important and decisive battles of Indian history were fought in this part.

Question 7.
What influence did the physical features of the Punjab have on its political history?
Or
What were the political effects of the geographical features of the Punjab?
Answer:
1. Punjab—Gateway of India : There are a number of passes (Khyber, Kurram, Tochi, Bolan etc.) in the north-west of the* Punjab which were easy to cross. So, the foreign invaders kept on attacking India for centuries passing through these passes. First of all these invadersJiad to fight with-the people of the Punjab. So, the Punjab has been called the gateway of India.

2. Influence of the Rivers of the Punjab : The rivers flowing into this land have also influenced its history. These rivers checked the entry of foreign invaders many times and thus protected the country. When these rivers were in flood, it was almost impossible to cross them. Thus the future of the Punjab depended upon these rivers.

3. Influence of the Forests and Hills of the Punjab : The forests and the hills of the Punjab have influenced the history of Punjab to a great extent. After the martyrdom of Banda Singh Bahadur in 1716 A.D., started the persecution of the Sikhs. So they took shelter in these forests and hills. From here, they resisted the enemy and adopted guerilla warfare.

4. Special traits of the Character of Punjabis : The peculiar geographical features of the Punjab were responsible for developing certain special traits of the character of the Punjabis. These special traits provided separate identity to the Punjabis from the rest of the IndiAnswer: They developed traits like bravery, courage, hard work, sympathy, co-operation, social service, tolerance and sacrificing the self for the country.

5. Prosperity of the Punjab : The Punjab has been very much prosperous since the ancient times due to its geographical situation. The plains of the Punjab are so fertile that’ they are described as producing gold. The foreign trade of the Punjab had also been very- flourishing. Consequently, the Punjab is were very rich.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 8.
What impact did the physical features of the Punjab have on its economic history?
Or
Name main economic influences on the geography of Punjab.
Answer:
1. Punjab—Gateway of India : There are a number of passes (Khyber, Kurram, Tochi, Bolan etc.) in the north-west of the Punjab which were easy to cross. So, the foreign invaders kept on attacking India for centuries passing through these passes. First of all these invaders had to fight with the people of the Punjab. They could go further only after defeating the Punjab.

2. Punjab—Field of Historic Battles : Punjab has been the battlefield of many important and decisive battles of Indian history because of its geographical location. First of all, the Aryans fought the Dravidians in the ancient times. Then, the battles between Alexander and Porus, and Chandragupta Maurya and the Greeks were also fought on this land.

3. North-West Frontier Problem : The northrwest frontier has always remained a great headache for the rulers of India in general, and for those who ruled the Punjab in particular. It was due to two main reasons. Firstly, all the foreign invaders except the British came to the Punjab from this side. Secondly, the tribesmen living in this area were very wild and uncivilized.

4. Punjabis had to suffer for Centuries: It was also due to the geographical location of the Punjab, that the Punjabis had to suffer hardships and the cruelties of invaders for centuries. Mahmud Ghaznavi, Mohammad Ghori, Timur, Nadir Shah and Ahmad Shah Abdali were such invaders, who had let loose a reign of terror on the Punjabis.

5. Influence of the Rivers of the Punjab : The rivers flowing into this land have also influenced its history. These rivers checked the entry of foreign invaders many times and thus protected the country. When these rivers were in flood, it was almost impossible to cross them. These rivers also determined the routes of the invaders at many occasions.

Question 9.
Describe the major economic effects of geography of Punjab on the people of Punjab.
Answer:
1. Agriculture : The soil of the plains of the Punjab was very fertile. Moreover, the Punjab received sufficient rainfall and has developed means of irrigation. That was why a majority of the population of the Punjab is engaged in agriculture. Wheat, rice, cottonseed, sugarcane, maize, barley and oil-seeds were main crops of the Punjab. People living in the hilly areas earned their livelihood by rearing sheep and goats, because nothing can grow on it.

2. Foreign Trade : Due to its geographical location the people of the Punjab had the opportunity to develop good foreign trade since ancient times. Being a border province, the Punjab had a flourishing trade with Afghanistan and countries of Central Asia. Much of this trade was carried on through the passes located in the north-west of the Punjab..

3. Prosperity of the Punjab : The Punjab has been very much prosperous since the ancient times due to its geographical situation. The plains of the Punjab are so fertile that they are described as producing gold. The foreign trade of the Punjab had also been very flourishing. Consequently, the Punjabis were very rich.

Question 10.
How did the rivers of the Punjab influence its history.
Answer:
The rivers flowing into this land have also influenced its history. These rivers checked the entry of foreign invaders many times and thus protected the country. When these rivers were in flood, it was almost impossible to cross them. Alexander, the Great, could not cross the Beas. These rivers determined the routes of the invaders at many occasions. They advanced from those sides, where these rivers were shallow and it was easier to cross them. Thus the future of the Punjab depended upon these rivers. These rivers also proved helpful in determining the boundaries of Sarkars and Parganas. These rivers made the plains of the Punjab very fertile, which enhanced its political significance to a great extent.

Question 11.
How did the forests of Punjab affects its history?
Answer:
The forests and the hills of the Punjab have influenced the history of Punjab to a great extent. After the martyrdom of Banda Singh Bahadur in 1716 A.D., when Abdus Samad Khan, Zakariya Khan, Yahiya Khan and Mir Mannu started the persecution of the Sikhs. They took shelter in these forests and hills. They adopted guerilla warfare to resist enemy. They used to attack their enemy all of a sudden and took shelter once again in their hideouts in the forests and hills. The Sikhs even looted Nadir Shah in 1739 A.D. through guerilla warfare. They had become a great headache for Ahmad Shah Abdali. He invaded Punjab for not less than eight times to crush the Sikh power, but he failed in his attempts. Finally, the Sikhs succeeded in establishing their independent Misls in many parts of the Punjab.

Question 12.
What effects did the physical features of Punjab have on its socio-cultural history?
Or
Mention the socio-cultural effects of the geographical features of the Punjab.
Answer:
1. Special traits of the Character of Punjabis : The peculiar geographical features of the Punjab were responsible for developing certain special traits of the character of the Punjabis. These special traits provided separate identity to the Punjabis from the rest of the IndiAnswer: After fighting countless wars and facing many difficulties, they developed traits like bravery, courage, hard work, sympathy, co-operation, social service, tolerance and sacrificing the self for the country.

2. Increase in the number of Castes and Sub-castes: The Punjab has been the victim of foreign invasions from the ancient times. The Iranians, Greeks, Hunas, Kushanas, Mongols, Turks, Mughals and Afghans invaded the Punjab and many of them settled here. They married the women folk of this land. Thus, many new castes and sub-castes emerged.

3. Distinct Culture of the Punjab : People belonging to different countries and practising different religions got settled in the Punjab. As a result a new culture evolved as a result of their synthesis. For example, a new language (Urdu) developed.

4. Loss of the Art and Literature: The art and literature of Punjab could not develop because of its geographical location. For cfenturies together the Punjab remained the battlefield of foreign invaders. Lack of peace and constant threat to the lives of the people resulted in the lack of art and literature. If some art and literature were ever produced they were destroyed and burnt by the foreign invaders. Consequently, the art and literature of Punjab received a great jolt.

Question 13.
How did Geography of the Punjab affect its religious life?
Or
“Punjab was a land of religious movements.” Explain the statement.
Answer:
The Punjab is considered the birth place of Hinduism. First of all, the Aryans settled in the Sapt Sindhu. They composed their holy scriptures here. Islam was much propagated in Punjab as compared to other parts of India due to many reasons. Firstly, the Muslims had occupied the Punjab in the very beginning. Secondly, the Punjab remained under the Sultans of Delhi and the Mughals for centuries. Guru Nanak Dev and his eight spiritual successors blessed this sacred land of five rivers by their incarnation. The tenth and the last Sikh Guru, Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent the major part of his life in the holy land of Punjab. People of this land were economically rich, so they contributed a lot towards the development of Sikhism.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Essay Type Questions:

different Names of Punjab and its Boundaries:

Question 1.
Describe the geographical features of Punjab.
Or
Examine the physical features of Punjab.
Or
Describe in detail the physical features of Punjab.
Or
How did the geographical features of Punjab affect its history?
Answer:
The word ‘Punjab’ is a combination of two words of Persian language: ‘Punj’ and ‘Aab’ which literally means ‘five’ and ‘water’ respectively. Thus ‘Punjab’ means the territory or land of five rivers. These five rivers are the Sutlej, the Beas, the Ravi, the Chenab and the Jhelum.

Punjab has been known by various names during different periods of history. It was called ‘Sapta Sindhu’ in the Rigvedic period, on the basis of the seven rivers that flowed in this land. They were: Sindhu (Indus), Vitasta (Jhelum), Asikni (Chenab), Parushni (Ravi), Vipasha (Beas), Sutudri (Sutlej) and Saraswati. The rivers Sindhu and Saraswati were the outer boundaries of Punjab. It is called ‘Panchnada’ in the Epics and the Puranas. ‘Panchnada’ means the land of five rivers. The Greeks named it ‘Pentapotamia’—‘Penta’ means five and ‘Potamia’ means river. So, the Greeks also called it the land of five rivers. The territories of Afghanistan and Baluchistan were annexed to Punjab during the Mauryan period. Thus its northwest boundary stretched up to the Hindukush.

As the Tak’ tribe ruled this vast land for centuries, Punjab was also called ‘Tak Desh. In the medieval period, Punjab was known as Lahore Suba, after the name of its capital (Lahore). Akbar, the great Mughal emperor, divided Punjab into two provinces i.e. Suba of Lahore and Suba of Multan. Punjab was called Lahore Raj during the reign of Maharaja Ranjit Singh. Under his rule, its boundaries stretched from Ladakh in the north to Shikarpur in the south and from the Sutlej in the east to Peshawar in the west. When the British annexed it to the British empire, it was termed as ‘Punjab Province’. A famous historian S.M. Latif has rightly remarked,

“No country in the East presents the same variety of features as does the land of five rivers.” Punjab can be divided into the following three parts on the basis of its physical or geographical features:

  1. The Himalayas and the Sulaiman Mountain Ranges.
  2. Sub-mountainous Region.
  3. The Plains.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

1. The Himalayas and the Sulaiman Mountain Ranges:

1. The Himalayas: The Himalayas are situated to the north of Punjab. ‘Himalaya’ means ‘abode of snow. Its tops remain covered with snow throughout the year. It stretches from Assam in the east to Afghanistan in the west. Its length is 2500 kilometres and the breadth ranges from 240 kilometres to 320 kilometres. On the basis of its height, the Himalayas can be divided into three parts: the Greater Himalayas, the Middle Himalayas and the Outer Himalayas also known as the Shivalik mountains.

The Himalayas have proved to be of great advantage to Punjab in many ways. Firstly, the Himalayas stand like a watchman both for the Punjab and India, because it is the highest mountain range in the world and it always remains snow-clad. So, no foreign invader dared to cross these mountains and consequently, Punjab remained protected from the foreign invasions from the north for a long time. Secondly, the monsoon winds hit the Himalayas and cause adequate rainfall in Punjab. Thirdly, the great rivers flowing down the Himalayas have made the land of the Punjab very fertile. Fourthly, the valleys of the Himalayas gave Punjab such famous hill stations like Shimla, Manali, Kullu, Kangra and Dalhousie.

2. Sulaiman Mountain Ranges: The Sulaiman mountain ranges are situated in the northwest of Punjab. These are the western ranges of the Himalayas. These ranges have many ‘Passes’ which connect India with other countries of Asia. The Khyber is the most prominent pass. The other known passes are Bolan, Kurram, Tochi and Gomal. The majority of foreign invaders came to Punjab through these passes. Besides, these passes served as trade routes for India with Afghanistan and Central Asia.

2. Sub-mountainous Region:

This region is located between the Shivalik ranges and the plains of Punjab. It is called Tarai. The height of these mountains ranges between 1000 feet and 3000 feet. This region consists of Hoshiarpur, Kangra, Ambala, the northern part of Gurdaspur and some areas of Sialkot. As the region is hilly, its soil is less fertile and means of transport are under-developed. Thus, the population in this region is not dense.

3. The Plains:

The Plains constitute the largest and most important region of Punjab. It is rightly called the real Punjab. This part is located between the rivers of Indus and Jamuna. It is considered one of the best fertile plains in the world. Its average height from the sea level is less than 1000 feet. Five great rivers of Punjab (Sutlej, Beas, Ravi, Chenab, Jhelum) flow in this very part. The plains of Punjab can further be sub-divided into the following three parts—(a) Five Doabs, (b) Malwa and Bangar, (c) South-West Deserts.

(a) Five Doabs: A bigger part of the plains is surrounded by the five Doabs. These Doabs were created during the reign of Mughal emperor Akbar and can be found in the same way even today. ‘Doab’ is a Persian word meaning ‘two glasses of water or ‘land between the two rivers. These five Doabs are briefly described below:

1. Best Jalandhar Doab: The area located between the rivers Sutlej and Beas is called Best Jalandhar Doab. This is the most famous Doab. Jalandhar and Hoshiarpur are the two biggest cities of this Doab. This Doab is very fertile.

2. Bari Doab: This Doab is located between the rivers Beas and the Ravi. It is located in the middle of Punjab, so it is called Majha and its residents are called Majhail. Lahore and Amritsar are two famous cities of this Doab. It is also very fertile.

3. Rachna Doab: The area located between the rivers Ravi and the Chenab is called Rachna Doab. Gujranwala and Sheikhupura are two important cities of this Doab. This Doab is also very fertile.

4. Chaj Doab: The area lying between the rivers Chenab and the Jhelum is known as Chaj Doab. Gujarat and Shahpur are two important cities of this Doab. It is also very fertile.

5. Sind Sagar Doab: The area lying between the rivers Jhelum and the Sind is called Sind Sagar Doab. Rawalpindi is the most famous city of this Doab. This Doab is less fertile.

(b) Malwa and Bangar: In addition to the areas covered by the Five Doabs, the vast plains located between the rivers Sutlej and the Jamuna also form a part of the plains of Punjab. It is further sub-divided into two parts—Malwa and Bangar.

1. Malwa: The area located between the rivers Sutlej and the Ghaggar is called Malwa which includes Patiala, Ludhiana, Sirhind, Sangrur, Malerkotla, Bhatinda, Faridkot and Nabha. There lived a famous tribe named ‘Malwa’ in the ancient period in this area, so the area came to be called Malwa. Its inhabitants are called ‘Malwai’.

2. Bangar: The area located between the rivers Ghaggar and the Jamuna is known as Bangar. It is known as Haryana as well. Ambala, Panipat, Rohtak, Karnal, Kurukshetra, Gurugram (Gurgaon), Jind, and Hissar are included in it. Many important and decisive wars of Indian History have been fought in this part of Punjab.

(c) South-West Deserts: Sind, Bahawalpur, and the desert of Multan which are located in the southwest also form part of the plains of Punjab. As this area receives inadequate rainfall, so it is less fertile.

4. Climate of Punjab:

The climate of Punjab also shows much variation. It is extremely cold in winter and becomes too hot in summer. December and January are bitterly cold. The hilly areas receive plenty of snowfall. The temperature falls below 0°C on many occasions. The plains experience fog and mist in winter. In the months of summer, especially in May and June, scorching winds blow. Punjab receives rainfall from July to September. The hilly areas receive more rainfall than the plains. The climate of Punjab in the months of October, November, February, and March is very pleasant.

Influence Of Physical Features On The History Of Punjab:

Question 2.
How have the physical features of the Punjab affected its Political History?
Or
How have the physical features of the Punjab affected its History?
Or
Examine the influence of physical features of the Punjab on the course of its history.
Or
How did the geographical features of the Punjab affect its History?
Or
How did the geographical features of the Punjab influence its political, social, religious and economic history?
Or
Explain the socio-cultural, economic and religious effects of the physical features of the Punjab.
Or
Explain the political effects of the physical features of the Punjab.
Or
Explain the social and economic effects of the physical features of the Punjab.
Or
What were the political, military and social effects of the geographical features of the Punjab?
Answer:
History is always closely related to Geography, because the geographical conditions of a country have a great influence upon the history of that country. The political, social, economic and religious life of the people is greatly influenced and controlled by the geographical factors. Thus, the geographical conditions of the Punjab have greatly influenced the history of this land. These factors have influenced social, political, economic, religious and cultural life of the Punjab in many ways.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

1. Political Effects:

1. Punjab—Gateway of India: As a result of its geographical location, the Punjab has been the gateway of India for many centuries. There are a number of passes (Khyber, Kurram, Tochi, Bolan etc.) in the north-west of the Punjab which were easy to cross. So, the foreign invaders kept on attacking India for centuries passing through these passes. The Aryans, Iranians, Greeks, Kushanas, Hunas, Turks, Mughals and Durranis invaded India passing through these passes. First of all these invaders had to fight with the people of the Punjab. They could go further only after defeating the Punjab. So, the Punjab has been called the gateway of India.

2. Punjab—Field pi Historic Battles: Punjab has been the battlefield of many important and decisive battles of Indian history because of its geographical location. First of all, the Aryans fought the Dravidians in the ancient times. Then, the battles between Alexander and Porus, and Chandragupta Maurya and the Greeks were also fought on this land. In the medieval period, two battles were fought between Prithviraj Chauhan and Mohammad Ghori at Tarain in 1191 A.D. and 1192 A.D. Mohammad Ghori defeated Prithviraj Chauhan in the second battle of Tarain and thus he laid the foundation of the Muslim rule in India. Similarly, the first battle of Panipat was fought in 1526 A.D. between Ibrahim LodKi and Babar, and the second battle of Panipat was fought in 1556 A.D. between Hemu and Akbar, which resulted in establishing the Mughal empire in India. The third battle of Panipat was fought in 1761 A.D. between the Marathas and Ahmad Shah Abdali, which marked the end of the Maratha power in the Punjab. Thus, we see that many historic battles of Indian history were fought on this land of five rivers.

3. North-West Frontier Problem: The north-west frontier has always remained a great headache for the rulers of India in general, and for those who ruled the Punjab in particular. It was due to two main reasons. Firstly, all the foreign invaders except the British came to the Punjab from this side. Secondly, the tribesmen living in this area were very wild and uncivilized. Their main profession was to loot and plunder the neighbouring territories. People had to face many hardships due to their cruel activities.

Consequently, every ruler of the Punjab who did not pay heed to the north-west frontier had to lose his kingdom very soon. Thus, the success or failure of any ruler depended upon his north-western frontier policy. It was one of the main causes of the downfall of the great Gupta Empire. So, having understood its significance, Balban, Alauddin Khalji, Akbar, Maharaja Ranjit Singh and the British paid special attention towards the solution of this knotty problem. As a result, they succeeded in protecting their empires to a large extent.

4. Punjabis had to suffer for Centuries: It was also due to the geographical location of the Punjab, that the Punjabis had to suffer hardships and the cruelties of invaders for centuries. As the Punjab lay in the way of the foreign invaders coming from north-western side, it had to bear the brunt of their onslaughts. Mahmud Ghaznavi, Mohammad Ghori, Timur, Nadir Shah and Ahmad Shah Abdali were such invaders, who had let loose a reign of terror on the Punjabis. Wherever, they went they looted all villages and towns and killed many people. They caused dishonour to womenfolk, who were chained and sold in foreign countries as slaves. They forcibly converted the people to Islam.

5. Influence of the Rivers of the Punjab: The rivers flowing into this land have also influenced its history. These rivers checked the entry of foreign invaders many times and thus protected the country. When these rivers were in flood, it was almost impossible to cross them. Alexander, the Great, could not cross the Beas. These rivers determined the routes of the invaders at many occasions. They advanced from those sides, where these rivers were shallow and it was easier to cross them. Thus the future of the Punjab depended upon these rivers. These rivers made the plains of the Punjab very fertile, which enhanced its political significance.

6. Influence of the Forests and Hills of the Punjab: The forests and the hills of the Punjab have influenced the history of Punjab to a great extent. After the martyrdom of Banda Singh Bahadur in 1716 A.D., when Abdus Samad Khan, Zakariya Khan, Yahiya Khan and Mir Mannu started the persecution of the Sikhs. They took shelter in these forests and hills. From here, they resisted the enemy and adopted guerilla warfare. They used to attack their enemy all of a sudden and took shelter once again in their hideouts in the forests and hills. The Sikhs even looted Nadir Shah in 1739 A.D. through guerilla warfare. They had become a great headache for Ahmad Shah also. He invaded Punjab for not less than eight times to crush the Sikh power, but he failed in his attempts. Finally, the Sikhs succeeded in establishing their independent Misls in many parts of the Punjab.

2. Social and Cultural Effects:

1. Special traits of the Character of Punjabis: The peculiar geographical features of the Punjab were responsible for developing certain special traits of the character of the Punjabis. These special traits provided separate identity to the Punjabis from the rest of the IndiAnswer: After fighting countless wars and facing many difficulties, they developed traits like bravery, courage, hard work, sympathy, co-operation, social service, tolerance and sacrificing the self for the country. Besides, one more distinct trait developed in the Punjabis. It was—‘eat, drink and be merry’. As the foreign invaders invariably looted the wealth, riches and all other belongings, so the Punjabis preferred to spend all the money rather than saving it. It was a famous saying at the time of Ahmad Shah Abdali:
“Khaada peeta laahe da, Rehnda Ahmad Shahe da.”.

2. Increase in the number of Castes and Sub-castes: The Punjab has been the victim of foreign invasions from the ancient times. The Iranians, Greeks, Hunas, Kushanas, Mongols, Turks, Mughals and Afghans invaded the Punjab and many 5 of them settled here. They married the women folk of this land. Thus, many new S castes and sub-castes emerged. Of such castes and sub-castes, Pathan, Gujjar, Dogra, Baluch, Syal, Jat, Mahajan and Arora were prominent. .

3. Distinct Culture of the Punjab: People belonging to different countries and practising different religions got settled in the Punjab. As a result a new culture evolved as a resul of their synthesis. For example, a new language (Urdu) developed.

4. Loss of the Art and Literature: The art and literature of Punjab could not develop because of its geographical location. For centuries together the Punjab remained the battlefield of foreign invaders. Lack of peace and constant threat to the lives of the people resulted in the lack of art and literature. If some art and literature were ever produced they were destroyed and burnt by the foreign invaders. Consequently, the art and literature of Punjab received a great jolt.

3. Religious Effects:

1. Origin of Hinduism: The Punjab is considered the birthplace of Hinduism. First of all, the Aryans settled in the Sapta Sindhu. They composed their holy scriptures here. These works depict geographical or natural aspects of the Punjab clearly. The rivers, the” forests and the mountains of the Punjab are mentioned in these books more than once.

2. Propagation of Islam: Islam was much propagated in Punjab as compared to other parts of India due to many reasons. Firstly, the Muslims were the first to occupy Punjab. Secondly, the Punjab was located nearer to Afghanistan and Central Asia. All these countries were populated by Muslims. Thirdly, many Muslims got settled in the Punjab. Fourthly, the Punjab remained under the Sultans of Delhi and the Mughals for centuries. All these causes \yere responsible for the spread of Islam in Punjab.

3. Origin and Development of Sikhism: Guru Nanak Dev Ji and his eight spiritual successors blessed this sacred land of five rivers by their incarnation. The development and growth of Sikhism is very closely related to the geographical features of the Punjab. People of this land were economically rich, so they contributed a lot towards the development of Sikhism. They never hesitated in contributing for the Langar, historical buildings and other necessary projects of the Sikh Panth. They always helped the needy and the poor which made many of them become the followers of Sikhism.

4. Economic Effects:

1. Agriculture: The soil of the plains of the Punjab was very fertile. Moreover, the Punjab received sufficient rainfall and has developed means of irrigation. That was why a majority of the population of the Punjab is engaged in agriculture. Wheat, rice, cottonseed, sugarcane, maize, barley and oil-seeds were main crops of the Punjab. People living in the hilly areas earned their livelihood by rearing sheep and goats, because were nothing can grow on it.

2. Foreign Trade: Due to its geographical location the people of the Punjab had the opportunity to develop good foreign trade since ancient times. Being a border province, the Punjab had a flourishing trade with Afghanistan and countries of Central Asia. The Punjab traders exported foodgrains, sugar, cottonseed, woollen, silken and cotton textile, shawls and blankets, etc. to these countries and in return imported horses, dry fruit, daris, carpets, fur and weapons, etc. Much of this trade was carried on through the passes located in the north-west of the Punjab.

3. Prosperity of the Punjab: The Punjab has been very much prosperous since the ancient times due to its geographical situation. The plains of the Punjab are so fertile that they are described as producing gold. The foreign trade of the Punjab had also been very flourishing. Consequently, the Punjabis were very rich. So, we conclude with the befitting remarks by Dr. B.S. Nijjar, “The effects of physical features of the Punjab have exercised a great influence on its history.”

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 3.
Throw light on the physical features of the Punjab. How did they influence the History of the Punjab?
Or
Explain the geographical features of the Punjab. How did they influence the History of the Punjab?
Note: To answer this question the students are requested to see the answers of question numbers 1 and 2.

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe any three physical features of the Punjab.
Or
Give a brief description of geographical features of the Punjab.
Answer:
The Himalayas is located to the north-west of the’Punjab. As this mountain is very high, it acts as a watchman for the Punjab and India. The monsoon strikes ‘ against these mountains and brings rain in the Punjab. The sub-mountainous region of the Punjab is situated between the Shivalik hills and the plains. This region is also known as Tarai. The land being rocky is less fertile and means of transportation are also not much developed. The plains of Punjab is counted among the most fertile regions of the world.

Question 2.
Why is the Punjab called as the ‘Gateway of India’?
Answer:
The Punjab has acted as the gateway of India for centuries due to its geographical location. Towards its north-west are located Khyber, Kurram, Tochi and Bolan passes. It was not difficult to cross these passes. Therefore, since the ancient times, the foreign invaders had been crossing these passes to invade India. The people of the Punjab had to fight with these invaders. They could advance only after conquering the Punjab. So, the Punjab is called the gateway of India.

Question 3.
What is the importance of the Punjab in the Indian History?
Answer:
The Punjab has occupied a pivotal position in the history of India due to many reasons. The Aryans compiled their famous religious scripture Ttigveda’ on this holy land. The great Mahabharata war was also fought on this land. Lord Krishna delivered his spiritual message i.e. the Gita here. It was the place where Chandragupta Maurya founded India’s first empire. The most important and decisive wars of Indian history were fought here. This land gave birth to the nine great Gurus of the Sikh religion. The tenth Guru, Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent most part of his life in Punjab.

Question 4.
What were the main benefits of the Himalayas to the Punjab?
Or
Write any three benefits of the Himalayas to the Punjab.
Or
What were the three merits of the Himalayas to the Punjab?
Answer:

  • The Himalayas stood like a watchman both for the Punjab and India.
  • The sub-mountainous region has given us many beautiful townships and tourist resorts like Kulu, Manali, Dalhousie and Shimla etc.
  • It has contributed a lot to the economic prosperity of the state.

Question 5.
What do you mean by Doab? Give a brief description of Doabs of the Punjab.
Or
Explain any three Doabs of the Punjab.
Answer:
‘Doab’ is a Persian word meaning the ‘land between the two rivers’.

  • Bist Jalandhar Doab: The area located between the rivers Sutlej and Beas.
  • Bari Doab: It is located between the Beas and the Ravi rivers.
  • Rachna Doab: The area located between the Ravi and the Chenab rivers.
  • Chaj Doab: The area lying between the Chenab and the Jhelum.
  • Sind Sagar Doab: The area lying between the Jhelum and the Sind.

Question 6.
Describe briefly about plain areas of Punjab.
Answer:
The plains constitute the largest and most important region of the Punjab. It is rightly called the virtual Punjab. This part is located between the rivers of Indus and Jamuna. It is considered one of the best fertile plains of the World. Its average height from the sea level is less than 1000 feet. Five great rivers of Punjab (Sutlej, Beas, Ravi, Chenab, Jhelum) flow in this very part. The land of this area is very fertile, it receives ample rainfall and the means of transport are fairly developed. So, the population of this area is very dense. The plains of the Punjab can further be sub-divided into the following three parts:

  • Five Doabs,
  • Malwa and Bangar and
  • South West Deserts.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 7.
What do you understand by Malwa and Bangar?
Answer:

  • Malwa: The area lying between the Sutlej and the Ghaggar rivers is called Malwa. Patiala, Ludhiana, Sirhind, Sangrur, Malerkotla, Bathinda, Faridkot and Nabha fall in this area. In this area lived a famous tribe ‘Malavas’ in ancient times, for which this region got the name Malwa. The inhabitants of this area are called Malwai.
  • Bangar: The area which falls between the Ghaggar and the Jamuna rivers is called Bangar. It is also called Haryana. It includes Ambala, Panipat, Rohtak, Karnal, Kurukshetra, Gurugram (Gurgaon), Jind and Hisar. Many important and decisive battles of Indian history were fought in this part.

Question 8.
What influence did the physical features of the Punjab have on its political history?
Or
What were the political effects of the geographical features of the Punjab.
Or
Write any three political effects of the geographical features of the Punjab.
Answer:

  • The Punjab remained the gateway of India for centuries due to its geographical location.
  • Many important and decisive battles of the Indian history were also fought in the Punjab,
  • The rivers flowing through the Punjab, its forests and hills have deeply influenced the history of the Punjab,
  • The forests and mountains lying in the Punjab have also affected its history.

Question 9.
What impact did the physical features of the Punjab have on its economic history?
Or
Write any three main economic influences on the geography of the Punjab.
Answer:

  • As the plains of the Punjab were very fertile, so the main occupation of people here was agriculture,
  • People reared sheep and goats in the mountainous regions of the Punjab,
  • It being a frontier province, foreign trade was carried on with Afghanistan and Central Asian countries on a large scale,
  • The cities like Lahore, Multan, Sirhind, Jalandhar and Amritsar became trade centres.

Question 10.
How did the rivers of the Punjab affect its history?
Or
What were the effects of Punjab rivers on the history of the Punjab?
Answer:
The rivers flowing through the Punjab also greatly influenced its history. These rivers checked the advancement of the foreign invaders many times and defended the country. These rivers, when in spate, were very difficult to cross. These rivers also determined the passage of many invaders. The soil of the Punjab became very fertile due to these rivers and it yielded bumper crops. The economic prosperity of the Punjab was mainly due to these rivers.

Question 11.
The forests and hills of the Punjab have deeply influenced its history. Do you agree with this statement?
Or
How did the forests and hills of the Punjab influence its history?
Or
How did the forests of the Punjab affect its history?
Answer:
The forests and hills of the Punjab have also deeply influenced its history. After the martyrdom of Banda Singh Bahadur in 1716 A.D., when Mughals and Afghans vigorously persecuted the Sikhs, they took shelter in these forests and hills. They faced their enemy from here through guerilla warfare. By adopting the guerilla warfare the Sikhs had plundered even the great tyrant Nadir Shah and Ahmad Shah Abdali.-Ultimately, the Sikhs succeeded in setting up independent Misls in many parts of the Punjab.

Question 12.
What effects did the physical features of the Punjab have on its socio-cultural history?
Or
“Punjab was a land of religious movements.” Explain the statement.
Answer:
The Punjab is considered the birthplace of Hinduism. First of all, the Aryans settled in the Sapta Sindhu. They composed their holy scriptures here. Islam was much propagated in the Punjab as compared to other parts of India due to many reasons. Guru Nanak Dev Ji and his eight spiritual successors blessed this sacred land of five rivers by their incarnation. The tenth Guru, Guru Gobind Singh Ji spent most part of his life in Punjab. Many religions were prevalent in the Punjab. That is why it came to be called, “The land of religious movement.”

Question 14.
Physical features of the Punjab greatly influenced its history. Write briefly three important effects.
Answer:

  • The Punjab has acted as the gateway to India for ages, due to its physical features,
  • The foreign invaders had been invading India through Khyber, Kurram, Tochi and Bolan passes since ancient times,
  • The Sikh religion was bom on the sacred land of the Punjab,
  • As the Punjab had remained a battlefield for ages, art and literature could not flourish here,
  • Since the ancient times, the Punjab has been an economically prosperous state due to its physical features.

Objective Type Questions:

Question 1.
What is the meaning of the word Punjab?
Answer:
The land of five rivers.

Question 2.
Why did Punjab get its name Punjab?
Answer:
Because of the five rivers flowing here.

Question 3.
Name any one river of Punjab.
Answer:
Sutlej.

Question 4.
By which name was the Punjab known in the Rigvedic period and why?
Or
By which name Punjab was called during Rigvedic period and why?
Answer:
Sapta Sindhu.

Question 5.
What is meant by Sapta Sindhu?
Answer:
The land of seven rivers.

Question 6.
With what name did Greeks call Punjab?
Answer:
Pentapotamia.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 7.
What is meant by Pentapotamia?
Answer:
The land of five rivers.

Question 8.
What name was given to Punjab by the Epics and Puranas?
Answer:
Panchnada.

Question 9.
What is meant by Panchnada?
Answer:
The land of five rivers.

Question 10.
Why was Punjab called Tak Desh?
Answer:
Because Tak tribe ruled here for a long time.

Question 11.
By which name was Punjab known in medieval period?
Or
What was Punjab known as in the Medieval Period?
Or
What was the name of the Punjab in the Medieval Period?
Answer:
Lahore Suba (Province).

Question 12.
What was the name given to Punjab during Maharaja Ranjit Singh’s times?
Answer:
Lahore Raj.

Question 13.
When was Lahore state annexed to the British empire?
Answer:
March 29, 1849 A.D.

Question 14.
Why was Punjab annexed by the British last of all?
Answer:
Due to the geographical location of Punjab.

Question 15.
Which part of Punjab was given to Pakistan in 1947?
Answer:
Western part.

Question 16.
Write the names of the physical features of the Punjab.
Or
Give the three physical features of the Punjab.
Answer:
Himalayas and Sulaiman Mountain Ranges, Sub-Mountainous Region and the Plains.

Question 17.
Punjab is known as the Sword Arm of whom?
Answer:
India.

Question 18.
Why is Punjab known as ‘Sword Arm of India’?
Answer:
Because people of Punjab played the role of defending India’s security.

Question 19.
Which was called the Gateway of India?
Answer:
Punjab.

Question 20.
Why is the Punjab called the Gateway of India?
Answer:
Because the foreign invaders had to cross Punjab to reach India.

Question 21.
Name the frontier direction through which foreign invaders entered Punjab.
Answer:
North West Frontier.

Question 22.
Name any one pass through which the invaders came to Punjab.
Answer:
Khyber.

Question 23.
Name the ‘pass’ through which maximum foreign invasions took place.
Answer:
Khyber.

Question 24.
Which is the highest peak of the Himalayas?
Answer:
Mount Everest.

Question 25.
Mention any one advantage of Himalayas to Punjab.
Answer:
It saved Punjab from the invaders of the North.

Question 26.
Name the beautiful city in the mountainous regions of the Punjab which is the outcome of Himalayas.
Answer:
Shimla.

Question 27.
Where is Tarai or sub-mountainous region located?
Answer:
Himalayas and the plains of the Punjab.

Question 28.
What do you mean by ‘Doab’?
Answer:
The region between the two rivers.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 29.
Into how many Doabs has Punjab been divided?
Answer:
Five Doabs.

Question 30.
Name any one Doab of Punjab.
Answer:
Bist Jalandhar Doab.

Question 31.
In which Doab Jalandhar is situated?
Answer:
Bist Jalandhar Doab.

Question 32.
In which Doab Hoshiarpur is situated?
Answer:
Bist Jalandhar Doab.

Question 33.
Name any one city located in Bari Doab.
Answer:
Lahore.

Question 34.
What is meant by Bari Doab?
Answer:
The area located between the rivers Sutlej and Beas.

Question 35.
Why is Bari Doab called ‘Majha’?
Answer:
Because it is located in the middle of Punjab.

Question 36.
By what other name Bari Doab is known as?
Answer:
Majha.

Question 37.
In which Doab is Amritsar situated?
Answer:
Bari Doab.

Question 38.
With which name are the people of Malwa known?
Answer:
People of Malwa are called Malwai.

Question 39.
Write the names of any two main citiSs of Malwa.
Or
Mention any two cities of Malwa.
Answer:

  • Patiala,
  • Ludhiana.

Question 40
Where is Malwa situated?
Answer:
Between Sutlej and Ghaggar rivers.

Question 41.
Why is Malwa so called?
Answer:
Because it was inhabited by a brave tribe called Malav.

Question 42.
Write the names of any two main cities of Malwa.
Or
Mention any two cities of Malwa.
Answer:

  • Patiala,
  • Ludhiana.

Question 43.
What is meant by Rachna Doab?
Answer:
The region located between the Ravi and the Chenab rivers.

Question 44.
Name two famous towns of Rachna Doab.
Answer:
Gujranwala and Sheikhupura.

Question 45.
What is meant by Chaj Doab?
Answer:
The region located between the Chenab and the Jhelum rivers.

Question 46.
Where is Chaj Doab situated?
Answer:
Between the Chenab and the Jhelum rivers.

Question 47.
Where is Sind Sagar Doab situated?
Answer:
Between the Sind and the Jhelum rivers.

Question 48.
Where is Bangar situated?
Answer:
Between Ghaggar and Jamuna rivers.

Question 49.
Name two important agricultural products of the Punjab.
Answer:
Wheat and cotton.

Question 50.
Name the most important town of Sind Sagar Doab.
Answer:
Rawalpindi.

Question 51.
When was the first battle of Tarain fought?
Answer:
1191 A.D.

Question 52.
When was the second battle of Tarain fought?
Answer:
1192 A.D.

Question 53.
When was the first battle of Panipat fought?
Answer:
1526 A.D.

Question 54.
When was the second battle of Panipat fought?
Answer:
1556 A.D.

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Question 55.
Name any effect of the Himalayas on the History of Punjab.
Answer:
It increased the economic prosperity of Punjab.

Question 56.
How have the plains of Punjab affected its History?
Answer:
The economic prosperity of Punjab became the main source of attraction of foreign invaders.

Question 57.
Write any’one reason for the economic prosperity of Punjab.
Answer:
Foreign trade.

Question 58.
How is the soil of Punjab?
Answer:
Very fertile.

Question 59.
How have the rivers of Punjab affected its history?
Answer:
These rivers acted as the defense barrier of “the country.

Question 60.
How have the mountains and forests affected the history of Punjab?
Answer:
They gave invaluable contribution to the rise of the power of the Sikhs.

Fill in the blanks:

1. Punjab is combination of two Persian words ……………. and ……………….
Answer:
Punj, Aab

2. Punjab means a land of ……………….. rivers.
Answer:
five

3. Punjab was called the ………….. of India.
Answer:
Gateway

4. The Punjab was called ……………. in Rigveda period.
Answer:
Sapt Sindhu

5. The Greeks have named Punjab …………….
Answer:
Pentapotamia

6. In Puranas Punjab was called …………….
Answer:
Panchnada

7. During medieval times Punjab was called …………..
Answer:
Lahore Suba

8. Punjab was named ……………… at the time of Ranjit Singh.
Answer:
Lahore Raj

9. Himalaya means ……………
Answer:
Abode of snow

10. The highest peak of the Himalayas was …………….
Answer:
Mount Everest

11. The most famous …………….. pass lies in the North-west of Punjab.
Answer:
Khyber

12. There are ………….. Doabs in Punjab.
Answer:
five

13. The word ‘Doab’ means ……………
Answer:
land between the two rivers

14. Bari Doab is also called ……………..
Answer:
Majha

15. The most important city of Rachna Doab is ………………
Answer:
Gujranwala

16. ……………. is most important city of Sind Sagar Doab.
Answer:
Rawalpindi

17. The inhabitants of Malwa are called ………………..
Answer:
Malwai

18. The first battle of Tarain was fought in …………….
Answer:
1191A.D.

19. In …………… second battle of Tarain was fought.
Answer:
1192 A.D.

20. …………….. battle of panipat was fought between Hemu and Akbar in 1556 A.D.
Answer:
Second

21. Third battle of Panipat was fought in …………………
Answer:
1761 A.D.

22. The main occupation of people of Punjab was …………….
Answer:
Agriculture

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

True/False:

Pick out the True or False statements:

1. The word ‘Punjab’ means a ‘land of five rivers’.
Answer:
True

2. The Punjab was called Sapt Sindhu in the Rigvedic period.
Answer:
True

3. The Punjab was called Tak Desh in the Epics and the Puranas.
Answer:
False

4. The Greeks called Punjab Pentapotamia.
Answer:
True

5. In medieval period, Punjab was known as Lohore Suba.
Answer:
True

6. The word ‘Himalaya’ means ‘abode of snow’.
Answer:
True

7. The Punjab was given name ‘Lahore Raj’ during the reign of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.
Answer:
True

8. The name of the famous pass in the north-west of Punjab is Gomal.
Answer:
False

9. The word ‘Doab’ means ‘land between the two rivers’.
Answer:
True

10. Hoshiarpur is a city of Bari Doab.
Answer:
False

11. Bari Doab is also known as ‘Majha’.
Answer:
True

12. The area located between the rivers Sutlej and Beas is called ‘Bist Jalandhar Doab’.
Answer:
True

13. The area located between the rivers Ravi and Chenab is called ‘Rachna Doab’.
Answer:
True

14. Gujranwala is an important city of Rachna Doab.
Answer:
True

15. The area lying between the rivers Sutlej and Chenab is called Chaj Doab.
Answer:
False

16. Rawalpindi is the most famous city of Sind Sagar Doab.
Answer:
True

17. The Plain located between the Sutlej and the Jamuna river is called Malwa.
Answer:
False

18. The inhabitants of Malwa are called ‘Malwai’.
Answer:
True

19. The area located between the Ghaggar and the Jamuna rivers is known as Bangar.
Answer:
True

20. The second battle of Tarain was fought in 1193 A.D.
Answer:
False

21. The first battle of panipat between 1536 A.D.
Answer:
False

22. In 1556 A.D. the second battle of Panipat was fought between Hemu and Akbar.
Answer:
True

23. The third battle of Panipat was fought in 1761 A.D.
Answer:
True

24. Sikhism was originated in Punjab
Answer:
True

25. The main occupation of the people of Punjab was agriculture.
Answer:
True

26. Punjab has been very much properous since the ancient times due to its geographical situation.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. What is the meaning of the the word ‘Punjab’?
(a) Land of two rivers
(b) Land of three rivers
(c) Land of four rivers
(d) Land of five rivers
Answer:
(d) Land of five rivers

2. Punjab is the word of which language?
(a) Persian
(b) Urdu
(c) Hindi
(d) Gurmukhi
Answer:
(a) Persian

3. By which name was Punjab known in the Rigvedic period?
(a) Sapt Sindhu
(b) Pentapotamia
(c) Tak Desh
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Sapt Sindhu

4. Which name was given to Punjab by the Greeks?
(a) Panchnad
(b) Sapta Sindhu
(c) Tak Desh
(d) Pentapotamia
Answer:
(d) Pentapotamia

5. Why was Punjab called Tak Desh in ancient times?
(a) Tak tribe
(b) Tak ruler
(c) Tak coin
(d) Tak mountain.
Answer:
(a) Tak tribe

6. What was the name of capital of Punjab in medieval period?
(a) Multan
(b) Rawalpindi
(c) Kabul
(d) Lahore
Answer:
(d) Lahore

7. Which was the famous pass on the North-West Frontier of the Punjab?
(a) Khyber
(b) Kurram
(c) Tochi
(d) Bolan.
Answer:
(a) Khyber

8. Which is the highest peak of the Himalayas?
(a) Kanchanjanga
(b) Nanda Devi
(c) Mount Everest
(d) K/2
Answer:
(c) Mount Everest

9. What is average length of the Himalayas?
(a) 1200 km
(b) 1800 km
(c) 200 km
(d) 2500 km
Answer:
(d) 2500 km

10. What do you mean by ‘Doab’?
(a) Region between two rivers.
(b) Region between two mountains.
(c) Region between two plains.
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(a) Region between two rivers.

11. How many Doabs are there in Punjab?
(a) Two
(b) Three
(c) Four
(d) Five
Answer:
(d) Five

12. In which Doab Amritsar is situated?
(a) Chaj Doab
(b) Bist-Jalandhar
(c) Rachna Doab
(d) Bari Doab
Answer:
(d) Bari Doab

13. Where is Rachna Doab situated?
(a) Between the Ravi and the Chenab rivers
(b) Between the Chenab and the Jhelum rivers
(c) Between the Ravi and the Sutlej rivers
(d) Between the Sutlej and the Beas rivers?
Answer:
(a) Between the Ravi and the Chenab rivers

14. Which Doab has Gujarat and Shahpur as main cities?
(a) Chaj Doab
(b) Rachna Doab
(c) Bari Doab
(d) Bist-Jalandhar Doab.
Answer:
(a) Chaj Doab

15. Which is the most important town of Sind Sagar region?
(a) Sind
(b) Jalandhar
(c) Ludhiana
(d) Rawalpindi
Answer:
(d) Rawalpindi

PSEB 12th Class History Solutions Chapter 1 Physical Features of the Punjab and their influence on its History

16. When was the first battle of Tarain fought?
(a) In 1191 A.D.
(b) In 1192 A.D.
(c) In 1291 A.D.
(d) In 1491 A.D.
Answer:
(a) In 1191 A.D.

17. When was the second battle of Tarain fought?
(a) In 1152 A.D.
(b) In 1192 A.D.
(c) In 1292 A.D.
(d) In 1526 A.D.
Answer:
(b) In 1192 A.D.

18. In which year was the second battle of Panipat fought?
(a) 1526 A.D
(b) 1536 A.D
(c) 1556 A.D
(d) 1656 A.D
Answer:
(c) 1556 A.D

19. In which year was the third battle of Panipat fought?
(a) 1526 A.D
(b) 1561 A.D
(c) 1556 A.D
(d) 1761 A.D
Answer:
(d) 1761 A.D

20. Name the city of Punjab which was considered important from the geographical point of view.
(a) Multan
(b) Lahore
(c) Peshawar
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

21. Which language was not spoken in Punjab in 16th century?
(a) Urdu
(b) Hindi
(c) Punjabi
(d) Tamil
Answer:
(d) Tamil

22. Which trait is not the outcome of the geographical condition of Punjab?
(a) Bravery
(b) Hard work
(c) Tolerance
(d) Treachery
Answer:
(d) Treachery

23. Which foreign invaders did not come through North-Western Frontier?
(a) Mughals
(b) Hunas
(c) Greeks
(d) British
Answer:
(d) British

24. What led to the spread of Islam in Punjab?
(a) Muslims of Punjab were economically happy.
(b) Muslims had occupied Punjab in the very beginning.
(c) People of Punjab liked this religion.
(d) Muslims had more propaganda centres in Punjab.
Answer:
(b) Muslims had occupied Punjab in the very beginning.

25. Which of these was not exported by Punjab in the sixteenth century?
(a) Horses
(b) Cotton
(c) Sugar
(d) Clothes
Answer:
(a) Horses

26. Which of these was not imported in Punjab in the sixteenth century?
(a) Dry Fruit
(b) Weapons
(c) Horses
(d) Cotton
Answer:
(d) Cotton

27. Which city was not an important trading centre in 16th century?
(a) Amritsar
(b) Lahore
(c) Hisar
(d) Rawalpindi
Answer:
(d) Rawalpindi

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Political Science Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write the arrangements made for the protection of Human Rights in India in detail.
Or
Discuss any six steps taken in India for the protection of Human Rights.
Answer:
India is one of the largest democracy of the world. After Independence the makers of our Constitution had made provision for Human Rights. Not only after independence even before independence our national makers worked for Human Rights. The Fundamental Rights enumerated in the Indian Constitution are the most elaborate in the world. Part III of Indian Constitution provides for Fundamental Rights those are as following:

  1. Right to Equality; Articles 14-18
  2. Right to Liberty ; Articles 19-22
  3. Right against Exploitation; Articles 23-24
  4. Right to Freedom of Religion; Articles 25-28
  5. Cultural and Educational Rights; Articles 29-30
  6. Right to Constitutional Remedies; Article-32.

The Indian Constitution has not only made provision for the Fundamental Rights but also made provision for the machinery to implement the rights properly. A number of legislations have been made to eliminate exploitation of the weaker section of the society. Apart from this the Indian government has set up National Human Rights Commission at the level of the central Government and State Human Rights Commission at the state level. These Commissions look into complaints and incidents of violation of Human Rights. Their function includes protection and promotion of Human Rights.

Following steps have been taken in India for the protection of ‘Human Rights’:
1. Establishment of Human Rights: Indian Constitution has established six human rights. Indian citizens have the right to writ five petitions for the protection of these human rights in the court.

2. Establishment of a Commission for ‘Human Rights’: For the protection of ‘Human Rights’-Indian Constitution has established a commission for ‘Human Rights’.

3. Establishment of Commission for Scheduled Tribes and Scheduled Castes: For the protection of Human Rights of Scheduled Tribes and Scheduled Castes a special Commission is established.

4. National Women Commission: For the security and safety of women’s rights National Women Commission has been established.

5. National Minority Commission: For the security of rights of minorities a “Minority Commission’ is also established.

6. Independent Judiciary. Independent judiciary works like chowkidar for the protection of ‘Human Rights’. Thus independent judiciary is the strongest step for the protection of all Human Rights.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 2.
Discuss the functions of National Human Rights Commission.
Answer:
National Human Rights Commission performs the following functions under the Human Rights Protection Act 1993.

  • To investigate complaints regarding the violation of Human Rights.
  • To investigate the failure on the part of any public official in respect of his duties for preventing a violation of Human Rights.
  • Commission encouraged the functions of non-government institutions for the protection of Human Rights.
  • To review the steps taken under the Constitution or law for protecting the Human Rights and to make recommendations for making such steps more effective.
  • To encourage research in the field of human rights.
  • To visit jails and to examine the conditions of living of the persons undergoing imprisonments or under detentions.
  • To study the international treaties and conventions and try to give it practical shape.
  • To spread knowledge among various classes of people about their human rights.
    To prepare necessary programmes for the development of human rights.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 3.
What do you mean by Disarmament? Discuss the necessity of Disarmament in present world.
Answer:
Present age is an age of Science. Today, armaments and war, because of their totally destructive power, have come to be regarded as the biggest dangers to mankind. The havoc caused by the two World Wars convinced the people over the world that if humanity is to be saved from complete annihilation, something should be done to reduce or limit certain or all types of armaments.

Meaning and Definition of Disarmament:
In simple language the term disarmament is used for reduction or elimination of armaments. In actual practice, it has come to mean everything from total elimination of all the weapons to the regulation or control of only some kind of (offensive and totally destructive) weap¬ons. Disarmament includes everything which has to do something with the limitation, reduction, abolition or control of certain or all armaments through the voluntary agreement of two or more states.

1. According to Morgenthau, “Disarmament is the reduction or elimination of certain or all armaments for the purpose of ending the armament race.”

2. According to V.V. Dyke, “Any regulation or limitation have to do with armed power is treated as a measure of disarmament.”

3. According to Jacob and Atherton, “disarmament seeks to establish conditions that will assure a country that others are neither intending to attack it or capable of doing so, at least in the immediate future. The strategy is to unwind rather then to build up a confrontation of armed forces.”

In its absolute sense, disarmament requires the global destruction of weapons and the dis-establishment of all armed forces. General disarmament means a kind of disarmament in which all the nations participate whereas local disarmament means disarmament by a limited number of nations.

Need and Necessity of Disarmament:
Disarmament is needed due to following reasons:
1. World Peace and Security:
World peace and security is possible only by disarmament. Armaments lead to armament race and armament race leads to war. Arms race can itself be the cause of bloody and costly wars. Disarmament is the most effective means or preventing war and maintaining peace.

2. Disarmament reduces International Tension:
Disarmament reduces international tensions whereas arms race increases international tensions and international tensions encourage war. Disarmament can certainly check the growing war hysteria in international relations.

3. Reduces the Destructiveness of War: Disarmament is needed as it reduces the sufferings and destructiveness of war.

4. Helpful in Economic Development:
Disarmament is needed because it is very helpful in economic development. By disarmament states can save a very large amount of funds and that money can be used for the welfare and economic development of the people of the states. In the timeless dilemma of choosing between ‘guns and butter’, the advocates of arms reduction opt for the latter. It is argued that even if a small portion of millions of dollars now spent on armament everyday is transferred to economic development the world would be entirely different.

5. Helpful in ending Colonialism and Imperialism:
Armaments encouraged Imperialism and Colonialism because states having big stocks of arms used arms for expanding their territories. Hence disarmament is very helpful in ending Colonialism and Imperialism.

6. Moral Reasons:
Disarmament is needed for moral reasons also. Philosophically most solid argument is that war is morally wrong and hence armaments as the means of war are also evil. It is always rational and moral to nip the evil in the bud. Thus elimination of war demands the elimination of arms and armament races.

7. Social Reasons:
Disarmament is also needed due to social reasons. Money saved by disarmament can be utilised for solving the problems of poverty, hunger, disease, illiteracy, housing etc.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 4.
What do you understand by the concept of Globalization? Discuss its main features.
Or
What do you mean by Globalization? Explain four features of Globalization in India.
Answer:
In the late 20th century the revolution in the means of communication has changed the world in ‘global village’ by lessening its distances. It has encouraged the emergence of world society. Although the concept of globalisation became popular in the last phase of the 20th century but its background is quite old. The ill effects of the two world wars on the rich nations led them to think about the ways and means of coming out of the economic recession.

To achieve this aim they made full use of the international organisations such as General Agreement on Trade and Tariff, World Trade Organisation, International Monetary Fund and World Bank etc. All these organisations brought the countries of world close to each other. Martin Shaw has observed, “Society has been globalised not because human beings thought or act 1 globally, but because in pursuit of other suit – profit, power communication worldwide connectedness has developed.”

Definition and Meaning of Globalization:
Scholars differ regarding the meaning of globalization. Their views are given below:
1. According to Anthony Giddens, “Globalisation means the intensification of world-wide social relations which link distant localities in such a way that local happenings shaped events occurring many miles away and vice-versa.”

2. According to Robertson, “Globalisation is a concept that refers to the compression of the world and the intensification of the consciousness of the world as a whole.”

3. According to Mild and McGrew, “Globalisation refers to a historical process which transforms the spatial organisation of social relations and transactions, generating, transcontinental or inter-regional networks of interaction and the exercise of power.”:

In general we can say that globalisation is a process by which the planet Earth is:
considered to be one single unit where social and economic interaction among the people are based on interdependence. The world is considered to be a global village with global issues and problems likely to be talked with global efforts and co-operation. Globalisation can also be explained as globalisation of world market and to link the economy of all the countries of the world with world market. It is also manifest in the rapid flow of information capital and goods. Different cultures and societies have come face to face with each other.

It has created global electronic communications. Observing the impact of globalization Martin Shaw said, “With the development of global relations, the understanding of human relations in common world wide frame comes to predominate over other, more partial understanding.”

Thus, globalization is a step towards one world, one state and to strengthen the world peace. It is a step towards socio-economic, scientific and technological development of the whole mankind. It has made easier to solve the world problems.

Features of Globalization: Globalization is a multi-dimensional phenomenon-
It’s features are as given below:
1. Global Economy:
Global economy is the most important feature of globalization. In the process of globalization, it has been observed that national economies have been integrated into global economy. Trade has come out of national boundaries. Global economy promotes international harmony.

2. Expansion of Industrialisation and MNC’s:
Expansion of industrialisation is another feature of globalisation. Globalisation has increased the value of multi-national business organisations. The output of multi-national corporations is more than a state corporation, that’s why now MNC’s dominate the world market. The notable examples of MNC’s are General Motors and Ford in the automotive industry. ESSO, Shelt and B.P. in Oil industry, McDonald’s fast food-chain AT & T, and International News Corporation in the communication sector.

3. World Wide Institutions:
Establishment of world wide institutions is one of the features of globalisation. Globalisation has brought the countries of the world close to each other. These countries have formed institutions those have global appeal and those work to resolve global problems such as U.N.O. It is an international system of states and they are committed to the cause of universal welfare and upliftment. U.N.O. tries to fight against natural calamities as well as man-made problems.

4. Global Movements:
Global movements is the another feature of globalisation. The members of the global village have come out of their national boundries and fences and started thinking about welfare in broader terms including national and international concern. Women’s liberation movement has been launched on global level. Various other global movements have been launched to eradicate economic inequality, environment problems and armaments.

5. Competitive Economy:
Competitive economy is another important aspect of globalisation. The developing countries are trying to compete with the developed countries. The developed countries are trying to advance and strengthen their economy more and more and developing countries are trying to improve their performance, products and industries to compete with the industry of developed countries.

6. World Trade Organisation:
The emergence of WTO is another feature of globalisation. WTO is an indication of globalisation process. Martin Shaw observes that although, “The WTO remains dominated by the west and is partly a forum for resolving intra-western economic differences, it is now more or less universally accepted as the frame work for regulating trade, as China’s admission in 1999 recognised.”

7. The declining relevance of geographical distance and the insignificance of territorial boundries is the feature of globalisation.

8. International Law for the security of international peace and to resolve trade problems is another important aspect of globalisation.

9. Increase of Foreign Investment in countries is another feature of the process of globalisation.

10. Technological Innovations is another feature of globalisation.

11. Information Revolution is an important aspect of globalisation. Information technology has brought countries closer.

Thus, the process of globalisation has changed the world scenario. It has brought nations closer to each other and has formed world wide society.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 5.
What do you mean by Globalisation? Why India adopted the policy of Globalisation?
Answer:
Meaning of Globalisation:
In the late 20th century the revolution in the means of communication has changed the world in ‘global village’ by lessening its distances. It has encouraged the emergence of world society. Although the concept of globalisation became popular in the last phase of the 20th century but its background is quite old. The ill effects of the two world wars on the rich nations led them to think about the ways and means of coming out of the economic recession.

To achieve this aim they made full use of the international organisations such as General Agreement on Trade and Tariff, World Trade Organisation, International Monetary Fund and World Bank etc. All these organisations brought the countries of world close to each other. Martin Shaw has observed, “Society has been globalised not because human beings thought or act 1 globally, but because in pursuit of other suit – profit, power communication worldwide connectedness has developed.”

Definition and Meaning of Globalization:
Scholars differ regarding the meaning of globalization. Their views are given below:
1. According to Anthony Giddens, “Globalisation means the intensification of world-wide social relations which link distant localities in such a way that local happenings shaped events occurring many miles away and vice-versa.”

2. According to Robertson, “Globalisation is a concept that refers to the compression of the world and the intensification of the consciousness of the world as a whole.”

3. According to Mild and McGrew, “Globalisation refers to a historical process which transforms the spatial organisation of social relations and transactions, generating, transcontinental or inter-regional networks of interaction and the exercise of power.”:

In general we can say that globalisation is a process by which the planet Earth is:
considered to be one single unit where social and economic interaction among the people are based on interdependence. The world is considered to be a global village with global issues and problems likely to be talked with global efforts and co-operation. Globalisation can also be explained as globalisation of world market and to link the economy of all the countries of the world with world market. It is also manifest in the rapid flow of information capital and goods. Different cultures and societies have come face to face with each other.

It has created global electronic communications. Observing the impact of globalisation Martin Shaw said, “With the development of global relations, the understanding of human relations in common world wide frame comes to predominate over other, more partial understanding.”

Thus, globalisation is a step towards one world, one state and to strengthen the world peace. It is a step towards socio-economic, scientific and technological development of the whole mankind. It has made easier to solve the world problems.

Features of Globalization: Globalization is a multi-dimensional phenomenon-
It’s features are as given below:
1. Global Economy:
Global economy is the most important feature of globalisation. In the process of globalisation, it has been observed that national economies have been integrated into global economy. Trade has come out of national boundaries. Global economy promotes international harmony.

2. Expansion of Industrialisation and MNC’s:
Expansion of industrialisation is another feature of globalisation. Globalisation has increased the value of multi-national business organisations. The output of multi-national corporations is more than a state corporation, that’s why now MNC’s dominate the world market. The notable examples of MNC’s are General Motors and Ford in the automotive industry. ESSO, Shelt and B.P. in Oil industry, McDonald’s fast food-chain AT & T, and International News Corporation in the communication sector.

3. World Wide Institutions:
Establishment of world wide institutions is one of the features of globalisation. Globalisation has brought the countries of the world close to each other. These countries have formed institutions those have global appeal and those work to resolve global problems such as U.N.O. It is an international system of states and they are committed to the cause of universal welfare and upliftment. U.N.O. tries to fight against natural calamities as well as man-made problems.

4. Global Movements:
Global movements is the another feature of globalisation. The members of the global village have come out of their national boundries and fences and started thinking about welfare in broader terms including national and international concern. Women’s liberation movement has been launched on global level. Various other global movements have been launched to eradicate economic inequality, environment problems and armaments.

5. Competitive Economy:
Competitive economy is another important aspect of globalisation. The developing countries are trying to compete with the developed countries. The developed countries are trying to advance and strengthen their economy more and more and developing countries are trying to improve their performance, products and industries to compete with the industry of developed countries.

6. World Trade Organisation:
The emergence of WTO is another feature of globalisation. WTO is an indication of globalisation process. Martin Shaw observes that although, “The WTO remains dominated by the west and is partly a forum for resolving intra-western economic differences, it is now more or less universally accepted as the frame work for regulating trade, as China’s admission in 1999 recognised.”

7. The declining relevance of geographical distance and the insignificance of territorial boundries is the feature of globalisation.

8. International Law for the security of international peace and to resolve trade problems is another important aspect of globalisation.

9. Increase of Foreign Investment in countries is another feature of the process of globalisation.

10. Technological Innovations is another feature of globalisation.

11. Information Revolution is an important aspect of globalisation. Information technology has brought countries closer.

Thus, the process of globalisation has changed the world scenario. It has brought nations closer to each other and has formed world wide society.

Why India Adopted the Policy of Globalisation:
Following are the factors responsible for India’s globalisation policy:

  • India’s economy will become competitive due to globalisation policy.
  • Foreign Wealth and technique both will be imported in India due to globalisation and this will be helpful for the development of India.
  • The policy of globalisation will encourage a good competition in production and consumers will get better quality of production.
  • With the globalisation process Indian economy will automatically link with the world economy and it will be beneficial for Indian economy.
  • Industrial development will take place due to globalisation.
  • Globalisation will create more employment.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 6.
What do you mean by Globalisation? Discuss the demerits of policy of Globalisation adopted by India.
Answer:
Meaning of Globalisation:
In the late 20th century the revolution in the means of communication has changed the world in ‘global village’ by lessening its distances. It has encouraged the emergence of world society. Although the concept of globalisation became popular in the last phase of the 20th century but its background is quite old. The ill effects of the two world wars on the rich nations led them to think about the ways and means of coming out of the economic recession.

To achieve this aim they made full use of the international organisations such as General Agreement on Trade and Tariff, World Trade Organisation, International Monetary Fund and World Bank etc. All these organisations brought the countries of world close to each other. Martin Shaw has observed, “Society has been globalised not because human beings thought or act 1 globally, but because in pursuit of other suit – profit, power communication worldwide connectedness has developed.”

Definition and Meaning of Globalization:
Scholars differ regarding the meaning of globalization. Their views are given below:
1. According to Anthony Giddens, “Globalisation means the intensification of world-wide social relations which link distant localities in such a way that local happenings shaped events occurring many miles away and vice-versa.”

2. According to Robertson, “Globalisation is a concept that refers to the compression of the world and the intensification of the consciousness of the world as a whole.”

3. According to Mild and McGrew, “Globalisation refers to a historical process which transforms the spatial organisation of social relations and transactions, generating, transcontinental or inter-regional networks of interaction and the exercise of power.”:

In general we can say that globalisation is a process by which the planet Earth is:
considered to be one single unit where social and economic interaction among the people are based on interdependence. The world is considered to be a global village with global issues and problems likely to be talked with global efforts and co-operation. Globalisation can also be explained as globalisation of world market and to link the economy of all the countries of the world with world market. It is also manifest in the rapid flow of information capital and goods. Different cultures and societies have come face to face with each other.

It has created global electronic communications. Observing the impact of globalisation Martin Shaw said, “With the development of global relations, the understanding of human relations in common world wide frame comes to predominate over other, more partial understanding.”

Thus, globalisation is a step towards one world, one state and to strengthen the world peace. It is a step towards socio-economic, scientific and technological development of the whole mankind. It has made easier to solve the world problems.

Features of Globalization: Globalization is a multi-dimensional phenomenon-
It’s features are as given below:
1. Global Economy:
Global economy is the most important feature of globalisation. In the process of globalisation, it has been observed that national economies have been integrated into global economy. Trade has come out of national boundaries. Global economy promotes international harmony.

2. Expansion of Industrialisation and MNC’s:
Expansion of industrialisation is another feature of globalisation. Globalisation has increased the value of multi-national business organisations. The output of multi-national corporations is more than a state corporation, that’s why now MNC’s dominate the world market. The notable examples of MNC’s are General Motors and Ford in the automotive industry. ESSO, Shelt and B.P. in Oil industry, McDonald’s fast food-chain AT & T, and International News Corporation in the communication sector.

3. World Wide Institutions:
Establishment of world wide institutions is one of the features of globalisation. Globalisation has brought the countries of the world close to each other. These countries have formed institutions those have global appeal and those work to resolve global problems such as U.N.O. It is an international system of states and they are committed to the cause of universal welfare and upliftment. U.N.O. tries to fight against natural calamities as well as man-made problems.

4. Global Movements:
Global movements is the another feature of globalisation. The members of the global village have come out of their national boundries and fences and started thinking about welfare in broader terms including national and international concern. Women’s liberation movement has been launched on global level. Various other global movements have been launched to eradicate economic inequality, environment problems and armaments.

5. Competitive Economy:
Competitive economy is another important aspect of globalisation. The developing countries are trying to compete with the developed countries. The developed countries are trying to advance and strengthen their economy more and more and developing countries are trying to improve their performance, products and industries to compete with the industry of developed countries.

6. World Trade Organisation:
The emergence of WTO is another feature of globalisation. WTO is an indication of globalisation process. Martin Shaw observes that although, “The WTO remains dominated by the west and is partly a forum for resolving intra-western economic differences, it is now more or less universally accepted as the frame work for regulating trade, as China’s admission in 1999 recognised.”

7. The declining relevance of geographical distance and the insignificance of territorial boundries is the feature of globalisation.

8. International Law for the security of international peace and to resolve trade problems is another important aspect of globalisation.

9. Increase of Foreign Investment in countries is another feature of the process of globalisation.

10. Technological Innovations is another feature of globalisation.

11. Information Revolution is an important aspect of globalisation. Information technology has brought countries closer.

Thus, the process of globalisation has changed the world scenario. It has brought nations closer to each other and has formed world wide society.

Demerits of Globalisation in India. Following are the demerits of policy of globalisation adopted by India:

  • Due to Globalisation multinational companies are interfering in the political system of India.
  • This policy has encouraged economic inequality which has increased the unemployment in India.
  • Critics advocate that this policy is a forceable but not an accepted one. The objective like welfare of all is just out of the scene from this.
  • This is an undemocratic process. This process has weakened the democratic set up by limitation of the labour, limited role of the welfare state.
  • Deduction in subsides etc. by the Government which has indirectly hit the poor category.
  • Globalisation has created a cultural crisis. By it encouragement is given to the Constitutism. The young generation is mad for Pepsi, Coca-cola and other brand of western products.
  • Critics say that the Policy has also influenced the education system, which has established dominance of English language. This education has led to commercialization and has stressed on the markets which has made fall in values and ethics.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write down the composition of National Human Rights Commission.
Or
Write down composition of National Commission for Human Rights.
Answer:
The National Human Rights Commission started on 12th October 1993. It has eight members, a chairperson, a present or former judge of the Supreme Court, a present or former Chief Justice of a High Court; two members knowledgeable in the area of human rights and the chairperson of the National Commission for Women, National Commission for SCs and STs and the National Commission for Minorities. It protects and promotes Human Rights. It looks into the complaints of violation of human rights and works to protect the rights of all the members of society.

Question 2.
Write down four main functions of National Commission for Human Rights.
Or
Write four main functions of National Human Rights Commission.
Answer:
Following are the main functions of National Commission for Human Rights.

  • To investigate complaints regarding the violation of human rights.
  • To investigate the failure on the part of any public officials in respect of his duties for preventing a violation of Human Rights.
  • Commission encouraged the functions of non-government institutions for the protection of human rights.
  • To visit jails and to examine the condition of living of the persons undergoing imprisonments or under detentions.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 3.
What do you mean by Globalisation?
Answer:
The term global literally means, belonging to the globe which in turn implies connected with the natural habitat of humankind i.e., ‘global planet earth’. Globalisation is a process by which the planet earth is considered to be one single unit where social and economic interactions among the people are based on interdependence. The world is considered to be a global village with global issues and problems likely to be solved with global efforts and co-operation. Globalisation can also be explained as globalisation of world market. In simple words, globalisation means free flow of goods, services, people, capital and cultures across national borders. It has created global electronic communications. Globalisation is a step towards one world, one state and to strengthen the world.

Question 4.
What do you mean by Disarmament?
Answer:
Disarmament is the need of present age. The term disarmament is used for reduction or elimination of armaments. In actual practice, it has come to mean everything from total elimination of all the weapons to the regulation or control of only some kind of weapons. Disarmament includes everything which has to do something with the limitation, reduction, abolition or control of certain or all armaments through the voluntary agreement of two or more states. Morgenthau says, “Disarmament is the reduction or elimination of certain or all armaments for the purpose of ending the armament race. In its absolute sense, disarmament requires the global destruction of weapons and the disestablishment of all armed forces.”

Question 5.
Why is disarmament necessary? Give four reasons.
Answer:
Disarmament is necessary due to following reasons:

  • World peace and security. World peace and security is possible only by disarmament.
  • Disarmament reduces International tension. Disarmament reduces international tension whereas arms race increases international tension and international tension encourages war. Disarmament can certainly check the growing war hysteria in international relations.
  • Reduces the destructiveness of war. Disarmament is needed as it reduces the sufferings and destructiveness of war.
  • Money saved by disarmament can be utilised for solving the problems of poverty, hunger, disease, illiteracy, housing etc.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 6.
Mention any four hindrances in the way of Disarmament.
Answer:
Following are the major hindrances in the way of Disarmament:

1. Fear and Security. Nations preferred security than disarmament. Until some system can be evolved whereby nations will be secure with less arms, disarmament will remain a far cry. Fear of insecurity is a big hindrance in the way of disarmament.

2. Faith in Armament. For security of the nations states have more faith in armament than in disarmament.

3. Mutual Distrust. Every state views with suspicion the disarmament proposals put forth by others. Mutual distrust among nations makes it difficult for the international community to go in for disarmament and arms control.

4. The political rivalry between the superpowers served as a stumbling block in the way of disarmament.

Question 7.
What do you mean by New International Economic Order (NIEO)?
Answer:
New International Economic Order constitutes a framework for eliminating the existing era of international economic system which is mostly catering to the needs and interests of the developed countries to the deterrence of the under-developed third world. The NIEO is based on assumption that the prevalent international order perpetuates and aggravates international inequalities and that new relationship of interdependence should replace the order patterns of interdependence and unequal exchange.

NIEO stands for making the international system fairer, just and equitable by adopting a code of conduct for the developed countries. It stands for reducing the gap between the developed countries and under-developed countries. It seeks to end the existing imbalance and inequalities in the economic relationship between the under-developed and developed world.”

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write down the composition of National Human Right Commission.
Answer:
The National Human Rights Commission started on 12th October 1993. It has eight members, a chairperson, a present or former judge of the Supreme Court, a present or former Chief Justice of a High Court; two members knowledgeable in the area of human rights and the chairperson of the National Commission for Women, National Commission for SCs and STs and the National Commission for Minorities.

Question 2.
Explain the term ‘Colonialism’.
Answer:
According to the Western concept, Colonialism is the establishment and maintenance of an extended rule over an alien people that is separate and subordinate to the ruling power. It implies rule over people of different races inhabiting lands separated by salt waters from the imperial centre.

Question 3.
Explain the meaning of the term Cold War.
Answer:
After Second World War, cold war started between U.S.A. and U.S.S.R. A cold war is a state of tension between countries in which each side adopts policies designed to strengthen itself and weaken the other. A line falling short of actual hot war. The cold war has been a predominant factor in determining the conduct of international affairs in post-second world war.

Question 4.
What do you mean by Disarmament?
Answer:
The term disarmament is used for reduction or elimination of armaments. In actual practice, it has come to mean everything from total elimination of all the weapons to the regulation or control of only some kind of weapons. Disarmament includes everything which has to do something with the limitation, reduction, abolition or control of certain or all armaments through the voluntary agreement of two or more states.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 5.
Why is disarmament necessary? Give two reasons.
Answer:
1. World peace and security. World peace and security is possible only by disarmament.

2. Disarmament reduces International tension. Disarmament reduces international tension whereas arms race increases international tension and international tension encourages war. Disarmament can certainly check the growing war hysteria in international relations.

Question 6.
Write two obstacles in the way of Disarmament.
Answer:
1. Fear and Security. Nations preferred security than disarmament. Until some system can be evolved whereby nations will be secure with less arms, disarmament will remain a far cry. Fear of insecurity is a big hindrance in the way of disarmament.

2. Faith in Armament. For security of the nations states have more faith in armament than in disarmament.

Question 7.
What do you mean by New International Economic Order (NIEO)?
Answer:
The NIEO is based on assumption that the prevalent international order perpetuates and aggravates international inequalities and that new relationship of interdependence should replace the order patterns of interdependence and unequal exchange. NIEO stands for making the international system fairer, just and equitable by adopting a code of conduct for the developed countries.

Question 8.
Write down any two basic principles of New International Economic Order.
Answer:
Following are the main principles of New International Economic Order:

1. NIEO is based on, the principles of sovereign equality of states, territorial integrity and non-interference in the internal affairs of other states.

2. NIEO is based on the principle of co-operation of all the member-states of the international community.

Question 9.
Write down any two Human Rights mentioned in Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
Answer:
1. Right to Liberty and Equality. According to Article of Human Rights Declaration, all human beings are free by birth.

2. Equality before Law and Equal Protection of Law. Human Rights Declaration guarantees all persons equality before law and equal protection of laws. All human beings should have the right to an effective judicial remedy.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 10.
Discuss the importance of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
Answer:
Following points show the importance of this declaration :
1. The Declaration of Human Rights has exercised profound influence on the constitution of new nations. The Declaration also deeply affected treaties and agreements between the nations.

2. The Declaration has served a very useful purpose at the international level. The Declaration has been often cited in support of human rights.

Question 11.
Mention any two defects of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights.
Answer:
1. The Declaration of Human Rights lacks legality. This is not a legal declaration but a moral document. No legal sanction can be imposed on member states for the violation of the declaration.

2. This Declaration is neither any international policy nor any agreement.

Question 12.
Name any four Human Rights.
Answer:

  1. Right to life
  2. Right to freedom
  3. Right to work
  4. Right to family.

Question 13.
Explain any two merits of globalization.
Answer:

  • Globalisation gives rise to the worldwide information, which has effected every class of society. This has encouraged the social mobility.
  • Possibilities of employment in Multinational companies have increased.

Question 14.
Name two nuclear treaties on which India refused to sign.
Answer:

  1. N.P.T.
  2. C.T.B.T.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

One Line Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain the meaning of Human Rights.
Answer:
According to Laski, rights are those conditions of social life without which no man can seek himself to be at his best or make full growth.

Question 2.
What do you mean by Disarmament?
Answer:
Disarmament means the abolition of all material and human resources, for physical violence. Any control or restriction on military power is called as disarmament.

Question 3.
Why is disarmament necessary?
Answer:
During the cold war, both the sides developed modem weapons. If all these weapons are not destroyed through disarmament, they can prove detrimental to human race.

Question 4.
Give one difficulty in the way of Disarmament.
Answer:
The great powers have lust for modernisation of weapons.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 5.
What is the meaning of New International Economic Order?
Answer:
New International Economic Order means to provide food-items to the developing countries and to migrate resources from the developed countries to the developing countries.

Question 6.
What do you mean by Globalisation?
Answer:
Globalisation means the unhindered flow of material, service, capital and intellectual property-from one country to another.

Question 7.
Write one effect of Globalisation on India.
Answer:
Because of Globalisation, the investment of foreign capital has increased in India. It has generated new opportunities of employment.

Question 8.
‘Initiative of Six Nations’ Conference was held in.
Answer:
‘Initiative of Six Nations’ Conference was held in 1985.

Question 9.
Give one argument in favour of Globalisation.
Answer:
Because of Globalisation, the dependence of developing countries on International Monetary Fund and World Bank has reduced.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 10.
When is the Human Rights Day celebrated every year?
Answer:
Human Rights Day is celebrated on 10th December every year.

Question 11.
Name the forms of Disarmament
Answer:

  1. Complete Disarmament,
  2. Partial Disarmament,
  3. Compulsory Disarmament,
  4. Voluntary Disarmament,
  5. Unilateral Disarmament,
  6. Bilateral Disarmament.

Fill in The Blanks

1. National Human Rights Commission was established on
Answer:
12 Oct. 1993

2. New International Economic Order means to provide food to
Answer:
Developing Countries

3. Initiative of Six Nations Confrence was held in
Answer:
1985

4. India is committed to the use of Nuclear Energy for purposes
Answer:
Peaceful

5. India is fully committed to the rights and liberties included in the Declaration of Human Rights
Answer:
U.N.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

True Or False Statement

1. Disarmament means the total abolition of arms.
Answer:
True.

2. Due to Globalisation, the investment of foreign capital has increased in India.
Answer:
True.

3. Human Rights Day is celebrated on 10th December.
Answer:
True.

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
The National Human Rights Commission was formed on
(a) 12 October, 1991
(b)12 October, 1992
(c) 12 October, 1993
(d)12 October, 1994.
Answer:
(c) 12 October, 1993

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 2.
Main problems of world are
(a) Terrorism
(b) Problem of Human Rights
(c) Problem of Disarmament
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of Above.

Question 3.
Main hindrances in the way of disarmament are :
(a) Fear and Security
(b) Faith in armament
(c) Mutual distrust
(d) All of Above.
Answer:
(d) All of Above.

Question 4.
When was ‘Six Nations Initiative Conference’ held ?
(a) 1985
(b) 1986
(c) 1990
(d) 1991.
Answer:
(a) 1985

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 19 India’s Approach to Major World Issues

Question 5.
World Trade Organisation was formed on
(a) 24 October, 1945
(b)1 January, 1995
(c) 10 December, 1948
(d) 29 April, 1954..
Answer:
(b)1 January, 1995

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Political Science Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Examine Indo-American relationship.
Or
Analyse India’s relations with U.SA.
Answer:
India’s relations with America were not friendly in the beginning. America intended to dominate India and so adopted the policy of pressure and assistance. Both the countries differed from each other because of the following reasons:

1. Different Views:
The main cause of the tense relations between both the countries was their varied attitudes towards international communism and colonialism.

2. India’s policy of non-alignment:
When India became free, America and Russia had inimical relations. America expected India to join its bloc like other newly liberated countries.

3. Kashmir:
When the Kashmir issue was put forth in the U.N.O. in December, 1947 because of Pak aggression, America fully supported Pakistan. This attitude was completely opposed to the spirit of justice.

4. Recognition of Communist China:
When Communist China came into existence, America didn’t want India to grant recognition to China. But India recognised China in December, 1949.

5. Korean War: America didn’t approve India’s policy in case of Korean War.

6. Military Assistance by America to Pakistan:
America signed a military pact with Pakistan in 1954 and started providing military assistance to Pakistan on the pretext of stopping expansion of communism by using war- weapons. But the wars which took place in 1965 and 1971 proved that these weapons were used against India.

Pt. Nehru visited America in 1957, and consequently, relations between both the countries improved. Eisenhower, the President of America, paid a visit to India in Dec., 1959, to strengthen friendly ties. President Eisenhower signed an agreement with India’s Food Minister S.K. Patil in Washington on 4th May, 1960.

Indo-American relations during Lai Bahadur Shastri Period (1964-65):
The Indo-Pak War of 1965 completely worsened relations between India and America because Pakistan used the American military aid against India. America didn’t check it, and rather favoured Pakistan. America sympathised with India at the sudden death of Shri Shastri at Tashkent.

Indo-American relations during Indira Period (From 1966 to March 1977):
Mrs. Gandhi became the Prime Minister of India on 16th Jan., 1966 after the death of Shri Shastri. Mrs. Gandhi visited America on 18th March, 1966, but the visit didn’t prove fruitful.

The year 1971 proved worst for Indo-American relations because of Bangladesh issue. America supported Pakistan on Bangladesh issue. The Government of India emphatically condemned the unfriendly attitude of America on 7th Aug., 1971. The ‘foreign policy of America suffered a great set-back as India signed a friendship treaty with Russia on 9th Aug., 1971.

America presented anti-India resolution before the Security Council during Indo-Pak war but Russia exercised its veto power. America sent its Seventh Fleet in the Bay of Bengal to pressurise India. But Russian Naval forces warned America by declaring that it would not tolerate any action against India. Afterwards, when India was reckoned as a great power in South Asia after winning Bangladesh war, America stopped giving economic assistance to India.

Janata Government and Indo-American Relations:
President Jimmy Carter visited India in January, 1978 and had discussions with Indian leaders. The Government of India valued this visit the most and extended a warm welcome to President Carter.
Prime Minister Morar Ji Desai and External Affairs Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee visited America in June, 1978 and President Carter assured them to supply uranium to India.

Indo-U.S. Relations During 1980-85:
In December, 1980 the U.S. President Mr. Ronald Reagan, affirmed the desire of his administration to forge closer ties with India. Prime Minister, Mrs. Indira Gandhi’s visit to U.SA. In July 1982, Mrs. Gandhi visited U.S.A. The U.S.A. and India reached a compromise so that India could keep getting nuclear fuel for Tarapur Atomic Power Plant. The agreement ended a dispute that had soured relations between the two countries for four years.

In June 1985, Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi visited U.S.A. Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi and President Reagan urged all governments to take appropriate steps to combat the ‘new danger of organised terrorism’ which they noted was a ‘threat to peace and democracy’. With regard to science and technology collaboration, Mr. Rajiv Gandhi and Mr. Reagan decided to initiate two new efforts.

Prime Minister Narasimha Rao Visits U.S.A. :
Prime Minister Narasimha Rao visited U.SA. in May, 1994. American President Bill Clinton expressed satisfaction with his wide ranging talks with Narasimha Rao and described his meeting with the Indian Prime Minister as productive. The American President extended full support to the Prime Minister in economic reforms and the liberalisation process and dubbed them as an ‘engine of growth’ for building new bilateral economic relations and giving India a ‘rightful place’ in the comity of nations as a major economic power.

Nuclear Proliferation Treaty and CTBT:
The Nuclear Proliferation Treaty was given permanent and indefinite expansion in May, 1995, but India refused to sign the treaty. India firmly vetoed the draft text of the controversial CTBT on the ground that it did not serve the purpose of promoting the realisation of the universal disarmament.

Nuclear Tests and Relations With U.S A-
India conducted five nuclear tests at Pokhran, three on May 11, 1998 and two on May 13, 1998 in order to develop a full- fledged nuclear deterrent to safeguard India’s security. American President Bill Clinton ordered tough sanctions against India in retaliation for its underground nuclear tests. The sanctions include an end to U.S. assistance to India, a prohibition of the export of certain defence and technology material, an end to U.S. credit and credit guarantee to India etc. Mr. Jaswant Singh, special emissary of Prime Minister, visited America in June, 1998 and held talks with U.S. Deputy Secretary of State Strobe Talbott.

On 25th July, 1999 U.S.A. asked Pakistan to pull out its forces from the remaining areas of Kargil and immediately stop acts of terrorism in Jammu and Kashmir, showing for the first time Washington’s greater understanding of India’s concern on cross-border militancy.

U.S. President Bill Clinton’s Visit to India:
On 19th March, 2000 U.S. President Mr. Bill Clinton visited India. India’s tension with Pakistan and nuclear disarmament were the two major issues which dominated Mr. Clinton’s talks with the Prime Minister, Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee.

Both leaders signed a ‘Vision Document’ on the future of Indo-U.S. relations in the new millennium. After signing ‘Vision 2000’, Mr. Clinton described it as laying the foundation for a dynamic and lasting partnership between two growing economic powers. The US President Clinton advised India to move towards nuclear non-proliferation and begin a dialogue with Pakistan to establish a ‘working relationship’ with it.

On 23rd March, 2000 India and U.S.A. entered into agreements worth over $ 1.4 billion on various sectors, including information technology, power and environment. Companies from both sides signed 11 business agreements. President Clinton anounced a $ 5 million aid to India to undertake projects to fight the dreaded Aids and TB diseases. He also announced a $ 10 million U.S. aid package for the development of Internet in rural areas. Describing his visit as ‘remarkable and wonderful’, Mr. Clinton said, “It would help in developing a new partnership at higher levels than in the past 22 years.”

Prime Minister Vajpayee’s Visit to U.SA. :
Prime Minister Vajpayee visited U.S.A. in Sept. 2000. In a stirring speech at the Joint session of U.S. Congress, Mr. Vajpayee spoke of the deleterious impact of cross border terrorism and was emphatic that India and the U.S.A. should close ranks in combating state-sponsored terrorism as distance offered no insulation. The American Congress adopted a resolution unanimously imploring Bill Clinton administration to lift the remaining sanctions against New Delhi. India signed five commercial agreements totalling $ 6 billion in key sectors like power, e-commerce and banking. India’s ties with U.S.A., so goes the Vajpayee strategy, rest on two pillars : anti-terrorism and close economic co-operation.

Sanctions Lifted: On September 23, 2001 President Bush lifted sanctions imposed on India in the wake of 1998 nuclear tests.

Powel’s visit to India:
The Secretary of State Mr. Powell visited India in October 2001 and expressed support to India’s fight against terrorism. He endorsed the Indian stand that the Kashmir issue could not be resolved on the basis of a two-nation theory. On October 17, 2001 the two countries signed a new bilateral treaty on Mutual Legal Assistance in criminal matters.

Prime Minister Vajpayee’s Visit to U.S.A. :
Prime Minister Vajpayee visited U.S.A in November 2001. Prime Minister Vajpayee and President Bush pledged to fight terrorism. Mr. Bush said that his administration is committed to develop a fundamentally different relationship with India, one based upon trust and mutual values.

Indo-US Relations in the year 2004:
In January 2004 taking a step ahead towards co-operation India and U.S. has agreed to increase co-operation on three issues-civilian nuclear programme, civilian space programmes and high technology.

Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh’s Visit to U.S.A. :
In July 2005 Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh visited United States. India and U.S.A. sign 10 years defence agreement.
Nuclear Deal. United States had agreed to the nuclear deal with India because both sides stood to benefit from it.

Bush Signs US-India Nuclear Bill. U.S. :President George W. Bush on 18 December, 2006 signed the historic legislation allowing Civilian Nuclear Trade with India.

Indo-U.S. Civil Nuclear Co-operation Agreement 2008:
The Indo-U.S. Civil Nuclear Co-operation agreement consists of 22 pages and 17 articles. The agreement will remain in force for 40 years. The purpose of the agreement is to enable full civil nuclear energy co-operation between India and the United States. This agreement would help to address the problem of energy deficit that has emerged as one of the primary constraints on accelerating India’s growth rate. The agreement does not hinder India’s military nuclear programme and provides for uninterrupted supply of fuel.

India Signs Naval Reconnaissance Deal with U.S.A. :
India-U.S. defence co-operation received a big boost with India formalising a mega deal with U.S.A. for the supply of eight long-range naval-reconnaissance aircraft. This deal will fill a vital gap in India’s maritime domain awareness and will be followed by another deal for medium range maritime reconnaissance planes.

Purchasing the sophisticated reconnaissance aircraft from the U.S.A. : instead of from Russia despite the fact that the latter was the old supplier of the same aircraft to India there seems a clear cut shift in India’s focus from Russia to U.S.A.

Barack Obama 44th President of the U.S.A. :
20th January, 2009 witnessed a new dawn of history in the U.S.A. when Barack Obama took oath as the 44th President and dismantling racial barriers as the first black leader of a country.

In Nov., 2009 Indian Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh visited U.S.A. where he held meeting with President of U.S.A., Mr. Barack Obama. In their Joint Declaration, both leaders announced to abolish terrorist Camps which were activated in Pakistan and Afghanistan. In Nov. 2010 U.S. President Barack Obama visited India. During his visit, Obama supported India’s claims for permanent member seat in U.N. Security Council.

Prime Minister Manmohan Singh and American President Obama meet on September 28, 2013 at White House:
The U.S. and India sought more intensive engagement on a gamut of issues, including defence, security, bilateral trade and efforts to dismantle terrorist safe havens and promote clean energy. Both leaders emphasised the need for more intensive defence cooperation. Defence trade between the two nations has reached nearly $9 billion. The U.S. and Indian sought expansion of cooperation to address 21st century challenges in the areas of counter-terrorism, cyber, space and global health security.

Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narender Modi and American President Obama met in September 2014:
During this meeting, both leaders discussed Terrorism, Trade and Civil Nuclear Agreement. In Jan. 2015, American President visited India. During this visit both countries discussed Civil NuLcear Deal and other economic and world issues. In June 2016 and 2017, Indian Prime Minister visited U.S.A. During this visit both countries discussed bilateral Trade, Regional Security clean energy and climate change.

In Sept. 2019, Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narender Modi visited U.S.A, to attend U.N.O. conference. During this visit the U.S.A. President Donald Trump attented ‘Howdy Modi’ Programme on 24 Sept. 2019. Dining their joint press conference, both leaders showed concern on Terrorism and climate change. In Feb. 2020, American president Sh. Donald Trump visited India During this visit both countries discussed Biletral trade, climate change and terrorism.
This shows that both the countries are doing their level best to maintain healthy and lasting relationship.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 2.
What are the main six points of disagreement between India and U.S.A.?
Answer:
Following are the main issues of disagreement between India and U.S.A.
1. Different Views:
International Communism and Colonialism are the subjects of disagreements and differences between the two countries.

2. Policy of Non-Alignment:
Policy of Non-Alignment is another issue of disagreement between India and U.S.A. U.S.S.R. and U.S.A. were not having co-ordial relations at the time of India’s independence in 1947. America was eager to have India in its group, whereas India adopted a policy of Non¬Alignment and it was not appreciated by U.S.A.

3. Kashmir Issue:
Kashmir issue remained a main issue of disagreement between both the countries, as U.S.A. always sided with Pakistan and it is never relished by India.

4. Recognition of Communist China: India gave recognition to Communist China in 1949. U.S.A. did not favour this act of India.

5. Korean War: U.S.A. disagreed with India’s attitude toward Korean War.

6. Military Assistance to Pakistan: U.S.A. is continuously assisting Pakistan with military help and India has always disliked this assistance of Pakistan by U.S.A.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 3.
Describe in detail Indo-Russia Relations.
Answer:
After the disintegration of the U.S.S.R. in December 1991, Russia emerged as the legal successor state of the former super power in world politics. Russian President Yeltsin assured, the Indian Prime Minister P.V. Narasimha Rao that Russia’s relationship and co-operation with India would continue. In early 1992 India and Russia took first firm steps to rebuild economic relations. The decision to end Rupee trade and to switch over to hard currencies was taken. Russia also favoured strategic co-operation with India. Russia also decided to supply another three million tonnes of oil to India in 1993. Indian Defence Minister Sharad Pawar visited Russia and Russia agreed to finance both trade and defence projects.

Visit of Russian President Boris Yeltsin:
In the last week of January, 1993, Russian President Boris Yeltsin visited India. President Yeltsin announced that Russia would support India in the United Nations’ Security Council bn the Kashmir issue. India and Russia agreed to co-ordinate their activities and exchange information and experience to combat different manifestations of terrorism, organised crime and illegal arms trade. The signing of a new Treaty of Friendship and co-operation was designed to guide the path of Indo-Russian relations in the next 20 years.

P.M. Narasimha Rao’s Visit to Russia:
In June, 1994, the then P.M. Narasimha Rao visited Russia. The visit produced two significant declarations and nine agreements. Both the countries denounced the efforts to weaken the unity of pluralisation states through religious extremism. Both agreed to jointly fight the forces of aggressive nationalism and religious fanaticism. The agreement signed related to increased defence co-operation, extension of the $ 830 million defence credit, peaceful space research, etc.

Russian P.M.’s Visit to India:
In December, 1994, the Russian Prime Minister visited India and during his visit, India and Russia signed 8 agreements covering such vital areas as defence, technology and space exploration. Russia assured India that it has no desire to supply arms to Pakistan. The Russian leader voiced support for India’s demand for a permanent seat in the UN Security Council.

P.M. H.D. Deve Gowda’s Visit to Russia:
In March, 1997, the Indian P.M. led a powerful delegation to Russia for holding Summit level talks with Russian President and other top leaders. P.M. Gowda and Russian President Boris Yeltsin declared their commitment to further strengthen their bilateral co-operation. The Prime Ministers of both the countries further cemented this foundation by concluding bilateral agreements for checking double tarriffs, co-operation in respect of custom matters and promotion of cultural and sports co-operation.

India, Russia Sign N-Pact:
On 21st June, 1998, in a far reaching nuclear deal, India and Russia signed an accord for construction of two 1000 mw light-water nuclear power reactors at Kudankulam in Tamil Nadu.

Russian P.M.’s visit to India:
In the end of December, 1998, Russian P.M. Yevgeny Primakov visited India. Traditional Indo-Russian relations got a further boost with the two sides signing seven bilateral agreements ranging from military and technical co-operation to a wide array of economic areas. The agreements signed included a long-term agreement on military technical co-operation upto the year 2010, one on extradition treaty, a joint document on development of trade, economic, industrial, finance, science and technology co-operation between the two countries.

Defence Agreement:
On 22nd March, 1999, India and Russia further cemented their defence ties with the signing of defence agreement on training of Indian service officers in military educational institutions of the Russian federation.
In March 2000 Mr. Vladimir Putin was elected President of Russia. On April 15, 2000, President Putin ratified extradition treaty with

India aimed at curbing terrorism:
A senior Russian atomic energy official called for recognition of India and Pakistan as nuclear weapon states. On June 28, 2000, India and Russia decided to set up a commission on Military—Technical Co-operation to impart greater impetus to defence ties and accelerate decision making. India agreed to buy $ 1 billion worth of Russian arms. On June 29, 2000, India and Russia signed a number of agreements on Indo-Russian defence co-operation.

Russian President Vladimir Putin’s Visit to India:
On 2nd October, 2000, President Putin visited India. India and Russia forged a strategic partnership that proposes structured co-operation in the fields of nuclear sciences, defence, space and in fight against international terrorism, separatism, religious extremism, organised crime and illegal drug-trafficking. India and Russia signed 10 agreements to enhance their bilateral ties in various fields.
Russia also declared its unqualified support for India’s permanent membership of an expanded United Nation’s Security Council. On Oct. 4, 2000 a new era dawned in the Indo-Russian defence ties with the two countries signing multi-billion dollar agreements for sale of armaments. They also decided to set up an Inter-governmental Commission on defence and technical co-operation.

Defence Accord:
Indian Foreign and Defence Minister visited Moscow in June 2001. On June 6, India and Russia signed a ‘ground breaking’ accord on bilateral defence co-operation.

Accord on Terrorism:
Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee visited Moscow in November 2001. India and Russia signed the far reaching Moscow Declaration on international terrorism declaring that the struggle against this scourge had become one of the priority tasks of the world community. The two sides reaffirmed the central role of the United Nations in the efforts of the international community in the struggle against terrorism. India and Russia rejected any role for the Taliban, moderate or otherwise, in the post-conflict government structure in Afghanistan.

Visit of Russian Deputy Prime Minister to Delhi (February 2002):
On February 8, 2002 India and Russia signed four key protocols and decided to develop satellite global surveillance system and fifth generation combat aircraft.

Defence Agreement:
On 20th January 2004, India and Russia signed the historic and their biggest ever defence deal of almost ? 7,000 crore. The defence ministers said that the military and technical co-operation between India and Russia has reached a higher level.

Visit of Russian President (Dec. 2004):
Russian President Vladimir Putin visited India in Dec. 2004. India and Russia moved closer vowing to reconcile their positions on two contentious issues of Russian entry into the W.T.O and New Delhi according market economy status to Moscow. The two countries signed 10 agreements and Memorandum of understanding to strengthen bilateral co-operation in banking, energy, space exploration, navigation and visa sectors. Russian President supported India’s Candidature for a permanent seat in U.N. Security Council with veto power.

Visit of Indian Prime Minister to Moscow (December 2005):
Indian Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh visited Moscow on Dec. 6, 2005. Moscow agreed to help India in acquiring the latest nuclear energy generation technology to meet the country’s growing power requirements. India and Russia have identified three key areas—nuclear energy, defence and trade and industry to give special attention to while transforming their buyer-seller relationship into one that aims at joint planning and manufacture of high technology arms and armaments. The agreements have opened the doors for the production of the multi-role transport aircraft and the fifth generation fighter planes which India needed urgently. The new thrust on Joint production has its own significance.

Recent relations between India and Russia:
Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh’s Visit to Russia in Nov. 2007:
Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh visited Russia in November 2007. India and Russia signed four agreements on November 12, 2007.

India and Russia have resolved a long pending issue on utilization of the rupee debt fund totalling ₹ 80 billion for Russian investments and trade and signed an accord on development and production of a multi-role transport aircraft.

At the joint press conference with Russian President Putin, Dr. Manmohan Singh said the two countries have agreed to redouble their efforts to achieve a bilateral trade target of 10 billion dollars by 2010.

Top Priority to ties with India:
Russia’s new foreign policy doctrine assigns priority to relations with India. The passage on India gives greater emphasis to political and economic co-operation between India and Russia.

Uranium from Russia:
Due to Indo-U.S. civilian nuclear agreement India has been successful in clinching a deal with Russia for the supply of 2000 tonnes of uranium from there. With the adequate availability of uranium from Russia, India’s nuclear power plants will now be able to run on nearly full capacity. Russia will also help India in setting up four additional nuclear plants at Kudankulam, where two plants are already functioning with Russian help. Under the accord signed by Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh and Russian President Dmitry Medvedev in New Delhi (7-12-2008), the two countries will work on establishing more such plants keeping in view India’s fast growing energy requirement.

In Dec., 2009: Prime Minister of India Dr. Manmohan Singh visited Russia, where he held talks with Russian President and Prime Minister. During this visit both countries strengthened their military, economic and cultural relations.

In March, 2010: Russian Prime Minister Mr. Valdimir Puntin visited India. During his visit, India and Russia signed a siew of a agreement in by areas like Defence, Nuclear Energy, Petroleum and Aviation.

Visit of Indian Prime Minister to Moscow (2011):
In Dec. 2011, Indian Prime Minister visited Moscow. During his visit, Prime Minister confirmed that India and Russia had concluded negotiations and agreed on terms and conditions for Russian credit for unit 3 and 4 of the Kundalkulam Project.

Visit of Russian President to India:
In Dec. 2012, Russian President Baldimir Putin visited. During this visit, both countries signed 10 pacts related to cooperation and security. ,

Visit of Russian President to India:
In December 2014, Russian President Vladimir Putin visited India. During this visit, both countries signed 20 importaht agreements. In Oct. 2016, Russian President Vladimir Putin visited to attend ‘BRICS’ Summit. During this visit both countries signed 16 Agreements.

In June 2017, Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narendra Modi visited Russia. During this visit, both countries signed 5 agreements.
In Oct. 2018, Russian President Sh. Vladimir Putin visited India. During this visit both countries signed eight important agreements.
In Sept. 2019, Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narendra Modi Visited Russia. During this visit, both countries signed 15 important agreements.

Thus, India-Russia relations are cordial and friendly. Both the nations have always helped each other in the hours of need.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Describe the relations between India and United States of America.
Answer:
The end of the cold war marked significant changes in Indo-US relations. Both the countries realised the importance of each other. They have increased co-operation in various spheres of bilateral relations—economic, political, technological and military. America has recognised the economic strength of India and felt that the economic and political growth of India can never be ignored.

The economic and political potential of India has changed the shape of India’s economic and defence relations with America. But after the nuclear test in 1998 USA imposed sanctions on India. But after Kargil issue, USA recognised the necessity of an international war against terrorism. In Oct, 2008 India and U.S.A. signed Civil Nuclear Agreement. Now USA looks India as the potential part of global surveillance that USA wants to build against terrorism.

Question 2.
Write a note on Indo-American Nuclear Treaty.
Answer:
The Indo-U.S. Civil Nuclear co-operation agreement consist of 22 pages and 17 articles. The agreement will remain in force for 40 years. The purpose of the agreement is to enable full civil nuclear energy co-operation between India and the United States. This agreement would help to address the problem of energy deficit that has emerged as one of the primary constraints on accelerating India’s growth rate. The agreement does not hinder India’s military nuclear programme and provides for uninterrupted supply of fuel.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 3.
What were the main provisions of Indo-Soviet Treaty of 1971?
Answer:
On 19th August 1971, India and Soviet Union signed a treaty of peace, friendship and co-operation. This treaty was for twenty years and its documents were exchanged at Moscow. It led to intimate relations between both the countries. The 1971 treaty was the first political-treaty concluded by India with one of the super powers. There were 12 Articles in this treaty and following were the main among 12 articles:

  • Both the countries are desirous of maintaining and developing the present mutual friendly relations.
  • Both the countries believe that mutual friendship and co-operation will be in the interests of Asia and world peace, apart from the mutual benefit of both the countries.
  • Faith in the peaceful co-existence and co-operation.
  • Solution of international problems with peace and mutual co-operation.

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write a short note on US aid towards Pakistan.
Answer:
America has a soft corner for Pakistan: America has always supported Pakistan against India because India adopted the Non-Aligned Movement against
America’s wish: America provided military alliance to Pakistan, against India, during two Indo-Pak wars of 1965 and 1971.

Question 2.
Write a short note on Post Cold War relationship between India and USA. .
Answer:
The end of the cold war marked significant changes in Indo-US relations. Both the countries realised the importance of each other. They have increased co-operation in various spheres of bilateral relations—economic, political, technological and military. America has recognised the economic strength of India and felt that the economic and political growth of India can never be ignored.

Question 3.
Describe India’s changing relations with the United States of America.
Answer:
1990s heralded a new era in Indo-US relations. The two countries have shown eagerness to improve their relations.

  • In 1999, U.S. Supported India’S Stand On Kargil Issue.
  • In October 2008, India And U.S.A. Signed A Civil Nuclear Co-Operation Agreement.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 4.
What were the main provisions of Indo-Soviet Treaty of 1971?
Answer:

  • Both the countries are desirous of maintaining and developing the present mutual friendly relations.
  • Both the countries believe that mutual friendship and co-operation will be in the interests of Asia and world peace, apart from the mutual benefit of both the countries.

Question 5.
What are the two causes of tension between India and U.S.A.?
Answer:

  • India did not sign Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty (CTBT). For this, American attitude towards India is not positive.
  • Another cause of tension between the two countries is the military assistance by America to Pakistan since Pakistan uses its weapons against India.

Question 6.
Write two main features of Indo-US Civil Nuclear Co-operation Agreement.
Answer:

  1. The agreement between two states (India and U.S.) possessing advanced nuclear technology, both parties having the same benefits and advantages.
  2. The purpose of the agreement is to enable full civil nuclear energy co-operation between India and the United States.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

One Line Answer Type Questions

Question 1
Mention any one main point of the treaty signed between India and Soviet Union in 1971.
Answer:
Both the countries will try their best for the establishment of World Peace and disarmament.

Question 2.
Write one reason for the discordant relations between India and America.
Answer:
American supply of modem weapons to Pakistan.

Question 3.
Write one reason for change in the foreign policy of America in the context of India.
Answer:
India is the largest democratic country of the world.

Question 4.
1, 2, 3 Nuclear treaty was signed between which two countries?
Answer:
India and U.S.A.

Question 5.
Write one cause because of which America needed to be a friend of India.
Answer:
Both America and India are the two big democratic countries of the world.

Question 6.
Mention any one reason for differences between India and America in 1954.
Answer:
In 1954, the main reason for differences between India and America was the problem of Indo-China.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 7.
In which year disintegration of Soviet Union took place?
Answer:
Disintegration of Soviet Union took place in 1991.

Question 8.
What is the importance of Russia for India?
Answer:
Russia is important for India’s Nuclear Energy Plans and India’s space industry.

Fill in The Blanks

1. A very important treaty between India and …………….. was signed in 1971.
Answer:
U.S.S.R.

2. Disintegration of Soviet Union took place in …………….. .
Answer:
1991

3. Both America and …………….. are the two big democratic countries of the world.
Answer:
India

4. During Indo …………….. War of 1971, USSR supported India.
Answer:
Pak.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

True Or False Statement

1. India and America signed friendly treaty in 1971.
Answer:
False

2. Russia is giving no assistance to India’s Nuclear Energy Plan.
Answer:
False

3. India is the largest democratic country in the world.
Answer:
True.

4. India and Russia are having friendly relations.
Answer:
True.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
India and Soviet Union signed friendly treaty in:
(a) 1988
(b) 1971
(c) 2004
(d) 1990.
Answer:
(6)

Question 2.
Disintegration of Soviet Union took place in:
(a) 1989
(b) 1990
(c) 1994
(d) 1991.
Answer:
(d) 1991.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 18 India’s Relations with USA and Russia

Question 3.
Which country is more closer in the context of relationship to India than other?
(a) Pakistan
(6) U.S.A
(c) Russia
(d) France.
Answer:
(c) Russia

Question 4.
When was World Trade Center attacked?
(a) Dec. 13, 2001
(6) Sept. 15, 2002
(c) Sept. 11, 2001
(d) Dec. 25, 2002.
Answer:
(c) Sept. 11, 2001

Question 5.
When was Civil Nuclear Treaty signed between India and U.SA.?
(a) Oct. 2008
(b) Oct, 2009
(c) Oct, 2009
(d) Oct, 2006.
Answer:
(a) Oct. 2008

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Political Science Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Make a survey of Indo-Pak relations.
Or
Explain the relationship between India and Pakistan.
Answer:
India attained freedom on 15th Aug., 1947 but it was partitioned at the same time and so Pakistan came into existence. Pakistan was the result of a policy of ‘Divide and Rule’ of British rulers. Pakistan is India’s neighbouring country and that is why Indo-Pak relations are significant.

Relations between India and Pakistan remained tense because of persistent clashes on the issues of Displaced Property, constitutional place of Indian States, determination of boundary line and disputes over Junagarh, Hyderabad, Kashmir. All the other disputes except Kashmir problem have been solved. Two wars took place between both the countries on Kashmir issue first in 1948, and then in 1965. In 1971, India and Pakistan fought another war on Bangladesh issue.

America supported Pakistan whereas Russia favoured India and used Veto. Mrs. Gandhi announced the origin of the Republic of Bangladesh in Parliament on 6th December. General Niazi signed the documents of surrender on 16th December, 1971 and one lakh Pak-soldiers surrendered. Mrs. Gandhi announced unilateral Ceasefire on 17th December at 8 a.m. and requested Yahya Khan to accept the appeal for ceasefire. India’s victory in war heightened its prestige and badly discouraged Pakistan.

Shimla Conference:
Mrs. Gandhi, without exploiting the defeat of Pakistan, held a summit conference at Shimla in June, 1972 to discuss the problems of both the countries. Pak President Bhutto and Indian Prime Minister Mrs. Indira Gandhi participated in this conference. The agreement was reached between Mrs. Indira Gandhi and Mr. Z.A. Bhutto on 3rd July and it is known as Shimla Agreement.

The Principles of bilateral talks were encouraged after Shimla Agreement.
After the formation of Janata Government in March, 1977, Indo-Pak relations all the more improved.

India’s External Affairs Minister visited Pakistan on 6th Feb., 1978. Shri Vajpayee, then External Affairs Minister coming back from Pakistan said, “It was foggy when we took off but there was sunshine when we landed in Islamabad.”

No War Pact:
On 15th Sept., 1981 Pakistan offered a No War Pact between the two countries. India suggested seven points for a No War Pact between the two countries. Mrs. Gandhi categorically assured Pakistan that India would never attack it, irrespective of whether the two countries signed a non-aggression pact or not.
Joint Commission. On March 10, 1983 foreign ministers of both the countries signed an agreement to set up a Joint Commission. The first meeting of the Joint Commission took place at Islamabad on June 1, 1983. The Joint Commission agreed to reduce the postal rates, provide easier travel facilities to passengers both ways and promote trade, commercial and cultural contacts.

Pact on Drug Trafficking:
On Sept. 10,1993 India and Pakistan signed a Charter of agreements to combat the ever-increasing trafficking in drugs across the border.

Pakistan’s Support to Terrorists:
For almost a decade Pakistan has been fighting a proxy war on India’s blood-shattered border states. Pakistan is giving all sorts of help to Punjab militants and Kashmir terrorists. On February 22, 1994 the Indian Parliament unanimously condemned Pakistan’s abetment of and encouragement to terrorist activities in Kashmir.

Nuclear Tests:
India conducted three underground nuclear tests on May 11, 1998 and two tests were conducted on May 13, 1998. On 28th May, 1998 Pakistan conducted five nuclear tests to equalise the five tests conducted by India.

Indo-Pak Pact on Bus Service:
On Feb. 17, 1999 India and Pakistan signed a formal agreement for launching the Delhi-Lahore bus service. On Feb. 20, 1999 heralding a new ‘Chapter’ in Indo-Pakistan relations the Prime Minister Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee, rode on the bus to Lahore.

Kargil Issue:
After showing limitless patience, India gave a moderate answer on 26th May, 1999 to Pakistan sponsored aggression in the Kargil-Dras sector. Indian government made it very clear that they will continue the operation till ‘our defence forces reoccupy our territory.’ The External Affairs Minister of India, Mr. Jaswant Singh, made it clear to the External Affairs Minister of Pakistan that ‘Aggression has to be undone’. On June 20, 1999, G-8 leaders condemned violation of the line of control and called for an immediate end to fighting in the region and termed as ‘irresponsible’ any military action to change the status quo of the LOC. G-8 leaders asked Pakistan to end infiltration.

Summit between Prime Minister and President, 2001:
In July 2001, the summit between Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee and Pakistan’s President Pervez Musharraf crashed down because the two sides failed to reconcile their differences on the critical Kashmir issue and cross-border terrorism.

Terrorist Attack on Indian Parliament:
On December 13, 2001 terrorists attacked Indian Parliament and 12 persons were killed. Terrorist outfits based in Pakistan-Lashkar-e-Toiba and Jaish-e-Mohammad were responsible for the attack on Parliament.

India Recalls High Commissioner:
On 21st December 2001, India recalled its High Commissioner from Islamabad and terminated the Delhi-Lahore bus service as well as the Samjhauta Express train running between the two countries for the last 25 years. On December 27, 2001 India banned the use of Indian airspace by the Pakistani planes and gave an ultimatum for reduction of its High Commission staff by 50 per cent.

Ban on LeT, Jaish-e-Mohammad:
On January 12, 2002 Pakistan’s President Pervez Musharraf banned the Jaish-e-Mohammad and the Lashkar-e-Toiba but ruled out handing over their leaders to India.

Indian Prime Minister’s Visit to Islamabad:
In January, 2004 the Indian Prime Minister Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee visited Islamabad to attend 12th SAARC summit. Mr. Vajpayee met Pakistani President and Prime Minister during his visit. The conflict between the two countries has reduced during this SAARC summit and both the countries agreed to solve their conflicts with peaceful means and mutual talks.

Indo-Pak Relations in 2004:
After the Indian Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee’s visit to Islamabad in 2004 both the countries have decided to improve their relations. The bus service, train services and air services have been resumed between India and Pakistan.

Pakistani Prime Minister’s Visit to New Delhi (Nov. 24, 2004):
Pakistani Prime Minister Shaukat Aziz visited New Delhi in Nov. 2004. India and Pakistan stuck to their respective state position on Kashmir. But both the countries agreed to set up banks in each other’s country on reciprocal basis.

Bus to Muzaffarabad:
On 16th February, 2005 India and Pakistan agreed to start a bus service between Srinagar and Muzaffarabad from April 7, 2005. Travel will be by entry permit system for all nationals of both countries once identities are verified. Both countries agreed to start a bus service between Amritsar and Lahore and also to religious places such as Nankana Sahib. On April 7, 2005 bus service started between Srinagar and Muzaffarabad.

General Musharraf s Visit (2005):
In April 2005 General Musharraf visited India. The two leaders decided to revive the Indo-Pak Joint Commission. India and Pakistan decided to enlarge economic and commercial ties.

Pact on Ballistic Missiles:
On August 6, 2005 India and Pakistan reached an understanding on the proposed agreement on Pre-Notification of Flight Testing of Ballistic Missiles.

Release of Fishermen and Civilian Prisoners:
On September 12, 2005 India and Pakistan released fishermen and civilian prisoners.

India, Pak exchange relief material:
In November 2005 Indian and Pakistani officials from both sides of the LOC supervised the exchange of relief material for the quake affected population.

Recent relations between India and Pakistan:
Pakistani President General Musharraf declared emergency rule on November 3, 2007.
Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf was sworn in as a Civilian President on November 27, 2007.

Terrorists Attack on Mumbai:
Terrorists attacked Mumbai on November 26, 2007. Nine terrorists were killed and one terrorist Amir Kasab was arrested. These terrorists were supported by Pakistan. Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh stated clearly involvement of Pakistan official agencies in the Mumbai attacks and asked Pakistan to take actions against the perpetrators of the attack so that such strikes do not take place in the future. Pakistan rejected India’s demand for extradition of the perpetrators of the Mumbai terrorist attack, saying there was no extradition treaty between the two countries.

Indian External Affairs Minister Pranab Mukherjee asked Pakistani government to take tangible action against the perpetrators of the Mumbai attack. “All that we want is action and not words from Pakistan. But so far there is no evidence of it.”
Foreign Secretary Shiv Shankar Menon said so far India has not seen any action at all’ from Pakistan.

If Pakistan allows its territory to be used for attacks on India on the unacceptable plea that those involved in the attacks are the so labelled non-state actors, it does not absolve it from the responsibility of allowing its territory to be used by the Jihadis.

In Feb, 2010, India and Pakistan resumed their Foreign Secretary Level Talks. Prime Minister Manmohan Singh met the Pakistani P.M. Gilani at Addu on Nov- 2011. Both the leaders described the relationship as moving in a positive direction. Like Pakistani P.M. Gilani, Indian P.M. also referred to “opening a new chapter in the history of the relationship between the two countries.” Both leaders had a hope that the second round of talks will be more productive.

In May 2014, Pakistani Prime Minister Sh. Nawaz Sharif visited India to attend oath ceremony of Sh. Narender Modi as Prime Minister of India. During this visit both leaders discussed bilateral issues. In Dec, 2015, Sh. Nareder Modi, Prime Minister of India, visited Pakistan. In Nov. 2018, India-Pakistan agreed to open the Kartarpur Sahib Corridor for the Sikh Community.

Terrorists, supported by Pakistan, attacked on military base areas of Uri. It resulted in the martyrdom of 21 Indian soldiers. India on 29 Sept. 2016, in reply to this attack, made surgical strike in P.O.K. and killed about 40 to 50 terrorists. Again on Feb. 14, 2019, Pak supported terrorists made a terrorist attack in Pulwama. It resulted in the deaths of 40 Central Reserve Police Force personnel. In response to this Pulwama attack, Balakot airstrike was conducted by India in the early morning hours of February 26, 2019. The Indian warplanes crossed the border and dropped bombs in the vicinity of the town of Balakot. Due to this air stike more than 250-300 Jaish-e-Mohammad terrorists were killed in Balakot.

Conclusion:
We can conclude that given the political will and a spirit of give and take, most problems can be solved through bilateral negotiations. Pakistan should stop helping terrorists immediately and should realise that Kashmir is an integral part of India.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 2.
Describe reasons of hostile and suspicious relations between India and Pakistan.
Answer:
Following are the major areas of conflict between India and Pakistan:
1. Kashmir Problem:
Kashmir is a major issue of dispute between India and Pakistan. Before Independence Jammu and Kashmir was one of the 565 princely states, ruled by Maharaja Hari Singh. On October 20, 1947 several thousand tribesmen armed with machine guns, mortars, etc., attacked the frontiers of the state. These tribesmen were aided by Pakistan. On 26 October, Maharaja Hari Singh signed the Instrument of Accession and Indian troops dashed to Kashmir. Pakistan refused to recognise this accession and the war continued for 14 months. On
January 1, 1949 India lodged a complaint with U.N. Security Council and on January 5, 1949 ceasefire was announced by both the countries.

In September 1965, Pakistani forces attacked India. Indian forces gave them a crushing defeat. A U.N. Security Council resolution adopted on Sept. 20, 1965 called for a ceasefire. Pakistan again attacked India on 3rd Dec. 1971 and after the war, the Shimla Agreement was signed between the two countries. On 5-6 August, 2019, Article 370 was abrogated in Jammu and Kashmir and nowadays India’s stand is that P.O.K. will be the centre point of India-Pakistan dialogue.

2. Terrorists activities by Pakistan in India. Another important conflict is the terrorists activities, which Pakistani government encourages. It trains and helps the militants by arms training and money to carry out terrorist strikes in India. Its spy agency ISI is alleged to be involved in India’s north-east operating secretly through Bangladesh and Nepal. Terrorists activities on India’s sea-shore, Pathankot attack, 26/11 Bombay Taj attack, attack in Uri and Pulwama attack are the few examples of it.

3. Violation of Shimla Pact and Lahore Pact:
Pakistan, often violates the terms and conditions of Shimla Pact and Lahore Samjotha and thus increases the tension between two nations.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 3.
Explain in detail the relationship between India and Bangladesh.
Or
Examine the phases of cordial and strained relations between India and Bangladesh.
Answer:
Bangladesh, which was a part of Pakistan and was known as East Pakistan, emerged as an independent state in 1971. East Bengal was not given fair treatment by the rulers of Pakistan and it was made virtually a colony. In an election held early in 1971, Sheikh Mujib’s Awami League got majority in Pakistani Parliament. But Sheikh Mujib was not called to form a government and he was arrested. East Bengal declared independence and the liberation war started. India helped Awami League in the war. War took place between India and Pakistan in Dec. 1971 and Pakistan was defeated in the war. India was the first country to grant recognition to the People’s Republic Bangladesh.

India got Sheikh Mujib Rehman, the first President of Bangladesh, released from detention in Pakistan. India signed a treaty with Bangladesh for friendship, peace and co-operation for twenty five years in 1972. A trade agreement was reached in March 1972 for the economic reconstruction of Bangladesh. There was mutual agreement on Farakka barrage and sharing of Ganga waters. But the assassination of Sheikh Mujib followed by military dictatorship in Bangladesh created tension between India and Bangladesh.

Dispute started between them over Ganga waters. This dispute was settled by an agreement in Oct. 1977. Chief Martial Law Administrator H.M. Ershad visited India on October 6, 1982. India and Bangladesh decided to terminate the 1977 Farakka agreement to undertake feasibility studies. Both agreed on an interim arrangement on the question of Sharing the Ganga water and augmenting its flow. The Summit decided to set up an Indo- Bangladesh joint Economic Commission.

The summit talks between Mrs. Gandhi and General Ershad covered a wide area of understanding and mutual accommodation which augured well for future relations between India and Bangladesh. The joint communique issued at the end of General Ershad’s visit to Delhi conveyed much more than an interim accord on Farakka and a settlement of the Tin Bigha lease issue.

Tin Bigha Corridor:
A major irritant in Indo-Bangladesh relations was removed when the Tin Bigha Corridor was opened on June 26, 1992 amidst heavy security by central paramilitary forces and the state Armed Police. According to the modalities of the agreement formalised by the governments of the two countries on March 26, 1992 the movement of Bangladesh nationals along the corridor would be regulated to avoid intermingling with Indian nationals.

Chakma Refugees:
The repatriation of Chakma refugees, which was to have begun on June 8, 1993 on the basis of an understanding reached between India and Bangladesh during Bangladesh Communication Minister’s visit to New Delhi and Tripura, remained a non-starter. The repatriation of Chakma refugees started on 15th Feb., 1994. The 12 years old Chakma problem came to an end on Feb. 27, 1998 with all remaining refugees being repatriated to their ancestral homeland in Bangladesh.

Ganga Water Pact:
On Dec. 11,1996 Bangladesh Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina Wajed visited India. On Dec. 12, India and Bangladesh signed the Ganga Water sharing treaty leaving behind a long period of mutual distrust and suspicion. Prime Ministers of both the countries almost in the same words said that the treaty was tribute to the special quality of Indo-Bangladesh relations. India and Bangladesh formally started sharing Ganga waters on Jan. 1st, 1997.

The first ever trilateral business summit, which brought together the Prime Ministers of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh in Dhaka on 15th Jan., 1998, pledged their commitment to consolidate and strengthen the ongoing efforts for achieving sustainable development. India, Pakistan and Bangladesh reaffirmed their goal of achieving a free trade area in South Asia by the year 2001 and reiterated their commitment to liberalisation of commerce within the region.

Visit of Bangladeshi Prime Minister to India:
Bangladeshi Prime Minister, Mrs. Sheikh Hasina visited India on 16th June, 1998. India and Bangladesh stressed that bilateral problems should be resolved within a bilateral framework. Bangladesh reiterated its commitment that its territory would not be allowed to be used for anti- Indian activities.

Bus Service:
India and Bangladesh entered a new era of bilateral relationship with the launch of bus service linking Kolkata with Dhaka on June 19,1999. India also agreed to provide Bangladesh a credit of? 200 crore. India and Bangladesh agreed to start a new bus link between Agartala and Dhaka on April 9, 2000.

Train Service:
India and Bangladesh signed an agreement to run goods train which revived an old route through the Benapole- Petrapde border points on July 4, 2000.

Indian troops die in Border Clashes:
In April 2001, suddenly the border with Bangladesh had exploded into shooting, killing and high voltage tension. India lodged a strong protest with Bangladesh. India asked the Bangladeshi government to act against the perpetrators of crimes against the Border Security Force personnel saying that acts of criminal adventurism should not be permitted to affect ties between the two countries.

Joint Boundary Working Groups Meeting
In July 2001, a three day meeting between India and Bangladesh ended on a positive note as both sides reiterated their commitment towards expeditious resolution of all pending matters.

Visit of Indian External Affairs Minister:
In August 2002, long standing bilateral issues were discussed at the official talks between visiting Indian External Affairs Minister and Foreign Minister of Bangladesh. But they failed to make any breakthrough in settling any of the bilateral irritants.

Border Patrolling:
On August 6, 2005 India and Bangladesh decided to intensify border patrolling and work out ways to enhance trade and economic co-operation.

India’s Relations with Bangladesh:
Foreign Minister Pranab Mukherjee’s Visit to Bangladesh (2008):
Indian external affairs minister Pranab Mukherjee visited Bangladesh in Feb. 2008. He visited areas affected by Cyclon Sidr and India provided $ 1 million aid to Bangladesh. Mr. Mukherjee assured he would look into Bangladesh’s concern about the bilateral trade imbalance, river management and non-tariff barriers. He also announced ‘unconditional duty’ free access for two million ready-made garments from Bangladesh to India.

Maitree Express and Refurbishing India-Bangladesh Relations:
A new chapter was opened in Indo-Bangladesh relationship on April 14, 2008 when the Maitree Express rolled out of the Kolkata station on its inaugral journey to Dhaka. Railway Minister Lalu Prasad Yadav said, “This historic day will be written in golden letters in the histories of India and Bangladesh.”

In Jan. 2010 Bangladesi Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina visited India. Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina favours strong ties with India and vowed not to allow Bangladesh’s territory to be used for terrorism against its neighbours. Her proposal of forming a South Asian task force to fight terrorism in the region merits to be taken up earnestly by all countries because today the scourge threatens almost every country—including those which promoted it in the past. India and Bangladesh on August 20, 2011 signed joint border maps, finalising the 4156 km. long frontier between the neighbours. The long standing border related discord between the two bodies was settled through the signing of the map.

In Sept. 2011, Indian Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh paid a two day visit to Bangladesh. During this visit India lifted tariffs oh 46 textile items from its sensitive list.

In Oct. 2016, Bangladeshi Prime Minister Sheikh Hasina visited India to attend ‘BIMSTEC’ Summit. During this, both countries discussed bilateral issues.
In April 2017, Bangladesh Prime Minister visited India. During this visit, both countries signed 22 agreements.
In May 2018, Bangladesi Prime Minister visited India. During this visit, both countries discussed bilateral issues including Rohingya issue.
In Oct. 2019, Bangladeshi Prime Minister visited India. During this, visit both countries signed 7 important Agreements.

No doubt both Bangladesh and India have their grievances against each other, but these can be redressed in an amicable atmosphere. Both countries will gain immensely by promoting a relationship of goodwill and trust. Given goodwill and understanding between New Delhi and Dhaka, most bilateral problems can be solved without any difficulty.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 4.
Explain in detail the Indo-China relations.
Or
Write a critical note on the changing relationship between India and China.
Answer:
India and China had cordial relations earlier, but China attacked India in 1962 and became hostile to India. China still occupies some territory of India. India is inclined to improve relations with China but Chinese attitude is still inimical.

Indo-China Relations During Nehru Era (1949 to May 1964):
Policy of friendship towards China:
India, since the beginning, adopted the policy of friendship towards Communist China. India first recognised China, and then supported its induction in U.N.O. In 1951, India opposed the resolution of declaring China, an invader in Korea, in U.N.O. India didn’t attend San Francisco conference at the time of Japanese Peace Treaty in 1950 as China was not invited.

India’s Policy of Contentment crossed limits when India gave its extra-territorial rights enjoyed in Tibet, to China by signing a trade-agreement on 29th April, 1954. Both the countries at the time of agreement expressed their faith in the Principles of Panchsheel. These Principles were elaborated in 1953 at Bandung Conference. The Chinese Prime Minister Chou-En-Lai visited India in 1954 and Pt. Nehru also went to China. China attacked India on 20th Oct., 1962 and ‘avenged’ India’s friendly attitude. It badly affected Pt. Nehru’s policies.

Chinese invasion over India:
China attacked both the Western and Eastern sectors of the Indian Border on 20th Oct., 1962. The Chinese soldiers overpowered the military posts till Indian forces balanced themselves after this sudden attack. Britain and America immediately sent military equipment on India’s request. China declared unilateral ceasefire on 21st Nov. By waging a war, China was able to capture thousands of miles of Indian area which is still in its possession.

Colombo Resolution and attitude of China:
Ceylon, Burma, Cambodia, Indonesia, Egypt organised Colombo conference in December, 1962 to facilitate Indo¬China talks. Mrs. Bhandarnaike brought this resolution to Delhi and Peking. This resolution was passed on 19th January 1963.

Sino-Indian relations during Shastri Period:
(May 1964 to January 1966). After the death of Pt. Nehru, Shri Lai Bahadur Shastri remained the Prime Minister of India till 10th January, 1966. Sino-Indian relations didn’t improve during this period. China adopted hostile attitude during Indo-Pak war in 1965. China fully supported Pakistan and declared India an invader.

Problems of Bangladesh and Chinese attitude towards Indo-Pak war:
The year 1971 was replete with problems for India. China disliked India’s co-operation in Bangladesh movement and it fully supported the dictators of Pakistan. China favoured Pakistan in the meetings of Security Council during Indo-Pak war and held India responsible for invasion. China again threatened India but these threats proved hollow.
Indo-China relations remained tense till April, 1976

Indo-China relations from May 1976 to 1979:
With the deaths of Chou-En- Lai, Chu Teh and of Mao in 1976, Indo-China relations slightly improved. On 15 April, 1976 Shri K.R. Narayanan was sent to Peking as an ambassador to China. China, too, sent its ambassador to India.

The external affairs minister, Mr. A.B. Vajpayee reached Peking on February 12, 1979. India raised the border question at the first ever ministerial dialogue with China since 1960. India arid China agreed to maintain the existing tranquillity along their common borders. But Mr. Vajpayee cut short his China visit by a day due to Chinese attack on Vietnam. .On September, 5, 1979 New Delhi strongly protested to Peking against the violation of Bhutan’s borders.

Indo-China Relations from January, 1980 to 1991:
The Chinese Prime Minister Mr. Hua Kuofeng told Prime Minister Indira Gandhi at Belgrade (Yugoslavia) on May 9, 1980 that his country was more than ready to improve its relations with India.

The three rounds of talks with China-First in Beijing in December, 1981, second in Delhi in May, 1982 and third in January 1983-on the border dispute failed to make any progress. Two more rounds of talks took place between India and China between 1983 and 1985.
Indian Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi visited China in 1988 and many misunderstandings were removed. A joint working group was formed.

The Joint working groups have held six rounds of talk:
The latest round of talks at the Joint working groups was held in Beijing in early November, 1992. India and China agreed to establish high level contacts in order to maintain peace and tranquillity along the line of actual control. Prime Minister P.V. Narasimha Rao visited China in Sept. 1993 and signed four agreements that would respect the Line of Actual Control (LAC) along the border and renounce the use of force against each other.

Visit of the Chinese President to India:
On 28th Nov., 1996 Chinese President, Mr. Jiang Zemin visited India on a four day State visit. Mr. Jiang was the first Chinese head of the State who has visited India. Chinese President, Mr. Jiang Zemin said, “My visit will further promote friendship between the two countries.” On 29th Nov. ,1996 India and China signed a historic agreement pledging themselves not to attack each other or cross the Line of Control and reduce troops and armaments along the common border. The agreement contained a series of confidence building measures in the military field to ensure a peaceful border.

Post-Pokhran Sino-Indian Relation:
India conducted underground nuclear test, at Pokhran on May 11, 1998—after 24 years of its maiden nuclear test. On 14th June, 1999 Indian External Affairs Minister Mr. Jaswant Singh visited China. India and China decided to establish a security dialogue mechanism and decided to give new impetus to the decisions of the Joint Working Group. It was also decided to celebrate the 50th anniversary of establishment of Indo-China diplomatic relations in an appropriate manner.

Visit of the Indian President to China:
Indian President K.R. Naryanan visited China on May 28,2000 (May 28 to June 3). India and China favoured a ‘fair and reasonable boundary dispute’ and decided to set up an Eminent Persons Group (EPG) to enhance over-all bilateral ties. The President invited China to work with India to eliminate the threat of international terrorism. Chinese President Jiang Jemin also condemned international terrorism.

Chinese Leader Li Peng’s Visit to India (Jan. 2001):
Chinese Leader Li Peng said, “The purpose of my visit is to enhance trust, boost friendship and strengthen co-operation.”

Visit of the Chinese Prime Minister to India:
Chinese Premier Zhu Ronglji visited India in January 2002. The two countries discussed a number of confidence building measures.

Visit of the Indian Prime Minister to China:
In June, 2003, Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee visited .China. During his visit India and China signed the Cross Border Trade Agreement.

China’s stand on Sikkim:
Sikkim has been an issue of conflict between India and China. But in May, 2004 China put a step towards friendship and mutual trust. Beijing for the first time officially stopped showing Sikkim as a separate country in Asia. China’s this step has raised Indo-China relations to a qualitatively new plane.

Improvement in Indo-China Relations:
During these years of Indo-China relations the level of mutual trust between the two countries has been raised. Chinese Vice-Foreign Minister Wang Yi has said during an interview that “China-India relations are developing very well. Especially we have improved our mutual trust, which is important for bilateral relations.”

Recent Relations Between India and China:
India and China Sign 13 Agreements. Chinese:
President Mr. Hu Jintao visited India in November 2006. India and China signed 13 agreements in New Delhi on November 21, 2006.

Joint Indo-China Military Exercise:
The first Indo-Chinese Joint Military exercise began on December 21, 2007 and came to a conclusion on December 25, 2007 in Kunming (China). The focus of the exercise was on the anti-terrorism drill.

Visit of Indian Prime Minister to China:
Indian Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh visited China on January 13, 2008. Indian Prime Minister and Chinese Premier signed a joint statement titled ‘A Shared Vision for the 21st Century’ on 14th Jan. 2008. The shared vision contains some new issues such as bilateral co-operation in civil nuclear energy. Chinese support for India’s desire to play a greater role in the United Nation Security Council, etc. Moreover, both the countries signed 11 agreements for co-operation in rail, housing, geo-sciences, land resources management and other sectors.

China’s stand on Arunachal Pradesh:
Arunachal Pradesh is an integral part of India. But on November 11, 2008 Qin Gang, Foreign Ministry spokesman rejected India’s assertion that Arunachal Pradesh is its an integral part and insisted that China never recognised the illegal Mac Mohan line and that the status of the border state was never officially demarcated. But Prime Minister Dr. Manmohan Singh rejected China’s claim and stated Arunachal is ‘our land of rising sun’.

Improvement in Indo-China Relations:
During these years of Indo-China relations the level of mutual trust between the two countries has been raised.

Visit of Vice-foreign Minister:
Chinese Vice-foreign minister He Yafei visited India in January 2009, India shared evidence with China about involvement of Pakistan-based elements in the Mumbai terror attacks and urged Beijing to use its influence with its alley Islamabad to co-operate on the issue.

Visit of Chinese Prime Minister of India:
Chinese Prime Minister Mr. Wen Jiabao visited India in Dec, 2010. During his visit both countries signed 6 pact. India and China agreed to raise the bilaternal trade to 100 billion dollar by 2015.

Leaving aside their bilateral problems like boundary issue, at present both have entered into an intensive phase of trade and economic co-operation. Since India has not changed its stand on Tibet, the March 2008 uprising in Tibet is not likely to influence their bilateral relationship.

P.M. Manmohan Singh’s visit to China:
On 23rd October, 2013 India and China took a leap towards reducing tension across the border and promised to strengthen cooperation on trans-border rivers, even as New Delhi delayed pact for a liberalised visa regime. The Border Defence Cooperation Agreement was among the nine pacts that the two countries signed at Beijing.

Chinese President’s visit to India:
In September 2014, Chinese President Xi Jinping visited India. During this visit, both countries signed 12 Agreements.
In Oct, 2016, Chinese President Xi Jinping visited India to attend ‘BRICS’ Summit. During this visit, both countires discussed bilateral issues.
In September 2017 and June 2018 Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narendra Modi visited China. During this visit, both countries discussed bilateral issues.
In Oct., 2019 Chinese President visited India. During this visit, both countries discussed on Trade, Regional Security and Terrorism.

Conclusion:
The relations between the two countries should be based on complete equality and mutual respect in the spirit of the U.N. Charter. Both could learn from each other’s experience since the two countries were in need of rapid development.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 5.
Assess relationship between India and Nepal.
Or
Discuss the main issues of conflicts and co-operation in the relationship between India and Nepal.
Answer:
India and Nepal are not only neighbours but they have also had long cultural, political and religious links. In language and religion, gods and goddesses, food and clothing the two countries, India and Nepal, have more in common with each other than with any third country of the world. Both have been living as good and friendly neighbours.
Issues of Conflicts in Indo-Nepal Relations. The following factors can be described as the factors which negatively influenced to course of Indo-Nepal relations.

1. Nepal’s Fears:
Being a small state, Nepal feared India. Nepal feared that India could attempt an intervention in Nepal for securing its interests vis-a-vis China. Nepal lived with fear of the Indian interference in its internal affairs.

2. India’s Initial Lack of Interest in Nepal:
During the initial years of her independence, the Indian Foreign Policy did not give much importance to relations with Nepal.

3. The Thesis of ‘Special Relation with Nepal’:
Indian thesis of ‘special relation with Nepal’ gave the impression that India regarded Nepal as an area of India’s influence.

4. The China Factor in Indo-Nepal Relations:
In China, Nepal saw an opportunity of finding a counterpoise to India. India as such viewed with concern any attempt that was being made by Nepal for cultivating friendship and co-operation with China.

5. The Issue of Zone of Peace:
Since 1975, Nepal has been trying to get recognition as a zone of Peace. But India felt that Nepal did not really need such a status, Nepal, however, regarded this proposal as a vital necessity for securing its national interests and world peace.

6. Hijacking of Indian Airlines Plane:
The hijacking of Indian Airlines plane on the Kathmandu-Delhi route in December 2000 created tension and security concern.

7. ISI Activities:
Nepal has been used by the ISI in a big way for carrying out acts of sabotage in India.

8. Eight Thorny Issues:
According to Nepalese experts there are at least eight thorny issues—(i) India’s illegal construction of the Laxmanpur barrage in Bharauch district within 300 metres of the border ; (ii) the silent demographic aggression by Indians taking advantage of the open border ; (iii) Indian occupation of Kalapani ; (iv) Denial of market access to Nepalese businessmen ; (v) Four per cent special additional tax levied on Nepalese goods ; (vi) Lack of provisions in the Mahakali Project agreement to sell hydel power to other countries ; (vii) India’s unwillingness to get involved in the Bhutanese refugees problem and (viii) the murder of Nepalese citizens by ULFA militants in Assam.

9. 1950 Friendship Treaty:
Nepal believes that this treaty places it on an unequal footing with India. Nepal has desired a review of the treaty.

Areas of Co-operation between India and Nepal:
A large number of Nepalese youth received higher education in the Indian Universities. Under the Colombo Plan Agreement 1954, the Indian Govt, undertook to contribute towards the development of communications, irrigation and water supplies projects in Nepal. Indian Public Works Department has constructed several roads in Nepal. India has given a lot of economic aid to Nepal in its development.

The king of Nepal visited India many times and leaders of India went to Nepal. In 1977, the Prime Minister of India, Mr. Morarji Desai visited Nepal. The Prime Minister of Nepal, Mr. Surya Bahadur Thapa, visited Delhi in February, 1983. India and Nepal agreed to take up three major river projects of benefit to both countries by harnessing their common water resources. Both countries agreed to set up a Joint Commission at the ministerial level to promote economic co-operation. On March 2, 1983 India agreed to provide Nepal with an assistance of? 8.7 crores for the expansion of Bir Hospital.

Nepal’s first-elected government in 32 years was sworn on May 29, 1991. Mr. Girija Prasad Koirala became the Prime Minister of Nepal. In his first policy announcement Mr. Koirala said that his Nepali Congress Government would maintain very close and cordial relationship with India.

On 21st Oct. 1992 India and Nepal decided to expand bilateral co-operation. In April, 1995, India agreed to provide additional transit facilities for Nepalese goods at Kandha and Mumbai. Successful Indo-Nepal talks on water services were held.
In 1996 India and Nepal signed a treaty on exploiting the Mahakali river basin for electricity and irrigation.
On 5th June, 1997 the Prime Minister of India Mr. I.K. Gujral visited Kathmandu on three day official visit.
India accepted Nepal’s request for an additional transit route to Bangladesh via Phulbari (India).

Visit of Nepalese Prime Minister:
On 31st July, 2000 the Prime Minister of Nepal Mr. Girija Prasad Koirala came to India for a week long visit. Both the countries agreed on a wide-ranging package of confidence building measures to remove irritants and give a new dimension to bilateral ties.

On 1st February, 2005 King Gyanendra removed popular prime minister and also put all other political party leaders under house arrest and suspended fundamental freedoms. India decided not to intervene in Nepal internal affairs but advised King to restore democracy in Nepal.

Nepal a Federal Democratic Republic:
With the passage of the Constitution amendment bill by the Parliament, Nepal on December 28,2007 turned into a Federal Democratic Republic.

First President of Nepal:
The Federal Democratic Republic of Nepal gets its first President on July 21, 2008 when the Constituent Assembly elected Nepali Congress Leader Dr. Ram Baran Yadav as President of Nepal.

Nepalese President Visits India:
Nepal President Ram Baran Yadav visited New Delhi on Feb. 16,2010. India went out of the way to make Nepalese President visit to New Delhi a truly sucessful event by offering a 250 million Dollar soft loan through EXIM Bank and signing four major accords with Nepal. India also agreed to supply 50,000 tonne of wheat, 2000 tonne of rice and 10,000 tonne of yellow peas to Nepal.

Indian Prime Minister’s Visit to Nepal:
In August 2014, Indian Prime Minister Mr. Narender Modi visited Nepal. During this visit, he announced $1 billion credit to Nepal. In Oct, 2016, Nepali Prime Minister visited India to attend ‘BIMSTEC’ Summit. During this visit both countries discussed bilateral issues.

In August 2017, Nepal’s Prime Minister visited India. During this visit, both countries signed 8 agreement.
In August 2018, Indian Prime Minister visited Nepal to attend to BIMSTEC Summit. During this, both countries discuss bilateral issues.

These days relations between the two countries are very cordial. The bases of friendship between the two countries are : non-interference in each other’s international affairs, frequent consultations on matters of common interest and financial and technical aid by India for Nepal’s economic development.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 6.
Evaluate Indo-Sri Lanka relations.
Or
Give a brief account of India’s relations with Sri Lanka.
Answer:
India-Sri Lanka relations stretch over a period of more than two thousand years. At the Asian Relations Conference in Delhi 1947, both India and Sri Lanka declared to fight against colonialism, imperialism and racialism. Both are active members of the Non-Aligned Movement. India in co-operation with Ceylon, held a conference at Colombo in 1950. Both the countries participated in Sanding Conference in 1951. The Government of India assisted Ceylon, in its revolution in 1971.

The dispute over Kachcha their island was solved in June 1974 and this land was handed over to Sri Lanka, Despite cordial relations there has been occasional tension between India and Sri Lanka and the cause of tension was the problem of nearly one million people of origin in Sri Lanka. Sri Lanka was not prepared to grant full citizenship rights to all the Indian immigrants in Sri Lanka. The government of Sri Lanka passed the India and Pakistan Residents (Citizenship) Act in 1949. About 8 lakhs people of Indian origin applied for citizenship but only one lakh 34 thousands were able to secure citizenship (upto Oct., 1964). The rest were asked to go back to India.

But India’s stand was that those who were living in Sri Lanka for generations or had been born there, are the citizens of Sri Lanka and not of India. Ultimately, Lai Bahadur Shastri and Smt. Bandarnaike of Sri Lanka reached an agreement on the question of citizenship of Indian people there. In Feb.,1979 Prime Minister Morarji Desai visited Sri Lanka and he advised Indian immigrants to regard Sri Lanka as their own land. The President, N. Sanjiva Reddy, visited Sri Lanka in February, 1982. Mr. Reddy’s visit symbolised friendship between two neighbouring and friendly countries.

Due to Tamil problems tension was there between Sri Lanka and India. In June, 1985, Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi and the Sri Lankan President J. R. Jayewardene held discussions to find a political solution to the ethnic problem in the island nation. The most significant achievement of the summit meeting between Mr. Rajiv Gandhi and Mr. Jayewardene has been the latter’s belated admission of the fact that a political solution of Sri Lanka’s ethnic crisis is impossible without India’s co-operation.

On July 29, 1987 India and Sri Lanka entered into an unprecedented accord aimed at national reconciliation in the island-nation to end the five year old ethnic conflict and opening up a new era in their bilateral relations.

The agreement signed by Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi and President J. R. Jayewardene envisaged cessation of hostilities between the Tamil Militants and the security forces within the next 24 hours, surrender of arms within 72 hours, return of the army to barracks and merger of Tamil majority northern and eastern provinces. It provides general amnesty for all political prisoners now in jails and also facilitates the rehabilitation of militants who would surrender arms and return to normal civilian life. Mr. Jayewardene on his part promised to meet India’s concern over the possible use of Trincomalee as a foreign military base.

Indian Peace Keeping Force. In accordance with the accord, the government of Sri Lanka requested the Indian government to send Indian Peace Keeping Force to oversee the surrender by the Tamil militants, and the IPKF was sent to Sri Lanka. President Jayewardene was succeeded by Mr. Premadasa. In response to the wishes of Sri Lankan new President, India agreed to withdraw the IPKF and by March, 1990 the process of withdrawal was completed.

Joint Commission. On April, 10, 1991, both the countries agreed for setting up a joint commission by the year-end and agreed to take a series of initiatives in the field of trade, culture and consultancy projects. The two countries also decided to take immediate steps to conclude a cultural exchange programme for 1991-93. The new Sri Lankan Prime Minister Mr. Ranil Wickremesinghe in June, 1993 had set the tour for the economic relations between two countries. The new Sri Lankan Prime Minister’s talks in New Delhi could mark the beginning of a genuine reconciliation between the two neighbours. The bitterness caused in Sri Lanka by the involvement of the Indian Peace Keeping Force in its ethnic strife began to dissolve after its complete withdrawal.

Indian External Affairs Minister’s visit to Sri Lanka. In Jan, 1997 Indian External Affairs Minister I.K. Gujral visited Sri Lanka. On 22nd Jan., 1997 India and Sri Lanka signed a landmark investment promotion and protection agreement to boost bilateral economic ties and decided to bury their political differences. An External Affairs Minister, Mr. Kadirgamar, of Sri Lanka described the agreement as a “Confidence Building Measure”. Indian External Affairs Minister reiterated that New Delhi would not interfere in the internal affairs of Sri Lanka.

Sri Lankan President’s Visit to India. The close friendship between the two nations had been further boosted by the visit of Sri Lankan President, Chandrika Kumaratunga on Dec. 27, 1998. The visit was of paramount significance as it heralded a new era in
bilateral economic relations through the signing of the first-ever landmark Free Trade Area pact between the two countries.
Tamils of Indian Origin to get Lankan Citizenship. On July 21, 2000 Sri Lankan President Mrs. Chandrika Kumaratunga agreed to give Sri Lankan citizenship to those Indian Origin Tamils who were forced to take Indian citizenship in 1964 as a result of the India-Sri Lanka pact on the stateless people of Indian origin in Sri Lanka.

Sri Lankan President’s Visit to Indiai. In 2002 Mrs. Chandrika Kumaratunga, the Sri Lankan President visited India. The Indian Prime Minister Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee reaffirmed India’s support for the peace process in Sri Lanka.
Sri Lankan President’s Visit to India. Sri Lankan President Mahinda Rajapakse visited New Delhi in December 2005 and urged New Delhi to take a more upfront role in the peace process : An acknowledgment that no solution to the Tamil-Sinhala ethnic conflict would be implementable without India’s support.

Action Against LTTE. Sri Lanka’s war on the terrorist outfit LTTE entered its last phase. The Sri Lankan government has described ts successes against the LTTE as its major victory on terrorism.
In 2009 Tamil Nadu Assembly passed a resolution calling upon the central government to do something to stop war in Sri Lanka as it was compromising the future and safity of the Tamil population there. But Indian government has rightly decided not to involved in the controversial scenario.

During the SAARC conference held in nepal in 2014, Indian Prime Minister Mr. Narender Modi and Sri Lankan President Mr. Mahindera Rajapakshe met in Nepal. During this meeting both leaders discussed bilateral issues.
In Oct. 2016, Sri Lankan President visited India to attend ‘BIMSTEC’ Summit. During this visit both countries discussed bilateral issues.
In May 2017, Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narendra Modi visited Sri Lanka. During this visit, both countries discussed bilateral issues.
In Oct. 2018, Sri Lankan Prime Minister visited India. During this visit both countries agreed to speed up infrastructure projects.
In June, 2019, Indian Prime Minister Sh. Narendra Modi visited Sri Lanka. During this visit, both countries discussed the progress of various programmes supported by India.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is Kashmir Problem?
Or
Write a note on ‘Kashmir Problem’.
Answer: Kashmir is a major issue of dispute between India and Pakistan. Before Independence Jammu and Kashmir was one of the 565 princely states, ruled by Maharaja Hari Singh. On October 20 1947 several thousand tribesmen armed with machine guns, mortars etc. attacked the frontiers of State. Tribesmen were aided by Pakistan. On 26th October Maharaja Hari Singh sent a letter to Lord Mountabatten, then Governor-General of India about his decision to join India. Indian troops were dashed to Kashmir. Pakistan refused to recognize this accession and war continued for 14 months. On January 1, 1948 India lodged a complaint with U.N.

Security Council and on January 5, 1949 Ceasefire line was accepted by both the countries. In September 1965, Pakistan forces attacked India. Indian forces gave them a crushing defeat. A U.N. Security Council resolution adopted on Sept. 20, 1965 called upon India and Pakistan for a ceasefire. Pakistan attacked India again on 3rd Dec. 1971 and after War Shimla Agreement took place between the two countries. On 5-6 August 2019, Article 370 was abrogated from Indian Constitution, and nowadays India is stand is that P.O.K. will be the centre point of India-Pakistan dialogue.

Question 2.
Write a short note on Shimla Agreement.
Answer:
On 3rd December, 1971 Pakistan attacked India. India faced it bravely and defeated Pakistan very badly. One lakh Pak-Soldiers surrendered and General Niazi signed the document of surrender. But Indian Prime Minister Mrs. Gandhi, without exploiting the defeat of Pakistan, held a summit conference at Shimla in June, 1972 to discuss the problems of both the countries. Pak President Bhutto and Indian Prime Minister Mrs. Gandhi participated in this conference. The agreement was reached between Mrs. Indira Gandhi and Mr. Bhutto on 3rd July and it is known as Shimla Agreement. Important points of this agreement are given below:

  • Both the countries are resolved to solve their conflicts and confrontations through bilateral peaceful talks.
  • Both the countries would respect each other’s national unity, territorial integrity, political independence and sovereign equality.
  • Both countries won’t use force against each other’s territorial integrity.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 3.
Write a short note on India-China border dispute.
Answer:
The relations between India and China are very ancient. Till 1962, the relations between the two countries were very cordial and friendly. China attacked both the Western and Eastern sectors of the Indian border on 20th Oct. 1962. China declared unilateral ceasefire on 2lst November 1962. By waging a war, China was able to capture thousands of miles of Indian territory which is still under China’s possession. On July 9, 1979 the External Affairs Minister Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee said that the possibility of a satisfactory settlement with China is not seen unless China agreed to settle the boundary question.

During the last 25 years the leaders of both the countries have emphasised many times that better relations between the two countries are Very necessary in the cause of peace in Asia and the world. The need is to solve the boundary dispute. The relations between the two countries should be based on complete equality and mutual respect in the spirit of the U.N. Charter.

Question 4.
Explain relationship between India and China.
Answer:
In 1962, China attacked India and avenged India’s friendly attitude. Again in 1965, China adopted hostile attitude during Indo-Pak War. But India again in 1966 during Indira era tried to resolve Indo-China boundary dispute. However in 1976 Indo-China relations slightly improved. In 1976, Mr. K.R. Narayanan and in 1978 and 1979, Mr. Atal Bihari Vajpayee visited China as Ambassadors of peace and friendship. In 1988, Prime Minister Mr. Rajiv Gandhi’s visit to China started a new era in Indo-China relations and the diplomatic visits made by both the countries further improved the relations of the two countries. During these years of Indo¬China relations the levels of mutual trust between the two countries have been increased.

Very Short Answer Type Questions

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 1
Discuss India’s policy towards her neighbour countries.
Answer:
India’s policy towards her neighbour is based on the principles of Panchsheel. India respects the sovereignty and territoral integrity of neighbouring states. India is always ready to have friendly relations with neighbouring states. India not only improved its friendly ties with Asian countries but also with other countries of the world.

Question 2.
Shimla Samjhauta (Agreement) was signed when and between which two countries?
Answer:
Shimla Agreement was signed in 1972 between India and Pakistan.

Question 3.
List any two areas of conflict between India and Pakistan.
Answer:

  • Pakistan considers Kashmir a disupted area whereas India considers Kashmir a part of India.
  • Pakistan is helping the terrorists of Kashmir with arms and other materials. Even training is given to terrorists on Pakistan’s soil.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 4.
Write down two features responsible for tension between India and China Relations.
Answer:

  • Major disputes are regarding the border issue and the demarcation of the 4,200 km long border at the foot of the Himalayas.
  • Chinese aggression on Indian border on October 20, 1962 and the continuing violations of Indian border.

Question 5.
Mention .any one area each of Co-operation and Disagreement between India and Bangladesh.
Answer:

  • Area of Co-operation. Bus service, Train service and Commerce and Trade between the two countries.
  • Area of Disagreement. Chakma Refugees is an area of disagreement between the two countries.

Question 6.
Name two countries which attacked India.
Answer:

  1. Pakistan
  2. China.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

One Line Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write the names of two countries which are neighbours of India.
Answer:
Pakistan and Nepal.

Question 2.
Write one cause of tension between India and Pakistan.
Answer:
An important cause for strained relations between India and Pakistan is the issue of cross border Terrorism by Pakistan.

Question 3.
What is the importance of the treaty between India and Nepal formalised in February, 1996?
Answer:
In February, 1996, India and Nepal signed an important treaty for the harmonious development of Mahakali Valley. It paved way for development.

Question 4.
Mention any one important point of the treaty signed between India and China in November, 1996.
Answer:
According to this Agreement, both the countries will not commit any aggression on each other. Both the countries will reduce their military power on the actual line of control. They will also stop military exercises.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 5.
In which year China attacked India?
Answer:
China attacked India in 1962.

Question 6.
When was Bangladesh established?
Answer:
Bangladesh was established in 1971.

Question 7.
Between which two countries Tashkent Pact took place?
Answer:
India and Pakistan.

Question 8.
What is the future of Indo-Pak Relations?
Answer:
The future of Indo-Pak relations is not good.

Question 9.
In which year Mac Mahan line boundry line was determined between India and China?
Answer:
In 1914 Mac Mahan line was determined.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 10.
Who proposed partition of Kashmir?
Answer:
M.C. Naughton.

Question 11.
In which year Shimla Agreement took place?
Or
When Shimla Agreement took place?
Answer:
Shimla Agreement was signed on 3rd July, 1972.

Question 12.
Who signed Shimla Agreement?
Answer:
Shimla Agreement was signed by Mrs. Indira Gandhi and Mr. Z.A. Bhutto.

Question 13.
Write one major issue of dispute between India and Pakistan.
Answer:
Kashmir is a major issue of dispute between India and Pakistan.

Question 14.
Mention one basic principle of India’s foreign policy.
Answer:
The most important basic principle of India’s foreign policy is Non-alignment.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 15.
When was ‘Panchsheel Agreement’ signed between India and China?
Answer:
In 1954.

Question 16.
Write one provision of Shimla Agreement.
Answer:
Both the countries had resolved to solve their conflicts and confrontations through bilateral peaceful talks.

Question 17.
Write one major point of dispute with China.
Answer:
Major dispute is border dispute. Main issue is demarcation of the 4200 km. long border at the foot of Himalayas.

Question 18.
When was Pakistan established?
Answer:
Pakistan was established on 14 August, 1947.

Question 19.
Which two countries signed Shimla Agreement.
Or
‘Shimla Pact’ took place between which two countries?
Answer:
India and Pakistan.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Fill In The Blanks

1. People’s Republic of China was established in ……………. .
Answer:
1949

2. Farakka Treaty was signed between India and ……………. .
Answer:
Bangladesh

3. India became an independent state on ……………. .
Answer:
August 15, 1947

4. Shimla Agreement was signed on ……………. .
Answer:
3rd July, 1972.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

True Or False Statement

1. In 1924 Mac Mahan line was determined.
Answer:
False

2. Bangladesh was established in 1965.
Answer:
False

3. China attacked India in 1962.
Answer:
True

4. Shimla agreement was signed by Mrs. Indira Gandhi and Mr. Bhutto.
Answer:
True

5. India and Pakistan signed Farakka Treaty.
Answer:
False

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Bangladesh was established in:
(a) 1965
(b) 1971
(c) 1972
(d) 1990
Answer:
(b) 1971

Question 2.
When India and Pakistan became independent states?
(a) 26 Jan. 1950
(b) 15 August 1947
(c) 26 Jan. 1947
(d) 14 August 1947.
Answer:
(b) 15 August 1947

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 3.
Which countries entered into Free Trade Agreement in Dec. 1998?
(a) India and Sri Lanka
(b) Pakistan and Bangladesh
(c) India and Pakistan
(d) India and China.
Answer:
(a) India and Sri Lanka

Question 4.
Mac Mahan Rekha (Line) demarcates the Border between which two countries?
(a) India-Pakistan
(b) India-China
(c) India-America
(d) Pakistan-China.
Answer:
(b) India-China

Question 5.
In which year India sent peace-keeping force in Sri Lanka?
(a) 1985
(b) 1989
(c) 1991
(d) 1987.
Answer:
(d) 1987.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 17 India and Her Neighbours-Nepal, Sri Lanka, China, Bangladesh and Pakistan

Question 6.
Shimla Agreement was signed on:
(a) 3rd July 1972
(b) 3rd July 1971
(c) 3rd July 1966
(d) 3rd July 1975.
Answer:
(a) 3rd July 1972

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Punjab State Board PSEB 11th Class Sociology Book Solutions Source Based Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 11 Sociology Source Based Questions

Question 1.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Nineteenth-century was also the period in which natural sciences made much progress. The success attained by those working in the field of natural sciences inspired a good number of social thinkers to follow them. The belief was that if the methods of natural sciences could be successful in the physical world to understand the physical or natural phenomena, the same methods could be applied successfully to the social world to understand the social phenomena. Scholars like Auguste Comte, Herbert Spencer, Emile Durkheim, Max Weber, and other sociologists advocated the methods of science to study society as they were inspired by the discoveries of natural scientists and wanted to study society in a similar way.

  1. Why were social thinkers inspired to follow natural sciences?
  2. Which sociologists studied society?
  3. What were the views of sociologists about the methods of natural sciences?

Answer:

  1. In the 19th century, natural sciences made great progress, and this inspired social thinkers to follow them.
  2. Scholars like Auguste Comte, Herbert Spencer, Emile Durkheim, Max Weber, and others studied society.
  3. Sociologists started believing that if the methods of natural sciences could be successful in the physical world to understand the physical or natural phenomena, the same methods could be applied successfully to the social world to understand the social phenomena.

Question 2.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

In Europe and America, Sociology developed as a subject after the 19th century. However, in India, it not only emerged a little late but was also given secondary importance as a subject of study. Nevertheless, after India attained independence, Sociology has risen in stature and has found a place as an independent subject in the curriculum of almost all the universities of the country. In addition, it has also been recognized as a subject for different competitive examinations. Radha Kamal Mukherji, G.S. Ghurye, D.P. Mukherji, D.N. Majumdar, K.M. Kapadia, M.N. Srinivas, P.N. Prabhu, A.R. Desai, etc. are some important scholars who have contributed to the development of Indian Sociology.

  1. As a subject, when did Sociology develop in Europe?
  2. Name a few Indian Sociologists, who contributed to the development of Indian Sociology.
  3. How did Sociology develop in India?

Answer:

  1. As a subject, Sociology rapidly developed in Europe only after the 19th century.
  2. Radha Kamal Mukherji, G.S. Ghurye, D.P. Mukherji, D.N. Majumdar, K.M. Kapadia, M.N. Srinivas, P.N. Prabhu, A.R. Desai, etc. were a few Indian Sociologists who contributed to the development of Indian Sociology.
  3. Before 1947, Sociology did not develop much in India as our country was under the occupation of the British. But after Independence, Sociology developed quite rapidly in India and almost all the universities started teaching as a subject. Except this, all the competitive exams used Sociology as a subject and that’s why it developed very quickly.

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Question 3.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

According to Morris Ginsberg, historically Sociology has its roots in politics and philosophy of History. For that reason, Sociology depends on Political Science. Each and every social problem has a political cause. Any change in the political system or nature of power structure brings changes in society. To understand different political events Sociology takes help from Political Science. Similarly, Political Science also depends on Sociology. The State frames its rules, regulations, and laws on the basis of social customs, tradition, and values. Thus, without sociological background, the study of Political Science will be incomplete. Almost all political problems have a social origin and for the solution of these political problems, Political Science takes the help of Sociology.

  1. According to Morris Ginsberg, how is Sociology dependent upon Political Science.
  2. According to Ginsberg, why is the study of Political&gience incomplete without social background?
  3. How is Political Science taking the help of Sociology?

Answer:

  1. According to Morris Ginsberg, historically Sociology has its roots in politics and philosophy of history. That’s why Sociology depends upon Political Science.
  2. Ginsberg was of the view that whenever a state forms new laws, it always keeps in mind social values, customs, traditions, etc. That’s why the study of Political Science is incomplete without social background.
  3. According to Ginsberg, almost all the political problems originate in society which is studied by Sociology. That’s why whenever Political Science needs to study society, it always takes the help of Sociology.

Question 4.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Society has different meanings in different social sciences, but in Sociology, it is used to refer to various kinds of social units. The main focus of Sociology is on human society and the network of relationships in it. In a society, sociologists study the interpersonal relationships of social beings and discover how a person behaves in a particular situation, what should be expected of others and what do others expect of her/him.

  1. Why is the meaning of society different in different social sciences?
  2. What is the meaning of society in Sociology?
  3. What is the difference between ‘Society’ and ‘A Society’?

Answer:

  1. Different social sciences study a particular aspect of society such as economics study economic part of society. That’s why they take the meaning of society from a different perspective.
  2. In Sociology, society is the web of social relationships. When relations are established among individuals, society is formed. In this way, the web of social relationships is known as society.
  3. Whenever we talk about ‘society’, we talk about it in collective terms i.e. all the societies are included in it and we study it in an abstract form. But whenever we talk about ‘A Society’ we refer to a particular society such as Indian society or American society. That’s why it becomes a concrete society.

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Question 5.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

A community is a social group of any size whose members inhabit a particular geographical area, share a government, and frequently share a cultural and historical legacy. If may also refer to a collection of people who perform or engage in similar kind of work or activities such as racial community, religious community, a national community, a caste community, or a linguistic community, etc. this sense indicates a social, religious, or occupational group having common features or concerns and perceived as or perceiving itself as different in some way from the larger society within which its exists. The community can thus, refer to people spread over a vast area but sharing similarities in one or another way. For instance, the terms ‘international community or ‘NRI community’ are used in literature to refer to some coherent group based on supposedly some characteristics.

  1. What is meant by Community?
  2. Give a few examples of Community.
  3. Differentiate between Community and Association.

Answer:

  1. A community is a social group of any size whose members live in a particular geographical area, share a government, and frequently share a cultural and historical legacy.
  2. The international community, Indian Community, Punjabi Community, etc. are a few examples of Community.
  3. ⇒ Community develops automatically but Association is deliberately formed for a particular objective.
    ⇒ Every individual automatically becomes a part of any Community but the membership of the Association is optional. It means that one can take or leave membership according to his wish.

Question 6.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

A social group is a collection of individuals, made up of two or more persons having interaction among them.’ It consists of people who interact with one another and recognize themselves as a distinct social unit. The number of members in a group can range from two to hundreds of individuals. In addition, the social group is dynamic in nature as it expands its activities from time to time. The interaction within social groups motivates them to identify with one another. Groups are mostly stable and enduring social units, for example, family, community, village, etc. Groups carry out many organized activities which are necessary for a society.

  1. What do you mean by Social Group?
  2. Can we call a crowd a social group? If no then why?
  3. What is meant by Primary and Secondary groups?

Answer:

  1. A social group is a collection of individuals, made up of two or more persons having interaction among them. It consists of people who interact with one another and recognize themselves as a distinct social unit.
  2. No, we can not call a crowd a social group as people do not interact with each other. If there will be no interaction, they won’t be able to make relations and that’s why we cannot call it a group.
  3. ⇒ Primary group. That group with which we have direct and close relations is known as a primary group such as family, school, playgroup, etc.
    ⇒ Secondary Group. That group with which we don’t have direct and close relations is known as a secondary group such as the father’s office, political party, etc.

Question 7.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Secondary groups are opposed to the primary groups. Although Cooley has not mentioned the second group while, explaining the primary group, later scholars assumed the idea of the second group from the primary group. Secondary groups are the groups that are large in size and are of relatively short duration. The interaction among the members is formal, utility-oriented, specialized, and temporary because the members are interested in one another mainly in terms of the roles and the function they perform. The classic examples of secondary groups are the buyers and sellers in a shop, the people at a cricket match, and the people belonging to a trade union. A corporation, a factory, an army, a students’ union, a university, a political party, and so on can be cited as some of the examples of secondary groups.

  1. What is meant by Secondary group?
  2. Give a few examples of Secondary groups.
  3. Give two differences between Primary and Secondary groups.

Answer:

  1. That group with which we don’t have direct and close relations, whose membership is always optional, is known as the secondary group.
  2. Father’s office, Mother’s office, Father’s friend group, Political Party, Labourers in an industry are a few examples of secondary groups.
  3. ⇒ Primary groups are small in size but secondary groups are large in size.
    ⇒ Members of primary groups have informal and direct relations with each other but members of secondary groups have formal and indirect relations.

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Question 8.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Cultures vary from society to society and each culture has its own specific values and norms. Social norms are the rules of behavior approved by society while values refer to general standards of what is right and desired behavior and what ought not to be done. For example, in one culture hospitality has an f high social value whereas in some others it may not be so. Similarly, in some societies polygamy is a customary form of marriage whereas, in many other societies, it is not accepted as an appropriate practice,

  1. What do you mean by culture?
  2. Is it possible to have the same culture of the two countries?
  3. Give types of culture.

Answer:

  1. Right from ancient times till today, whatever man has achieved with his experience is known as culture. Our views, experiences, science, technology, goods, values, traditions, etc. are the parts of culture.
  2. No, two countries cannot have the same culture. It may be possible that people may follow the same religion but there must be some differences between their views, ideas, values, etc. That’s why their culture is also different.
  3. Culture is of two types.
    ⇒ Material Culture. That part of the culture that we can see or touch is known as material culture. For example car, table, chair, books, pen, buildings, etc.
    ⇒ Non-Material Culture. That part of the culture that we cannot touch or see is known as non-material culture. For example our values, traditions, views, ideas, etc.

Question 9.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

During the various stages of one’s life the individual comes into contact with different groups, institutions, communities, and individuals, She/he learns quite a lot from them during her/his entire life. Various institutions and organizations play important roles in developing one’s personality and institutionalizing the various elements of culture.

Every society has agents of socialization—individuals, groups, organizations, and institutions—which provide substantial amounts of socialization during the life course. Agents are the mechanism by which the self learns the values, beliefs, and behavior patterns of the culture. Agents of socialization help new members find their place, just as they prepare older members for new responsibilities in society.

  1. What is meant by Socialisation?
  2. Name a few means of Socialisation.
  3. What do you mean by the Agents of Socialisation?

Answer:

  1. Socialization is a process of learning. Right away after his birth, till his death, an individual learns a lot, and this process of learning is known as socialization. It includes ways of living, ways of behavior, etc.
  2. Family, school, playgroup, political institutions, values, traditions, etc. act as the means of socialization.
  3. Agents of Socialisation are the mechanism by which the self learns the values, beliefs, and behavior patterns of the culture. Agents of socialization help new members find their place, just as they prepare older members for new responsibilities in society.

PSEB 11th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Question 10.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Although religion is somewhat less important in people’s lives now than it was a few generations ago, it still continues to exert considerable influence on our beliefs, values, and behaviors. In a country like India, religion governs every aspect of our life and can therefore be a very powerful agent of socialization.

Several types of rituals and rites, beliefs and faith, values and norms have been transmitted from one generation to another through religion. Religious festivals are generally performed collectively which helps in the process of socialization. It has been seen that the biggest determinant of adult religiosity is parental religiosity. If a person’s parents are religious, one is likely to be religious as well.

  1. What is Religion?
  2. What is the role of religion in Socialisation?
  3. ‘Religion’s influence on individual life is decreasing’. Why?

Answer:

  1. Religion is nothing but faith in any supernatural power that is beyond our existence and imagination. It is a collection of beliefs, values, traditions, etc. in which followers of that religion keep a strong faith.
  2. Religion is of great importance in socialization because an individual never
    does any work against religious values. Right from his childhood, an individual is told about religious values and is unconsciously attached to his religion. He never does any work against religious beliefs. In this way, religion keeps control of him and socializes him as well.
  3. It is true that Religion’s influence on individual life is decreasing. Now people are getting an education and they are more inclined towards science. But there is no place of reason in religion that is most important in science. That’s why now people have started giving preference to science.

Question 11.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

Marriage is an institution created to satisfy the physical, social, psychological, cultural, and economic needs of men and women. It permits man and woman to establish a relationship with each other in order to form a family. Regulation of sexual activities through stable relationships is the primary aim of marriage. In simple words, marriage can be defined as an institution that allows men and women entry into family life, sanctions the birth of children, and lays the foundation of the various rights and obligations of husband, wife, and children. Society gives its approval to the. the marital relationship between a man and woman generally in a civil or religious ceremony. Married couples have to fulfill many obligations towards each other and society in general. Marriage also serves an important economic function as it defines property rights of inheritance. Thus, we can see that marriage includes a multi-dimensional relationship between a man and a woman.

  1. What is meant by marriage?
  2. What do we call marriage in Hinduism?
  3. Why is the importance of marriage decreasing?

Answer:

  1. Marriage is an institution created to satisfy the physical, social, psychological, cultural, and economic needs of men and women. It permits the couple to establish a relationship with each other in order to form a family.
  2. In Hinduism, marriage is known as a religious sacrament because it is completed by performing many religious ceremonies.
  3. There is no denying the fact that marriage’s importance is decreasing. Now marriage is not considered a religious sacrament but a contract that can be broken at any time. These days many young boys and girls live with each other without doing married. That’s why the importance of marriage is decreasing.

Question 12.
Read the given source and answer the following questions.

The study of family is significant as it plays a vital role in the formation of human society by binding men and women and children in a stable relationship. Transmission of culture takes place within the family. Cultural wisdom and knowledge about social norms, customs, and values are passed on from one generation to another. The family in which one is born is called the ‘family of orientation’. Another term for such a family is a consanguine family which consists of members among whom there exists blood relationship brother and sister, father and son, etc. The family which a person sets up after marriage is called the ‘family of procreation’ or the conjugal family which consists of adult members among whom there exists sexual relationship.

  1. What do you mean by family?
  2. What are ‘Family of Orientation’ and ‘Family of Procreation’?
  3. Why is the study of family important?

Answer:

  1. A family is an institution created by males and females to establish sexual relations, to produce children, and to bring them.
  2. A family in which a child takes birth is known as the Family of Orientation. The family which a person sets up after marriage is called the ‘Family of Procreation’.
  3. The study of family is important as it plays a great role in the formation of human society by binding men, women, and children in a stable relationship. Transmission of culture takes place only in the family. Cultural wisdom and knowledge about social customs, norms, values, etc. are passed on from one generation to another.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Source Based Questions

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Sociology Book Solutions Source Based Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Sociology Source Based Questions

Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Question 1.
The tribal population in India as per the 2011 Census constitutes 68% of the country’s total population. The state with the highest population of tribal is Mizoram; the state with the lowest population of tribes is Goa. The Union Territory (U.T.) with the highest population of tribals is Lakshadweep and the U.T. with the lowest population of tribals in Andaman and Nicobar Island. The largest tribal community in India is the Santhals, who are found mainly in West Bengal, Bihar, Jharkhand and Orissa.

  1. In which Indian region, tribals reside the most?
  2. Which different names are given to tribes?
  3. What is a tribe?

Answer:

  1. Although the tribal population lives more in Central India if we look into their population percentage, their percentage in population is more in the north-eastern region of India.
  2. Tribals are called by different names in different regions such as Adivasi, Vanvasi, Tribe, Pahari, Scheduled tribe etc.
  3. A tribe is a group of people that lives very much away from our civilisation such as forests, mountains or valleys whose members are blood relatives, which is endogamous and which is different from other tribes on the basis of language, religion and other features.

Question 2.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Deforestation is one of the major causes of environmental degradation. It implies the cutting down of trees. Besides, the expansion of cropped areas and pastures are also the major sources of deforestation. During earlier times, the tribals were able to survive because of the availability of forest and natural resources. They were totally dependent on forests for their livelihood. But due to industrialisation, urbanisation, agriculture, commercial logging, increase in population, fuel-wood collection, etc. the deforestation has increased and affected the tribal’s livelihood directly and indirectly. The loss of forest covers also influences the climate and contributes to loss of the biodiversity.

  1. What is meant by deforestation?
  2. What are the reasons for deforestation?
  3. What is the impact of deforestation on tribal life?

Answer:

  1. When naturally grown trees are cut down due to different reasons, it is known as deforestation.
  2. ⇒ Forests are cut down to increase agricultural and pastoral areas.
    ⇒ The land is needed to make dams and to make houses for an increasing population which comes by cutting forests.
    ⇒ We need wood to make furniture and food and that’s why forests are cleared.
  3. ⇒ It reduces the habitat for the tribal people.
    ⇒ Tribals get a lot many things from forests and now they can’t get all these things.
    ⇒ Tribal economy is mainly dependent upon forests. Deforestation completely destroys the tribal economy.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 1 Tribal Society

Question 3.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

The term ‘rural’ is the opposite of ‘urban’. The term ‘rural society’ is used almost interchangeably with the term Village’. As per census 2011, out of 121 crore Indians, 83.3 crore population lives in the rural areas. The rural community has a long history of its own. It is a group of about 5000 people depending on agriculture and allied occupations, permanently residing in a particular geographic area and participating in common socio-economic and cultural activities.

  1. Give the meaning to the word ‘Village’.
  2. Give three features of a village.
  3. Give three differences between a village and a town.

Answer:

  1. A village is a geographical area that is close to the natural environment, whose most of the population is engaged in agricultural-related occupations and which is different from urban areas due to its distinct features.
  2. ⇒Rural people have direct and primary relations.
    ⇒ Most of the rural population is engaged in agriculture or related occupations.
    ⇒ Villages are small in size and that’s why they have social uniformity.
  3. ⇒ Villages are small in size but towns are large in size.
    ⇒ Rural people have direct and primary relations with each other but urban people have indirect and secondary relations.
    ⇒ Most of the rural population is directly or indirectly engaged in agriculture or related occupations but more than 75% urban population is engaged in industrial work or non-agricultural occupations.

Question 4.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

One of the major problems of rural society is indebtedness. The reasons for the chronic indebtedness are poverty and a deficit economy. This problem is not related to just one individual but is passed on from one generation to the next generation. Taking debt for the purpose of agricultural production is indeed necessary as it contributes to production. However, the rural people incur debts for non-productive purposes such as, to meet the family needs, to perform social functions (related to marriage; birth and death), litigation, etc. Since money borrowed does not contribute to production but rather to consumption, it drags the rural people into indebtedness. Thus, it becomes impossible to repay these loans and the rural population becomes. an easy victim of exploitation by greedy moneylenders and middlemen who take advantage of the situation and earn money at a very high rate of interest. As a result, the moneylenders snatch whatever little property these people have, such as, house or land, etc. This system is prevalent in most parts of our country.

  1. What is meant by Indebtedness?
  2. Give reasons for indebtedness.
  3. Give three effects of indebtedness.

Answer:

  1. When an individual takes some loan from another individual, money lender, or bank and is unable to pay it back on time, it is called indebtedness.
  2. People take loans due to many factors such as to fulfill family needs, to solve legal problems, to do agriculture, to do marriage or to complete death ceremony, etc.
  3. ⇒ Due to indebtedness, an individual is exploited by the moneylenders.
    ⇒ His land and house are captured by a moneylender and he becomes homeless.
    ⇒ All his means of living and livelihood are taken away by the moneylender and occasionally rural people commit suicide.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 1 Tribal Society

Question 5.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Urbanism is an important element of the urban society which separates the identity or personality of the people from rural society and tribal society. It represents a way of living. It also denotes the diffusion of urban culture and the evolution of urban society. It reflects an organization of society in terms of complex division of labor, high level of technology, high mobility, the interdependence of its members in fulfilling economic functions, and impersonality in social relations. Louis Wirth has mentioned four characteristics of urbanism: Transiency, Superficiality; Ahbrtymity and Individualism.

  1. What is meant by urbanization?
  2. Give three elements of urbanization.
  3. Which four features of urbanism are given by Louis Wirth?

Answer:

  1. When rural people start to migrate to urban areas to settle there or to find occupation, it is called urbanization.
  2. Following are the elements of urbanization:
    ⇒ Population of more than 5000.
    ⇒ The density of population is up to 400 persons per square kilometer.
    ⇒ 75% population is engaged in agriculture or related occupations. Transiency Superficiality Anonymity Individualism.

Question 6.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

The growth of population in cities is so fast that it has become impossible to provide adequate residential accommodation to all. Hence, the housing problem or what is known as ‘ho, uselessness’ has become one of the serious problems of the urban setting. The pressure on space in cities is so tremendous that large numbers of people are forced to live on roads, buts ‘stands, railway stations and in poorly equipped houses. It is said that around half of the city population in India is either ill-housed or has to pay more than twenty per cent of their income on rent. Megacities like Mumbai, Calcutta, Delhi, and Chennai are suffering from acute housing problems. ”

  1. Why is the urban population increasing?
  2. What are the demerits of the increasing urban population?
  3. Is the increasing urban population a major problem?

Answer:

  1. There is a conception among rural people about more facilities in urban areas and the availability of more occupations that’s why rural people are moving towards urban areas. That’s why the urban population is continually increasing.
  2. ⇒ There is a lack of living space in urban areas.
    ⇒ Lot many people are forced to live under the open sky or in slums.
    ⇒ 20% of people’s earning is spent on paying rent which reduces their savings.

It is true that the increasing urban population is becoming a major problem. People migrate to urban areas in search of occupations and more facilities ‘ and when they are unable to get the things, they become mentally sick. That’s why crimes are increasing in urban areas which itself is becoming a major problem.

Question 7.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:
transformed into the same group activity with the help of some organ or instrument. A political party is one such organ. Hence, Vladimir Lenin added the idea of a party in Marxism to prepare the workers for class struggle.

  1. Who was Karl Marx?
  2. What is meant by class consciousness?
  3. Explain in brief Karl Marx’s concept of class struggle.

Answer:

  1. Karl Marx was a German philosopher who gave a great contribution to the development of Sociology. His concepts became the basis of the Russian Revolution of 1917 and paved the way for the making of laborers’ government in Russia.
  2. When a group becomes conscious about its existence, features, etc., and starts to consider itself separate from other groups, it is called class consciousness. According to Marx, class consciousness leads to class identification and class solidarity.
  3. According to Marx, there are two groups in society-Capitalist and Labourer class. There exist a struggle between both groups. Capitalist always exploits the laborers with the help of their money. He wants to get more work from labourers by paying less money and labourer wants to get more money by doing less work. This leads to a struggle between the both which is known as class struggle.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 1 Tribal Society

Question 8.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

In rural India th£ big landlords, the absentee landlords, the upper and middle peasantry and the capitalist farmers basically belong to upper and middle castes. And low peasantry, marginal farmers and landless agriculturists belong to lower castes. The class of moneylenders in rural India is basically composed of castes related to Vaishya-Varna. At the same time it is also a reality that because of protective discrimination (e.g. reservations), new opportunity structures based on industries and education and spatial mobility, some sections of lower castes have entered into the sphere of middle and upper classes. However, class status can be altered since it is usually achieved but caste status can never be changed due to its ascriptive nature.

  1. Which classes are available in rural areas?
  2. Which reasons gave chances to different groups to do progress in society?
  3. Is it possible to change status in class?

Answer:

  1. In rural India, big landlords, upper and middle-class peasants, big capitalist farmers, and landless laborers live and they are divided into the upper class, middle class, and lower class according to their landholding.
  2. Although many facilities are available in society in the present age and one can do progress with his hard work but many groups are provided with reservations and other protective measures with which they can progress in society.
  3. Yes, status can be changed in the class system. If an individual has the ability, he can do hard work and earn more money or can get any higher post. It increases his status in society.

Question 9.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Gender relations as we have already discussed refer to men-women relations on the basis of ideological, cultural, political and economic issues. In gender relations, we examine gender subordination. Issues relating to women empowerment and exploitative trends about women are found differently in different societies. In gender relations, it becomes important to talk about the institution of marriage, family, pre-marital, marital, and extramarital relations, the issues of homosexuality, issues related to transgenders, the nature of intimate relations as human sexuality, etc. It is generally accepted that men and women are naturally different because of physiological distinctiveness. But such biological or physiological differences with the support structure of society and culture are converted into social differences. Anthropological and historical evidence has proved that cultural revivalism establishes and re-establishes these differences in relation to vital roles of social interaction.

  1. What is meant by Gender Relations?
  2. Differentiate between Sex and Gender.
  3. How does gender difference become social difference?

Answer:

  1. Gender relations tell us about men-women relations on the basis of cultural, ideological, economic, and political issues.
  2. Sex differences are understood as biological whereas gender differences refer to that behavior and attitudes which are constructed through social practices.
  3.  It is believed that males and females have different natures due to their natural and physical differences but biological and physical differences get converted into social differences with the help of society and culture. Physical differences establish social differences in social interactions.

Question 10.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

In order to understand the socio-cultural changes, one needs to comprehend the meaning of Westernisation. According to M.N. Srinivas, westernization refers to “the changes brought about in Indian society and culture as a result of over 150 years of British rule and the term subsumes changes occurring at different levels – technology institutions, ideology, values”. It can therefore be said that the growth of westernization can be traced from the period of the British Raj. No doubt colonial rule lead to exploitation and suppression of the masses. But at the same time, it had also brought a few radical changes in the society and culture of India.

  1. Who gave the concept of Westernisation?
  2. What is meant by Westernisation?
  3. What were the reasons for Westernisation?

Answer:

  1. The concept of Westernisation was given by a famous Indian Sociologist M.N. Srinivas.
  2. According to Srinivas, “Westernisation refers to the changes brought about in Indian society and culture as a result of over 150 years of British rule and the term subsumes changes occurring at different levels technology, institutions, ideology, values”.
  3. The British brought many changes to Indian society. They established an army, police, and court system where people of different castes started working together. They also established railways, post and telegraph systems, roads, rivers, etc. They also brought a printing press and established factories in India. People started imitating the British living style which increased the process of westernization a great deal.

Question 11.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Reference group means a group to which we compare ourselves. That group becomes the benchmark according to which one starts changing its opinion, behavior, attitude, and beliefs. For example, Ram is a below-average student in a class. He got inspired by the group of intelligent students in his class and decided to improve himself. There onwards he starts observing their peculiar traits, behavior, and orients himself making them his reference group. He become punctual, disciplined, and improved in his studies. In our day-to-day life, we rely on many reference groups. It may be family, peer group, actor etc.

  1. Who gave the concept of Reference Group?
  2. What is meant by Reference Group?
  3. Does every person have a reference group? If yes then why?

Answer:

  1. The concept of Reference Group was given by Herbert Hyman in 1942.
  2. Reference group means a group to which we compare ourselves. That group becomes an ideal group according to which one starts to change his opinion, behaviour, attitude and beliefs.
  3. Yes, every individual has an ideal group or reference group. Actually, it is human nature that everyone wants to do progress and we start to follow any individual or group. We try to imitate the values, ideas of that group and then it becomes a reference group for us.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 1 Tribal Society

Question 12.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Sanskritisation is a broader term and it can include in itself the narrower process of Brahminisation. For instance, Brahmins are vegetarians and teetotallers by and large. But some of them like Kashmiris, Bengali, Brahmins etc. eat non-vegetarian food, as well. If the term Brahminisation had been used, it would have become essential to specify which particular Brahmin group was being discussed Moreover, it has also been asserted by Srinivas that the reference groups of Sanskritisation are not always Brahmins.

The process of imitation need not necessarily be oriented on the model of Brahmins. He has given the example of low castes of Mysore who adopted the way of life of lingayats who are not Brahmins but who claim equality with Brahmins. The lower caste has made not only Brahmins their reference group but also tend to imitate the way of life of Kshatriyas, Vaishyas, Jats, etc. in different parts of the country. Hence, Sanskritisation means not only adaptation of new customs and habits, but also exposure to new ideas, values, and behavior patterns of the upper caste.

  1. Who gave the concept of Sanskritisation?
  2. What is meant by Sanskritisation?
  3. Which castes became ideal castes to be imitated in Sanskritisation?

Answer:

  1. M.N. Srinivas gave the concept of Sanskritisation.
  2. When lower castes start to imitate the living styles, habits, values, etc. of any upper caste or nearby caste, it is called Sanskritisation. It means not only adaptation of new customs and habits, but also exposure to new ideas, values, and behavior patterns of the upper caste.
  3. In the process of Sanskritisation, lower castes started adopting customs, habits, values of upper castes or nearby castes and in the process, Brahmins, Kshatriyas, and Vaishyas became model castes or ideal castes.

Question 13.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Class-based movements include both worker’s movements as well as peasant movements. The main demand of workers as well as of peasants was freedom from economic exploitation. The trade union movement in India illustrates a study of the working class, their demands, the response of their owners, and measures taken up by the government. With the growth of cotton mills, jute mills, and the tea industry in India the poor Indian masses got employment in these factories as workers. Low wages, long working hours, unhygienic conditions, exploitation at the hands of native and foreign capitalists made their conditions miserable.

A number of Factory Acts came at various points of time but they too, could not improve the plight of the working-class people. Further, peasants were also exploited economically. Well, known peasant revolts were the Bengal revolt against the indigo plantation system and the peasant movement in Punjab.

  1. What is meant by class-based movement?
  2. Why were class-based movements started in Indian industries?
  3. Give examples of class-based movements.

Answer:

  1. When a movement is started by keeping in mind the demands of a particular class, it is known as a class-based movement.
  2. The condition of laborers in the Indian industries was miserable. They were paid fewer wages, had more working hours, and were exploited by the local and foreign industrialists. That’s why workers movements were started in the Indian industries.
  3. In class-based movements, we can include the movement of Trade Union Organisation, Peasant movement, etc. but the Peasantry Movement of Punjab, the Workers Movement of Mumbai textile mills, and Indigo Plantation of Bengal are very important.

Question 14.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

Drug addiction is a problem that has been increasing immensely in our society today. Young people are more vulnerable to drug abuse because of poor self-esteem, low achievement at school, family history, and peer pressure. On the other hand, sometimes they feel that they are too bright, too powerful and are too much in control to become addictive and hence get into the habit of taking drugs. Thus, addiction can trap anyone. It can lead to harming one’s health, causing problems in family structure, and contributing to delinquency in society. The persons who get addicted often lose interest in other activities of their life. As a result, they are not able to take care of their responsibilities and may become a liability for their families as well as their society.

  1. What is meant by drug addiction?
  2. Why do people consume drugs?
  3. What is the result of drug addiction?

Answer:

  1. When an individual becomes so addicted to using liquor, opium, or any other drug that he can’t live without it, this is known as drug addiction.
  2. Many people consume drugs for fun sake, many consume them to reduce stress, many people use them due to any pressure, etc. Gradually, they become so addicted to the drug that it becomes impossible for them to live without it and become victims of a trap.
  3. ⇒ It is having a bad impact on their health as they are unable to do anything.
    ⇒ All of his economic resources get exhausted and economically, he becomes quite weak.
    ⇒ It is having a direct impact on social progress.

PSEB 12th Class Sociology Solutions Chapter 1 Tribal Society

Question 15.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

During the course of old age, metabolism processes slow down. People become weak both physically and mentally. They are more prone to sickness, diseases, syndromes, etc. The immunity of a person diminishes. Older people are most vulnerable to non-communicable diseases. Declining health due to increasing age is complicated by the non-availability of good quality age-sensitive health care for a large proportion of older persons. In addition to this, lack of information and knowledge in combination with high costs of disease management puts old-age care beyond the reach of older persons, especially those who are poor and disadvantaged.

  1. Who is an old-age person?
  2. Which three problems are faced by an old-age person?
  3. How can we remove the problems of an old-age person?

Answer:

  1. Anyone who is retired from his Job or is above the age of 60 years is known as an old age person.
  2. ⇒ He is suffered from many diseases such as sugar, high blood pressure, etc.
    ⇒ After retirement, his income gets exhausted and now he becomes dependent upon his children to meet his daily needs.
    ⇒ His physical ability to fight diseases becomes so low. He is unable to clearly listen or see things.
  3. ⇒ Laws must be strictly implemented so that no one could harass them.
    ⇒ Government must provide excellent and free medical facilities to the elders.
    ⇒ Government must provide them good old age pension to reduce their financial dependency on children.

Question 16.
Read the following source and answer the given questions:

There are more than one billion people in the world who live with one or the other form of disability. Many of us have people with disabilities as friends or family, who have difficulties in day-to-day life. People with disabilities are subject to multiple deprivations with limited access to basic services, including education, employment, rehabilitation facilities, etc. Additionally, widespread social stigma plays a major role in hindering their normal social and economic life.

The term disability carries with it a connotation of a lack or deficiency whether mental, physical, or sensory. It has been defined primarily in terms of medical deficit. Moreover, the word disability is itself not a homogenous category as it includes different kinds of bodily variations, physical impairments, sensory deficits, and mental or learning inadequacies which may be either congenital or acquired.

  1. What is meant by disability?
  2. Which problems are faced by disabled people?
  3. Give types of disability.

Answer:

  1. The term disability carries with it a connotation of a lack or deficiency whether mental, physical, or sensory. It is primarily defined in terms of medical deficit.
  2. ⇒ Disable people are unable to get a proper education.
    ⇒ Their chances of getting jobs become quite limited.
    ⇒ They cannot do any work fast the way which a normal person can do.
    ⇒ It becomes an obstacle to their economic growth.
  3. Disability is of many types such as:
    ⇒ Locomotor Disability
    ⇒ Visual Disability
    ⇒ Hearing Disability
    ⇒ Mental Disability
    ⇒ Speech Disability.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Political Science Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write a note on establishment (formation) of SAARC and discuss its objectives.
Or
Describe background and efforts made for the establishment of South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation (SAARC).
Answer:
The quest for regional co-operation in South Asia, as initiated by the late Zia-Ur-Rahman of Bangladesh in March, 1980, was given concrete foundation with the emergence of SAARC (South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation) in August, 1983. On August 1, 1983, foreign ministers of seven countries (Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka) met at New Delhi and approved programme of economic co-operation. They decided on an integrated programme of action for regional co-operation. Thus, the seven South Asian countries formally established the SAARC in 1985.
In its 14th Summit which was held at New Delhi on April 3-4-2007, Afghanistan becomes the 8th member of SAARC.

Background And Efforts Made for the Establishment of SAARC:
1. Working Paper on SAARC:
Before the formal launching of SAARC, useful and productive ground work was done by several meetings of the seven South Asian states. The working paper was prepared by Bangladesh’s former President Mr. Zia-Ur-Rehman. He stressed the need of setting up an organisation to promote regional co-operation.

2. Colombo Meeting of the Foreign Ministers of South Asian States (1981):
At this meeting the foreign ministers of South Asian countries- India, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri-Lanka and Maldives, acknowledged the importance of regional co-operation. The meeting agreed to explore the possibilities of co-operation in five spheres i.e. agriculture, rural development, communication, weather and health and population activities.

3. Foreign Secretaries. Meeting in Kathmandu (1981):
At this meeting the recommendations of the seven nation study group and the report of the coordination committee of the whole was accepted. It also decided to explore the possibilities of Transport, Postal Service and Scientific and Technological cooperation.

4. Islamabad Meeting of Foreign Secretaries (1982):
This meeting approved the recommendations of the study group set up in Kathmandu and decided to constitute new study groups on sports, arts and culture.

5. Dhaka Meeting (1983):
This meeting evaluated the mutual co-operation in different fields and recommended the adoption of integrated programme of action by the foreign ministers. It also decided to set up a standing committee.

6. New Delhi Meeting of Foreign Ministers (1983):
In this meeting the foreign ministers signed the declaration of South Asian regional cooperation. The declaration listed the following objectives of South Asian Regional Co-operation.

  • to promote the welfare of the people of South Asia and to raise their standard of living,
  • to accelerate economic growth, social progress and cultural development in the region;
  • to promote and strengthen collective self-reliance among these countries,
  • to contribute to mutual trust, understanding and appreciation of one another’s problems;
  • to promote active collaboration and mutual assistance in various fields;
  • to strengthen co-operation among themselves and regional forums; and
  • to co-operate with international and regional organisations with similar aims and objectives.

The declaration also stated that SAARC is based on respect for the principle of sovereign equality; territorial integrity, political independence, non¬interference in the international affairs of other states and mutual benefits. The heads of state or government meet annually. It also decided to set up different committees.

7. New Delhi Meeting (1984):
This meeting gave a call for developing friendly relations among the countries of this region, along with co-operation in socio-economic and cultural field.

8. Standing Committee Meeting in Male in Feb. 1985:
This meeting recommended the establishment of a ministry council of South Asian countries through which the common will of mutual co-operation could be given institutional form. Thus, after so much hard work, studies and meeting SAARC was formally inaugurated in Dec. 1985.

Objectives and Principles of SAARC:
The South Asian Association of Regional Co-operation was formally inaugurated in Dec. 1985. The SAARC is an organisation of Eight countries of South Asia:Bhutan, India, Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka. SAARC was established primarily for co-operation in agriculture, rural development, science and technology, culture, health, population control, narcotics and terrorism.

Objectives of SAARC:
The objectives of the association are : 1. to promote the welfare of the people of South : 2. to accelerate economic growth, social progress and cultural development in the region; 3. to promote and strengthen collective self-reliance among these countries. 4. to contribute to mutual trust, understanding and appreciation of one another’s problems; 5. to promote active collaboration and mutual assistance in various fields; 6. to strengthen co-operation among themselves and regional forums; and 7. to co-operate with international and regional organisations.

Principles of SAARC:

  1. SAARC is based on the principles of sovereign equality; territorial integrity, political independence, non-interference in the internal affairs of other states and mutual benefits.
  2. Decisions at all levels are taken on the basis of unanimity. But bilateral and contentious issues will be excluded from the deliberations.
  3. SAARC is not a political organisation but is formed to accelerate development through mutual co-operation.
  4. The members of SAARC would not act as obstruction in having relations with the individual countries of SAARC and with other countries.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 2.
What important activities SAARC has taken up during its existence? What has been India’s role in them?
Answer:
SAARC is active since 1985. It has taken up many activities as a regional co-operation association. It’s activities are as follows :
First SAARC Summit:
The leaders of seven South Asian countries Bangladesh, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Maldives, Nepal, Pakistan and India, concluded on Dec. 8, 1985. at Dhaka their first ever regional summit. The Summit Conference adopted a Charter of this regional body to be known as South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation. This marked a major development in co-operation among the countries of the region. It will also help in the maintenance of peace and stability in the area.

Second Summit of SAARC:
The second summit of SAARC was held at Bangalore on Nov. 16-17, 1986 under the Chairmanship of Sh. Rajiv Gandhi. It decided to evolve a joint policy to fight terrorism in South Asia, to set up technical committees on women’s participation in development, drug abuse and drug trafficking.

Third Summit of SAARC:
The third summit of SAARC was held at Kathmandu (Nepal) in Nov. 1987, where agreements were reached on terrorism and established a SAARC Reserved Food Grain Stock. The Reserved Food Grain Stock, launched at the summit, will begin with a stock of 200,000 tonnes of wheat and rice. The summit also decided to commission a comprehensive study of the region’s environment and the necessary measures for its protection and preservation.

Fourth SAARC Summit:
The fourth annual summit of SAARC ended in Islamabad on December 31, 1988. The summit pledged to stamp out terrorism and meet the basic needs of the people through a regional plan ‘SAARC 2000’ with specific targets.

Fifth SAARC Summit 1990:
Fifth SAARC summit was held in Male, the capital of Maldives, in November, 1990. The summit decided to enlarge visa-free travel facilities beyond the present categories of members of Parliament and Supreme Court Judges.

Ninth Session of SAARC Council of Ministers, 1991. On July 4, 1991 the Ninth Session of the SAARC Council of Ministers agreed on taking co-ordinated action to combat the menace of terrorism which they said threatened to destabilize the region. On the economic front, the SAARC Council-also approved to institutionalise co-operation in tourism and trade manufacture and service.

Sixth SAARC Summit 1991:
Sixth SAARC summit was held in Colombo, the capital of Sri Lanka, on Dec. 21, 1991. The seven SAARC nations have agreed to liberalise trade and called for greater co-operation and interaction among the member states to combat terrorism in the region. India has done well by proposing a collective economic security system for the region.

Seventh SAARC Summit 1993:
Seventh SAARC summit was held at Dhaka, the capital of Bangladesh, on April, 1993. The South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation entered a new phase of economic co-operation as the seventh summit approved the 63 point Dhaka declaration and endorsing the South Asia Preferential trade agreement seeking to reduce trade barriers in the region.

Eighth SAARC Summit 1995:
Eighth SAARC summit was held in New Delhi on 2nd May, 1995. All the members of SAARC countries agreed to liberalise trade and called for greater co-operation. Delhi declaration of the eighth SAARC summit called for an international convention prohibiting the use or threat of use of nuclear weapons under any circumstances and strongly deploring acts of terrorism spreading in and outside the region. The declaration called for the production of organised tourism in a big way in the SAARC region. Another significance of this Summit was agreement on South Asian Preferential Trading Arrangement (SAPTA).

Ninth SAARC Summit 1997:
Ninth SAARC summit was held at Male, the capital of Maldives on 11th May, 1997. Leaders of seven South Asian nations accepted India’s proposal to transform the region into a free trade area by 2001. SAARC countries agreed for the removal of all trade barriers and structural impediments by advancing the deadline by four years from the earlier agreed goal of SAFTA by 2005.

Tenth SAARC Summit 1998:
Tenth SAARC summit was held at Colombo on 29th July, 1998. Despite its failings and shortcomings, SAARC has taken several bold steps including establishing a framework for SAPTA (South Asian Preferential Trade Arrangement) and SAFTA (South Asian Free Trade Area). India made a fine gesture that it would remove import restrictions on over two thousand products to facilitate intra-regional trade. With the solitary exception of Pakistan, all other member-countries of SAARC also agreed on the need to hasten the process by two years to realise SAFTA by 2001.

Eleventh SAARC Summit, 2002:
The Eleventh SAARC summit was held at Kathmandu, the capital of Nepal on 5th Jan. 2002 under tenscious shadow of Indo- Pak relations. The 11th SAARC Summit decided for the urgent conclusion of comprehensive convention on combating International terrorism and conducting international cooperation in ending this scourge in conformity with the U.N. Charter. The Summit recognised the importance of creating a free trade area. The declaration called for coordination among the SAARC member states on all World Trade Organisation issues.

Twelfth SAARC Summit (2004):
The 12th SAARC Summit was held at Islamabad; the capital of Pakistan in January 2004. During this summit firstly, SAFTA was approved and it will take effect from January, 2006. Secondly, all the SAARC nations signed its ‘Social Charter’. Thirdly, it was decided to start a ‘SAARC Award’ to respect and encourage the contribution of individual in the spheres of peace, poverty alleviation, social welfare etc. Fourthly, the SAARC nations signed a protocol on the prevention of terrorism.

Thirteenth SAARC Summit (2005):
The 13th SAARC summit was held at Dhaka on November 12, 2005. Summit decided a united fight against terrorism afflicting the region.

Fourteenth SAARC Summit:
The Fourteenth SAARC Summit was held at New Delhi on April 3-4, 2007. All the eight members were present. Afghanistan is the latest addition in the SAARC and because of this addition the total members of the SAARC are eight now. SAARC Summit adopted a 30-point declaration with commitment to ensure market access by all SAARC member countries and also collectively combat poverty, diseases, disaster and terrorism. All the eight members of the SAARC were unanimous for taking strict steps to curb terrorism in the Universe. Two agreements on establishing South Asian University and SAARC Food Bank were signed in the concluding session of the 14th SAARC Summit in New Delhi.

Fifteenth SAARC SUMMIT:
The Fifteenth SAARC Summit was held in Colombo, SRI LANKA on August, 2-3, 2008. The Summit concluded with the leaders expressing serious concern over the threat posed by terrorism to the peace, stability and security of the region and emphasizing the need for strongest possible co-operation in fighting terror and transnational organised crime. The Summit adopted the Colombo Declaration titled ‘Partnership for the growth of our people’ at the concluding session on August 3. The declaration stressed the importance of completing all legislative and other relevant measures to implement within the member states the provisions of the Regional Convention on Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic substances.

Sixteenth SAARC Summit:
The Sixteenth SAARC Summit was held in Thimpu, Bhutan on April 28-29, 2010. The Summit concluded with the leaders express serious concerns over terrorism. SAARC leaders also decided to celebrated the decade of 2011-2020 as a ‘Decade of Intraregional Connectivity in SAARC’.

17th SAARC Summit (2011):
The 17th SAARC Summit was held in Addu (Maidive) on Nov. 10-11, 2011. The Addu declaration said that the leaders agreed upon the theme of ‘Building Bridges.’ The leaders committed to work towards a huge boost in intra SAARC trade, improving air, rail, motor and water transport connectivity between member countries and putting their heads together to solve common development concerns.

18th SAARC Summit-2014:
The 18th SAARC Summit was held in 2014 in Nepal. It concluded adopting a 36-point declaration with commitment to control Terrorism and Religious Fundamentalism.

India’s Role in SAARC :
India has been playing a vital role in the activities of SAARC. To make this organisation a success India has made constructive contributions. Its contributions in the founding and functioning of the organisation are significant and these are as follow:

  1. India played a leading role in the formation of SAARC. With India’s effort SAARC was constituted in 1985 with a view to promote co-operation in the neighbouring countries.
  2. The second SAARC Summit was held in Bangalore in 1986 under the chairmanship of Late Prime Minister Sh. Rajiv Gandhi.
  3. India announced a grant of Rs. 150 lacs to SAARC for the year 1987-88.
  4. In 1988, India offered 1,53,200 tonnes of foodgrains to create a reserved foodgrains stock for SAARC nations.
  5. India announced a contribution of Rs. 2 crores for SAARC activities for the year 1989-90.
  6. Industrial Development Bank of India hosted a meeting of national development institutions of the member countries in October 1991.
  7. In Dec. 1991, during the Sixth SAARC Summit India proposed a collective economic security system for the region.
  8. India hosted the first cultural festival of SAARC countries in October, 1992.
  9. India also ratified SAARC convention on Narcotic Drugs.
  10. The Eighth SAARC Summit was held in New Delhi on 4 May, 1995.
  11. The first SAARC Trade fair was also held in New Delhi from 9th to 14th January, 1996.
  12. India has removed all Quantitative Restrictions from SAARC countries from August 1, 1998.
  13. To boost the trade within the region India has placed over 2000 products from the Restricted List to Open General List.
  14. Under SAPTA India offered duty concessions to SAARC nations on 160 items.
  15. India has offered to conclude bilateral free trade agreements with those SAARC nations who are willing to move faster.
  16. India has already free trade agreements with Nepal and Bhutan.
  17. India has given financial aid to SAARC nations on a large scale particularly to Nepal, Bhutan and Maldives.
  18. In 12th SAARC Summit India pledged a contribution of Rs. 21.5 million for conferences to give concrete shape to freeing the SAARC region from hunger and giving an added impetus to the SAARC food bank.
  19. In the 13th SAARC Summit India offered concrete proposals to strengthen, including the facility of daily air services by designated airlines on a reciprocal basis, provision of transit facilities, setting up of a South Asian University and establishment of Regional Food Bank, SAARC High Economic Council and SAARC Museum of Textiles and Handicrafts.

Thus, India has played a constructive role in SAARC. It has always helped the member-states in time of need and emergency. India’s role in SAARC activities is a mark of India’s firm belief in SAARC and its policies.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 3.
Describe India’s role in SAARC.
Answer:
India has been playing a vital role in the activities of SAARC. To make this organisation a success India has made constructive contributions. Its contributions in the founding and functioning of the organisation are significant and these are as follow:

  1. India played a leading role in the formation of SAARC. With India’s effort SAARC was constituted in 1985 with a view to promote co-operation in the neighbouring countries.
  2. The second SAARC Summit was held in Bangalore in 1986 under the chairmanship of Late Prime Minister Sh. Rajiv Gandhi.
  3. India announced a grant of Rs. 150 lacs to SAARC for the year 1987-88.
  4. In 1988, India offered 1,53,200 tonnes of foodgrains to create a reserved foodgrains stock for SAARC nations.
  5. India announced a contribution of Rs. 2 crores for SAARC activities for the year 1989-90.
  6. Industrial Development Bank of India hosted a meeting of national development institutions of the member countries in October 1991.
  7. In Dec. 1991, during the Sixth SAARC Summit India proposed a collective economic security system for the region.
  8. India hosted the first cultural festival of SAARC countries in October, 1992.
  9. India also ratified SAARC convention on Narcotic Drugs.
  10. The Eighth SAARC Summit was held in New Delhi on 4 May, 1995.
  11. The first SAARC Trade fair was also held in New Delhi from 9th to 14th January, 1996.
  12. India has removed all Quantitative Restrictions from SAARC countries from August 1, 1998.
  13. To boost the trade within the region India has placed over 2000 products from the Restricted List to Open General List.
  14. Under SAPTA India offered duty concessions to SAARC nations on 160 items.
  15. India has offered to conclude bilateral free trade agreements with those SAARC nations who are willing to move faster.
  16. India has already free trade agreements with Nepal and Bhutan.
  17. India has given financial aid to SAARC nations on a large scale particularly to Nepal, Bhutan and Maldives.
  18. In 12th SAARC Summit India pledged a contribution of Rs. 21.5 million for conferences to give concrete shape to freeing the SAARC region from hunger and giving an added impetus to the SAARC food bank.
  19. In the 13th SAARC Summit India offered concrete proposals to strengthen, including the facility of daily air services by designated airlines on a reciprocal basis, provision of transit facilities, setting up of a South Asian University and establishment of Regional Food Bank, SAARC High Economic Council and SAARC Museum of Textiles and Handicrafts.

Thus, India has played a constructive role in SAARC. It has always helped the member-states in time of need and emergency. India’s role in SAARC activities is a mark of India’s firm belief in SAARC and its policies.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What do you know about SAARC? Write the names of its member countries.
Answer:
The quest for regional co-operation in South Asia, as initiated by late Zia- Ur-Rahman of Bangladesh in March 1980, was given a concrete foundation with the emergence of SAARC. The leaders of seven South Asian countries India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan and Maldives concluded on December 5, 1985 at Dhaka their first ever regional summit. The summit conference adopted a Charter of this regional body to be known as South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation.

This marked a major development in co-operation among the countries of this region. The Indian Prime Minister in his inaugural address termed it as the beginning of a new dawn. The Dhaka Declaration stated that the Heads of State or Government shall meet annually. The SAARC Secretariat was set up at Kathmandu on 16 January, 1987. In its 14th summit which was held at New Delhi on April, 3-4-2007, Afghanistan became the 8th member of SAARC. The basic aim of the organisation as declared by Dhaka Declaration is “to make the full use of all the human and natural resources and to accelerate the economic and social development of the region.”

Question 2.
Write main objectives of SAARC.
Answer:
The objectives of the association are:

  • to promote the welfare of the people of South
  • to accelerate economic growth, social progress and cultural development in the region;
  • to promote and strengthen collective self-reliance among these countries.
  • to contribute to mutual trust, understanding and appreciation of one another’s problems;
  • to promote active collaboration and mutual assistance in various fields;
  • to strengthen co-operation among themselves and regional forums; and
  • to co-operate with international and regional organisations.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 3.
WHhat are the main principles of SAARC? Write the names of its member countries.
Or
Write down the names of the member countries of SAARC.
Answer:
Principles of SAARC:

  1. SAARC is based on the principles of sovereign equality; territorial integrity, political independence, non-interference in the internal affairs of other states and mutual benefits.
  2. Decisions at all levels are taken on the basis of unanimity. But bilateral and contentious issues will be excluded from the deliberations.
  3. SAARC is not a political organisation but is formed to accelerate development through mutual co-operation.
  4. The members of SAARC would not act as obstruction in having relations with the individual countries of SAARC and with other countries.

Names of the member countries of SAARC:

  1. India
  2. Pakistan
  3. Bangladesh
  4. Bhutan
  5. Maldives
  6. Sri Lanka
  7. Nepal,
  8. Afghanistan.

Question 4.
Write a short note on SAFTA.
Answer:
The aim of SAFTA is to establish a ‘South Asian Free Trade Area’ through mutual co-operation. A free trade area means that trading among the countries of the area is free from taxes and custom restrictions. During its establishment it was hoped that SAFTA will replace SAPTA before the start of 21st century. The Tenth SAARC Summit decided to set up a committee of experts to conclude on Treaty 2001 on SAFTA. In 12th SAARC Summit held on January, 2004 in Islamabad the SAARC nations have signed the treaty.

On December 29, 2005 the Union Cabinet of India cleared the implementation of South Asian Free Trade Area (SAFTA) agreement though the actual movement of commodities among Seven Nations started from July 1, 2006. SAFTA allows for a differential and progressively freer regions. India, in effect, will offer relatively unhindered access to its markets for Bangladesh, Bhutan, Maldives and Nepal, the poorest SAARC members, while different ‘sensitive lists’ on goods and services would be prepared for Pakistan and Sri Lanka.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 5.
Write down any four achievements of ‘SAARC’.
Answer:

  • All the member countries of SAARC have come closer to one another and their mutual tension has been lessened.
  • All the member countries are collectively working for their socio-economic development.
  • SAARC has created “Food Stock Pool”. It has developed a sense of self-reliance and self-respect among SAARC nations.
  • SAARC has accelerated development in the region.

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What do you know about SAARC?
Answer:
The quest for regional co-operation in South Asia, as initiated by late Zia- Ur-Rahman of Bangladesh in March 1980, was given a concrete foundation with the emergence of SAARC. The leaders of seven South Asian countries India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan and Maldives concluded on December 5, 1985 at Dhaka their first ever regional summit.

Question 2.
Write the full name of ‘SAARC’.
Answer:
The full name of SAARC is South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation.

Question 3.
Write down the names of SAARC member countries.
Or
Write the names of any four countries of SAARC.
Answer:

  1. India
  2. Pakistan
  3. Bangladesh
  4. Bhutan
  5. Maldives
  6. Sri Lanka
  7. Nepal,
  8. Afghanistan.

Question 4.
Write a short note on SAFTA
Answer:
The aim of SAFTA is to establish a ‘South Asia Free Trade Area’ through mutual co-operation. A free trade area means that trading among the countries of the area is free from taxes and custom restrictions.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 5.
Write down any two achievements of ‘SAARC’.
Answer:

  • All the member countries of SAARC have come closer to one another and their mutual tension has been lessened.
  • All the member countries are collectively working for their socio-economic development.

Question 6.
Write any two problems of SAARC.
Answer:

  • The first problem is Political lnstability in the SAARC Region.
  • The second problem of SAARC is Terrorism.

One Line Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by SAARC?
Or
What is the full form of SAARC?
Answer:
SAARC i.e. South Assian Association for Regional Cooperation is an organisation of eight countries of South Asia. It has been established with the objective of increasing mutual co-operation between these countries.

Question 2.
When was SAARC established?
Answer:
A Conference of the Foreign Ministers of seven countries was held on 1-2 August, 1983. They deliberated about the establishment of SAARC. It was formally founded in its first conference at Dhaka in Bangladesh in 1985.

Question 3.
What has been the impact of SAARC as a means of Regional Co-operation?
Answer:
Because of SAARC, the South Asian Countries have come closer to each other. It has been successful in settling some common problems in these countries.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 4.
Mention full form of SAARC and SAFTA
Answer:

  • SAARC: South Asian Association for Regional Co-operation.
  • SAFTA: South Asian Free Trade Area.

Question 5.
When and where was the 18th SAARC Conference held?
Answer:
The 18th SAARC Summit conference was held at Thimpu, the capital of Nepal on Nov. 2014.

Question 6.
Write down names of member countries of SAARC.
Answer:
SAARC includes countries such as India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan, Bengladesh, Maldives and Afganistan.

Question 7.
When and in which conference, Afganistan was made a member country of SAARC?
Answer:
Afganistan was made a member of SAARC in the 14th Summit Conference held in India in April, 2007.

Question 8.
Where is the office of SAARC situated?
Answer:
The office of SAARC is in Kathmandu, the capital of Nepal.

Question 9.
Write down any two countries in the north of India who have joined SAARC.
Answer:
In the north of India, Nepal and Bhutan are the member countries of SAARC.

Question 10.
Write down any two countries in the south of India who have joined SAARC.
Answer:
In the south of India, Sri Lanka and Maldives are the member countries of SAARC.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 11.
When was SAARC established?
Answer:
1985.

Question 12.
Write down any one name of the member country of SAARC.
Answer:
India.

Question 13.
How many conferences of SAARC have been held so far?
Answer:
There have been 18 Summit Conferences of SAARC so far.

Question 14.
Where was the 14th Summit Conference of SAARC held?
Answer:
In India.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Fill in The Blanks

1. The SAARC is an organisation of ………….. member states.
Answer:
Eight

2. ………….. is playing an important role in SAARC activities.
Answer:
India

3. First SAARC Summit was concluded on 8 Dec ………….. .
Answer:
1985

4. 17th SAARC Summit was held in ………….. .
Answer:
Maldives.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

True Or False Statement

1. SAARC is a national organisation.
Answer:
False

2. SAARC is an Institution of South Asian countries.
Answer:
True

3. India is not a member of SAARC.
Answer:
False

4. Afghanistan becomes 8th member of SAARC.
Answer:

5. So far fifteen summits have concluded of SAARC.
Answer:
False.

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
SAARC was initiated by:
(a) Mr. Zia-ul-Rehman
(b) Mr. Zia-ul-Haq
(c) Mrs. Indira Gandhi
(d) Mr. Mujib-ur-Rehman
Answer:
(a) Mr. Zia-ul-Rehman

Question 2.
SAARC is a/an:
(a) Universal Organisation
(b) Regional Organisation
(c) World Organisation
(d) International Organisation
Answer:
(b) Regional Organisation

Question 3.
The 18th Summit of SAARC
(a) India
(b) Sri Lanka
(c) Nepal
(d) Bhutan.
Answer:
(c) Nepal

PSEB 12th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 16 India and SAARC

Question 4.
The SAARC was formed
(a) 1987
(b) 1983
(c) 1985
(d) 1982.
Answer:
(b) 1983